Marine Drafting

Marine
Drafting
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.
Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not
be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from
a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Marine Drafting User Guide
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
September 2011 12.1
Comments / Remarks
Extensive changes/updates throughout the User Guide.
Chapter A1.7.21 - Unit System, default variables have been
removed
September 2011 12.1
New Chapter in 3. Utilities: 3.4 SY013 - Store Drawings in the

PADD database.
September 2011 12.1
New function in Operators Instructions; Design Area Docs.
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
December 2011
12.1.2
Operators Instructions update to 2D Restrictions. Update to

Label.
December 2011
12.1.2
Changes to chapter 3, Utilities.
January 2012
12.1.2
Chapter A3 Preview Images in Appendices removed.
January 2012
12.1.2
New Multi-row dimension texts added in Operators Instructions

Drafting:
#/
New-line separator
January 2012
12.1.2
February 2012
Chapter utilities, information about drawing forms required by

SB028 and SB029 has been added.
Removed Tribon.
February 2012
12.1.SP3
Operators Instructions change to Modify/Dimension multiple

choice menu, Transform Text to Move Dimension Text.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Model Viewing and General Drafting; new 2.7 Change

Highlighting
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New Chapter in A12 System Layers; A.12.4 Outfitting Layers
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New function Autotagging added to Operators Instructions.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Distance to RSO added to Operators Instructions.
October 2012
12.1.SP#
New functions added to Operators Instructions: Save to SDB

and Subpicture from SBD
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Update to chapter Automatic Drawing Production (ADP).
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Update to Operators Instructions / Dimension / 3D / Distance to

RSO.
January 2013
12.1.SP4
New chapter in Appendices; Remove Obsolete .SDB Files.
January 2013
12.1.SP4
New chapter in Operators Instruction/Tools/Model View - Split
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New default keyword - DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN
April 2013
12.1.SP4
Two new default keywords MODEL_SUBPICTURE_2DREGROUP_ALLOW and

MODEL_COMPONENT_AS_CURRENT_ALLOW
April 2013
12.1.SP4
New functionality in Open Drawing - Read-only mode.

Operators Instructions - Open Drawing.
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
Comments / Remarks
May 2013
12.1.SP4
Improved functionality for editing evaluation of dimension text.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
A number of Drafting keywords controlling the blanking concept

have been introduced.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
New functionality; Distribute Drawings of a certain type across

several DEPTs.
May 2013
12.1.SP4
New chapter in Operatorss Instructions Drafting / ANNOTATE/

LABEL
Modified Operatorss Instructions Drafting / MODIFY/LABEL
Modified Appendices/Drafting default keywords

Contents
Contents
Page
Drafting
Operators Instructions Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators Instructions Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
FILE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
SAVE AND UNCLAIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAVE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GET WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTRACT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSE DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE DRAWING AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT
..............................................................
DRAWING REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLLAPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISSOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHOW
............................................................................
1:1
1:1
1:1
1:2
1:2
1:3
1:4
1:5
1:5
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:7
1:7
1:8
1:8
1:8
TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Copyright 1974 to current year.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12 Series

Contents
DXF
DWG
IGES
SDB
EXPORT
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
1:10
1:10
1:11
1:11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
DXF
...........................................................................
CGM, TIF, SVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGES
...........................................................................
SDB
...........................................................................
1:12
1:12
1:13
1:13
DATA BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

LIST
DELETE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HULL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTFITTING DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPOOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:23
1:23
1:23
1:23
1:24
1:24
1:24
1:24
1:25
1:25
EXIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
EDIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26
DELETE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:26
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PART OF DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTE
...........................................................................
LABEL
...........................................................................
POSITION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCH PATTERN ISLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXT
...........................................................................
DRAWING REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTRUCTION LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BY LAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAST ENTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:26
1:28
1:29
1:30
1:30
1:30
1:31
1:31
1:31
1:32
1:32
1:32
1:33
1:33
1:34
1:34
1:35
1:36
TEXT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
VIEW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
REPAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
ZOOM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:37

ii
12 Series

Contents
IN
...........................................................................
OUT
...........................................................................
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO
...........................................................................
PREVIOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HALF
...........................................................................
DEFINE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAN
LAYER
GRID
VISIBLE
SNAP
1:37
1:38
1:38
1:39
1:39
1:39
1:39
1:40
1:41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:43
ENVELOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:45
DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:45
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
2D RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
VISIBLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46
NEW VIEWPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46

SHADED VIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:47
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSCALE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOM WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOM
...........................................................................
SLIDE
...........................................................................
SPIN
...........................................................................
WALK
...........................................................................
TILT
...........................................................................
ZOOM MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOP VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRAME VIEW - LOOKING AFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRAME VIEW - LOOKING FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIDE VIEW - LOOKING PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING AFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING FOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:47
1:47
1:48
1:48
1:48
1:49
1:49
1:49
1:50
1:50
1:50
1:51
1:51
1:51
1:52
PERSPECTIVE CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52

MESSAGE WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
LOG VIEWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52

EXPLORERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:53
DESIGN EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUFACTURING EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAWING EXPLORER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDINS
1:53
1:53
1:53
1:53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:54
DRAW LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEARCH UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEARCH RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iii
1:54
1:54
1:54
1:54
12 Series

Contents
REFERENCE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55

ATTRIBUTES UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
COMMAND WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55

LINK DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
ADD LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55
LINKS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
INSERT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
MODEL
.............................................................
VIRTUAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT
.............................................................
LINE
.............................................................
ARC
.............................................................
POLYLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STAIRCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINE
.............................................................
CONIC
.............................................................
RECTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SQUARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARALLEL CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLET
.............................................................
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTRUCTION LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXT
.............................................................
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBPICTURE FROM SBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARD DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLATE PART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAWING FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODES
.............................................................
1:58
1:60
1:60
1:61
1:61
1:61
1:62
1:62
1:63
1:63
1:64
1:64
1:65
1:66
1:67
1:68
1:70
1:71
1:72
1:73
1:73
1:74
1:74
CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:74
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
TANGENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:75
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:76
FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:76
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYER
.............................................................
HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFAULTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv
1:77
1:77
1:78
1:78
1:79
12 Series

Contents
LOCAL ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81

GEOMETRY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81
2D POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE
...........................................................................
ARC
...........................................................................
CONIC
...........................................................................
POLYLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZAP
1:81
1:90
1:92
1:95
1:97
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:98
OPERATION COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUIT
.............................................................
CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALL
.............................................................
SUBPICTURE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:98
1:99
1:99
1:99
1:99
1:99
VIEW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:99
SUBVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100
COMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100
SUBCOMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:100
TOOLS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:101
MODEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:101
PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CROSS SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PANEL INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COPY
..........................................................................
1:101
1:102
1:102
1:103
1:104
MODEL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:104

EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSCALE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTSCALE ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D RESTRICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE PROJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE ANNOTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLICE
..........................................................................
SPLIT
..........................................................................
CLEAR
..........................................................................
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HULL SYMMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:105
1:105
1:106
1:106
1:107
1:108
1:108
1:108
1:109
1:109
1:110
1:110
1:112
1:113
BACKDROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:113
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:114
CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE
..........................................................................
SAVE AS STD DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE AS STD HATCH PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE TO SDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1:114
1:116
1:117
1:118
1:119
1:120
12 Series

Contents
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDEFINE TRANSFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLIT
..........................................................................
VITESSE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:128
RUN SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RUN SELECTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILES
..........................................................................
EDIT
..........................................................................
DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INQUIRY
1:121
1:122
1:124
1:126
1:128
1:128
1:128
1:129
1:129
1:129
1:129
1:130
1:130
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:131
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAME
..........................................................................
VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USED LAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAWING STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTRIBUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Area Docs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA ACCESS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB CHANGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBAL COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBAL LOCKING AND ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:131
1:131
1:132
1:132
1:133
1:133
1:133
1:134
1:134
1:134
1:135
1:135
1:135
1:136
DRAWING FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136

OPEN
SAVE
SYMBOL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:137
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:138
OPEN
..........................................................................
SAVE
..........................................................................
REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSPECT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEAN WORKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBAL TRANSACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE CONFIRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLAIM LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LISTS
............................................................
DB LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:138
1:140
1:141
1:142
1:142
1:145
1:145
1:146
1:146
1:147
1:147
1:147
EXPLORER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
RESET WINDOW LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:147
PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:148
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:148

vi
12 Series

Contents
LINEAR
............................................................
RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAMETER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANGLE
............................................................
CURVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AREA
............................................................
DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D
............................................................
1:150
1:154
1:158
1:161
1:164
1:168
1:168
1:169
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXIS PARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURVE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WEIGHT AND COG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHELL PROFILE MOUNTING ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISTANCE TO RSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISTANCE TO PLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:169
1:172
1:176
1:178
1:178
1:180
1:186
1:190
ANNOTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:194
GENERAL NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:194
POSITION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:195
CONFIG NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:196
CONFIG SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:197
CONFIG MOVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:197
HULL NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:198

POS NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEVEL
..........................................................................
GRINDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLE DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LABEL
............................................................
AUTOTAGGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RULER
............................................................
POSITION RULER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIPE RESTRICTION SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL RESTRICION SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CROSS
............................................................
CLOUD
............................................................
MODIFY
MOVE
1:198
1:199
1:200
1:200
1:201
1:202
1:207
1:208
1:209
1:210
1:212
1:212
1:213
1:213
1:214
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
TEXT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:215
REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:216
COPY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:217

vii
12 Series

Contents
TEXT
..........................................................................
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:217
1:218
1:218
1:219
TRANSFORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:220
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUBPICTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCALE
..........................................................................
MOVE DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE TWO POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE TWO POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE -90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIRROR U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIRROR V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIRROR LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSFORM FOUR POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAME AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALONG CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIM
1:220
1:221
1:221
1:222
1:222
1:222
1:223
1:223
1:223
1:223
1:223
1:224
1:224
1:224
1:224
1:225
1:225
1:225
1:225
1:226
1:226
1:226
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:227
TO ENTITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BY LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAP
..........................................................................
CUTOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLET
..........................................................................
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAIN
............................................................
DECHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1:227
1:228
1:229
1:230
1:231
1:232
1:235
1:237
1:238
TEXT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:238
SYMBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:238
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LABEL
............................................................
LABEL PLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOUD
............................................................
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILL STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYER
............................................................
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

viii
1:240
1:243
1:246
1:248
1:248
1:249
1:250
1:253
1:254
12 Series

Contents
PROJECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:254
CHANGE VIEW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:254
AUTODP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
ASSEMBLY DELIVERABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
HVAC SKETCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
PIPE SKETCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:255
WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:256
ARRANGE ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CASCADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSE ALL WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TILE VERTICALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MINIMIZE ALL WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIN VIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELP
1:256
1:256
1:256
1:257
1:257
1:257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:257
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:258
ABOUT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:258
Marine Drafting User Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Automatic Drawing Production (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

Known Limitations using ADP in Marine Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
General ADP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Command Accelerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Workflow Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Persisted Data Base Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Save Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Drawing Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Model Viewing and General Drafting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Drawings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and Organization of Drawings in PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and Organization of Individual Drawing Files (.SDB files). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-Defined Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Number of Drawings in a REGI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:1
2:1
2:2
2:2
2:2
Link Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3

Drawing Hierarchy (Subpictures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Drawing Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

ix
12 Series

Contents
Drawing References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6

Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Layers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
System Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
User Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Layer Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Model Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annotation and Drafting Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Forms and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:7
2:8
2:8
2:8
2:8
Geometric Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9

Lines, Arcs, Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Notes and Position Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Config Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Config Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Config Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Hook Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getNoteName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getNoteChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getNoteFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
setNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:10
2:10
2:10
2:10
2:10
2:11
2:11
2:13
2:14
2:16
2:16
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Texts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Truetype Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17

Basic Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complex Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Defined Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Type Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters controlling the Display of Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Line Type Name alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colours
2:17
2:19
2:19
2:20
2:20
2:22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Common Functions and Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23

Basic 2D Geometry Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:23
Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arc Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Offset Input Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:23
2:24
2:24
2:24
2:25
2:25
3D Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:25

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26

12 Series

Contents
3D Request Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Usage of 2D Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic 3D Point Definition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add (3D) Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify
...........................................................................
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capture
.............................................................
Multiple Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Positioning of a Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Positioning of a Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Transform Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Transformations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:26
2:26
2:27
2:27
2:27
2:28
2:29
2:29
2:29
2:29
2:30
2:30
2:30
2:30
2:31
2:31
2:31
2:31
2:32
Select Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Model attributes obtained by Tools-Inquiry-Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32

Selection of Model Name and Name Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Creating Drawing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Creating a New Drawing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Changing an Old Drawing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
Creating Note and Position Number Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33

Note Symbol Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34
Position Number Symbol Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Creating Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35

Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Geometry Linetype Change When Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
MouseWheelZoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
Zoom Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:37
Common Layout Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D Linear Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Linear Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Axis Parallel Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance to Plane Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radius Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diameter Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinates Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of Curve Length Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout of Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xi
2:37
2:38
2:40
2:40
2:40
2:40
2:41
2:42
2:43
2:44
2:44
12 Series

Contents
Adding Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:44
Hull Mould Line Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:45

Import/export using 2D DXF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:46
Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Layer Control in DXF Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Mapping Line Types in DXF Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:49
Import / Export using IGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
IGES Entities Handled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
Export of 3D DXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54

Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
Standard Left Mouse Button Drag Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55
Right Mouse Button Drag Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:56
Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:56
Usage Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57

The Benefits of Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:57
Example of Layers and Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Levels of Subpictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subpictures Created by the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subpictures Created by the User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Subpicture Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:57
2:58
2:58
2:58
2:59
2:59
Replacing Dialogue String Input with Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60
Context Sensitive Right Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61

Texts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:61
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Navigate To - functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:62
Multiple Select in Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:67

How to Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Select Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Cancel Multiple Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work with Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extend Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:67
2:67
2:69
2:70
2:70
2:72
2:74
Change Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74

Change Highlighting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
SB021 - Symbol Font Utility Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
SY006 - Insert Text by Drawing Form Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
SY007 - Validate Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

xii
12 Series

Contents
SY013 - Store Drawings in the PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

SB028 - Handle Standard Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
SB029 - Create Drawings Presenting Symbols in Specified Fonts . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
TBGENPREVIEW - Generate Drawing Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
SZ024 - Export to Neutral Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Purpose of the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Components of the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Input Data to the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resulting Data from the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Action for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative way of invoking the conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:11
3:11
3:11
3:11
Format for Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11

Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keywords and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curve
...........................................................................
Primitive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Object File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:12
3:12
3:15
3:16
3:16
3:16
3:17
Restrictions for SZ004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19

Restrictions of SZ004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Format for Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20

Keywords and Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primitive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contour Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cap
...........................................................................
Parallel Epiped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cone
...........................................................................
Torus
...........................................................................
Rotational Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:20
3:23
3:23
3:24
3:27
3:28
3:28
3:28
3:29
3:29
3:30
3:30
3:30
SZ004 - Creation of Pictures by Extracting Model Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31

General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:31
How to Run the Program for Creation of Model Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures in Batch - Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used in this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheme Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statement Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii
3:33
3:33
3:33
3:33
3:33
12 Series

Contents
Creation of a Model Picture in Batch - Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:38
SY010 - Drawing Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:39
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
Internal Drawing Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Set-up Files used by Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Compatibility with other Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1
Drafting Default File Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Texts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Scales
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Print Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Projection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:4
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5
Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:11
Notes, Position Numbers and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:12
Drawing Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:14
Unit Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15
Default Colours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:15
Default Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:16
Horizontal/Vertical Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Verify & Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Form
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:17
Auto Point Definition Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:18
Coordinate Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:19
Grid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:19
Print
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Plate Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Unit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:20
Coordinate Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:21
MarkUp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:21
Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:22
PADD Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:33
Example of a Default File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35

Colour Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:35
Example of a Layer Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:43

Example of a Layer Class File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44

xiv
12 Series

Contents
Example of a Material Alias File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44

Example of an Intelligent Texts file for Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:44
System Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:45
General Drafting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Projection Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hull Modelling Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outfitting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General 3D Picture Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A:45
A:46
A:48
A:48
A:48
Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:48

System-defined Text Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:52
Example of a DXF Layer Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:52
Backup and Restore Facilities for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:54
Remove Obsolete .SDB Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:56
Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:57

xv
12 Series

Contents

xvi
12 Series

Operators Instructions Drafting

12 Series

Operators Instructions

ii
12 Series


FILE
SAVE AND UNCLAIM
Purpose:
Save the element changed or created in the session to disk, so

that other users can pick up the changes. All elements are also
unclaimed, so that other users may change them
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Save and Unclaim.
Options:
None.
Result:
The elements are saved to disk, and are o pen for updates.
SAVE WORK
Purpose:
Save changed or created elements in the session to disk. The

elements remain claimed to the current session.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Save Work.
Options:
None.
Result:
Changed or created elements are saved to disk.
GET WORK
Purpose:
Pick up the changes that other people have made to the

database since your sessions was started.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Get Work.
Options:
None.
Result:
Elements created or changed by other users are made visible in

the current session.

1:1
12 Series

EXTRACT CONTROL
Purpose:
Handle database extracts.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Extract Control. This will open the dialog
that handles extract issues, such as issuing and flushing.
Options:
None.
Result:
Depending on user actions.
NEW DRAWING
Purpose:
To create a new drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click New Drawing.

If a drawing already is current, you will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is created.
In the new drawing dialog you can select the name of the type of
the new drawing. By default the system will suggest an
"UNTITLED" name, UNTITLED1 for instance (if a drawing with
this name already exists it will suggest UNTITLED2 instead. If
UNTITLED2 already exists it will suggest UNTITLED3 etc). If you
don't do any changes in this field the name is regarded as
system defined otherwise it is user defined. This condition will
affect the behaviour of the Save Drawing function, please see
below.
In the Backing Sheet field you can (optionally) define the name of
a backing sheet to be added to the new drawing. You can key in
the name or click the Browse button which will allow You to
search/browse for a proper backing sheet.
Options:
If the variable DWG_NAME_UPPERCASE is set to Yes it is not

possible to use lowercase characters in the Drawing Name field.
With the variable DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN you can control the
maximum number of characters that can be given for the new
drawing name.
Result:

A new drawing with the selected name and type is created and
made current.
1:2
12 Series

OPEN DRAWING
Purpose:
To open an existing drawing, either within a standard drawing

data bank or within a customer defined drawing data bank.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Open Drawing.

If a drawing already is current, You will be prompted to save this
drawing before the new one is opened.
In a dialog that now appears, the name of the drawing can be
either keyed in or selected from a list of drawings. The drawing
list is generated by typing a wild card name (containing '*' and/or
'%') and thereafter selecting the List button. Once the name of
the drawing has been keyed in, or selected from the list, click the
Open button to open the drawing.

1:3
12 Series

Options:
You can filter your selection on drawing types in the Type field.
Only drawings matching the selected type will be listed.
However, if the type is "General Drawing", drawings with
"undefined" drawing type will also be included in the result list.
Drawings generated in Outfitting Draft have undefined drawing
type.
There is an option to open the drawing in read-only mode by
checking the Read-only check box. With this functionality you
will not claim the drawing for other users. In the read-only mode
you will actually be working in a temporary copy of the selected
drawing. You should not do any permanent changes to this
drawing. The drawing cannot be saved, neither with "Save
Drawing" nor with "Save Drawing As". You can only do "export
SDB". This copy is disconnected from the PADD database and
for that reason it is not possible to do changes that requires a
PADD database, for example:
Draw outfitting
Create or modify associative dimensions
Create or modify associative labels
The user can, before opening the drawing, control the initial
appearance of the drawing with respect to Envelopes (however,
envelopes already defined in the drawing are not affected).
Select the desired alternative in the Envelope radio box:
None - No envelope control (default)
Initial - All views are initially shown with its envelope
Permanent - All views are permanently defined as

envelopes
The user can also, before opening the drawing, control the
automatic expanding of Drawing References. The Expand
Drawing References check box is used for this purpose.
If you click the Open via Link button, this will open a dialog that
will let you select a drawing reference in the link documents
hierarchy.
If the variable DWG_NAME_UPPERCASE is set to Yes it is not
possible to use lowercase characters in the Drawing Name field.
Result:
An existing drawing is opened and displayed on the screen.
CLOSE DRAWING
Purpose:
To close the current drawing without exiting the application.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Close Drawing.

You will be prompted to save the drawing before closing.

1:4
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be closed.
SAVE DRAWING
Purpose:
To save the current drawing in the Drawing data bank.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Save Drawing.

If the name of the current drawing is system defined you will
enter the "Save As" dialog where you can give a new userdefined name of the drawing.
Options:
If the variable SBB_SAVE_PREVIEW is set to "YES", a preview

of the drawing will be saved.
Result:
The current drawing will be saved on the Drawing data bank.
SAVE DRAWING AS
Purpose:
To save the current drawing with a new unique name in the

Drawing data bank.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Save Drawing AS.

In the object browser dialog that now appears, You can select a
new name. Note that no drawing with this name must already
exist in the data bank. It is possible to browse the contents of the
Drawing data bank by keying in a wild card name.
Options:
The User can save the drawing as a new drawing type in the
Type field prior to clicking the Save button.
The Save as link button will allow You to add a reference to the
current drawing in the link documents hierarchy.
If the variable SBB_SAVE_PREVIEW is set to "YES", a preview
of the drawing will be saved.
Result:

The current drawing is renamed and saved with the selected

drawing type. All changes to the original drawing will be
discarded.
1:5
12 Series

PRINT PREVIEW
Purpose:
To show You how the drawing will look like when printed.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Print Preview.

A dialog showing the drawing when printed will appear. After
inspecting the print result, You may start printing or just close the
dialog.
Options:
None.
Result:
The look of the drawing when printed will be shown.
Purpose:
To print the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Print.
Options:
Printer properties and print options can be selected in the dialog

before print job is started. Effective Print Area and Scale and
Orientation options can be saved through button Save Settings
and used later in another session of Drafting based application.
Result:
The current drawing will be printed on the current print device.
PRINT
DRAWING REFERENCE
Purpose:
To administer the handling of Drawing References in the current

drawing.
Purpose:
In the current drawing, to establish references to other drawings

in the Drawing data bank.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Define.
DEFINE
In the object browser dialog that now appears, You are prompted
to key in the name of the reference drawing. It is possible to
browse the contents of the Drawing data bank by keying in a wild
card name.
Once selected, the content of the referred drawing is positioned
by user in the current drawing, using the general transformation
tool. The link to the reference drawing is now established.

1:6
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
A link to a reference drawing is established, with the geometric

information shown.
COLLAPSE
Purpose:
In the current drawing, to remove geometric information in

drawing references.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Collapse.

The (expanded) drawing references to collapse are now
indicated by user, one by one. Select All to collapse all
references in the drawing. Once selected, the geometric
information will be replaced by the drawing reference symbol (a
circle containing a identification number and circumscribed by a
rectangle). Note that the link to the referred drawing will remain.
Options:
None.
Result:
The geometric information in drawing references will be

removed, but with the link maintained.
Purpose:
In the current drawing, to return geometric information in drawing

references.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Expand.
EXPAND
The (collapsed) drawing references to expand are now indicated

by user, one by one. Select All to expand all references in the
drawing. Once selected, the drawing reference symbol will be
replaced by the geometric information in the referred drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
The geometric information in drawing references will be returned.

1:7
12 Series

EXCHANGE
Purpose:
In the current drawing, to exchange (refresh) the geometric

information in drawing references. Note that this operation is
equal to collapse followed by expand.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Exchange.

The (expanded) drawing references to exchange are now
indicated by user. Select All to exchange all references in the
drawing. Once selected, the contents of the drawing reference
will be exchanged with the geometric information in the referred
drawing
Options:
None.
Result:
The geometric information in drawing references will be updated.
Purpose:
In the current drawing, to permanently remove th link to referred

drawings.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Dissolve.
DISSOLVE
The drawing references to dissolve are now indicated by user.

Select All to dissolve all references in the drawing. Once
selected, the connection to the referred drawing will be broken.
The current drawing is now the sole owner of the geometric
information, formerly owned by the referred drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
The connections to reference drawings are removed.
Purpose:
To verify all expanded drawing references in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Drawing Reference, then Show.
Options:
None.
Result:
All expanded drawing references will be verified by their drawing

reference symbol (as if they were collapsed).
SHOW

1:8
12 Series

TRANSFER
Purpose:
To copy selected information in the current drawing to another

drawing in the Drawing data bank or any other data bank. If the
receiving drawing does not exist, it will be automatically created.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Transfer.

to key in the name of the receiving drawing. It is possible to
browse the contents of the Drawing data bank by keying in a wild
card name.
If the receiving drawing does not exist in the data bank, it will be
created automatically. In this case a browser for the Standard
data bank appears and You will be prompted to key in the name
of the desired form. Also here, it is possible to browse the
contents of the Standard data bank by keying in a wild card
name. To skip the form, just click OK.
Next, You are asked how to select the information to transfer:
1. by subpicture
2. by layer
When selecting by subpicture, the subpictures are indicated by
user, one by one. In case the receiving drawing contains a form,
You are prompted to give the position for each subpicture in the
receiving drawing, relative to that form. When ready with the
subpicture selection, click Operation Complete or Cancel.
When selecting by layer, layer numbers are keyed in by user,
one by one. When ready with the layer selection, just click CR or
click Cancel.
To complete the transfer operation, click Operation Complete.
Options:
By clicking Options, it is possible specify the data bank for the

receiving drawing. Just key in the name of an existing data bank.
Result:
Information selected by user in the current drawing is copied to

the receiving drawing.

1:9
12 Series

IMPORT
DXF
Purpose:
To import drawings in DXF file format and make this the current
drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Import, then DXF.

drawing before the new one is imported.
In the form that appears enter the full part to the dxf file to import
or use the brows button. When the file has been selected click
the Load button. This will update the Layers, Line types and
Fonts tabs with mapping information. If needed the mapping
information can be edited in the form. Optionally, set the drawing
type to the required type. Finally click the Import button to
perform the import. The drawing created will be opened with the
name UNTITLED.
Options:
None.
Result:
A drawing in DXF file format will, after conversion to drawing

format, be opened.
Purpose:
To import drawings in DWG file format and make this the current
drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Import, then DWG.
DWG

In the form that appears enter the full part to the dwg file to
import or use the brows button. When the file has been selected
click the Load button. This will update the Layers, Line types and
Fonts tabs with mapping information. If needed the mapping
information can be edited in the form. Finally click the Import
button to perform the import. The drawing created will be opened
with the name UNTITLED.
Options:
None.
Result:
A drawing in DWG file format will, after conversion to drawing

format, be opened.

1:10
12 Series

IGES
Purpose:
To import drawings in IGES file format and make this the current
drawing.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Import, then IGES.

In the file browser that now appears, the user is prompted to key
in the name of the IGES file to import. When given, the systemproposed name of the resulting drawing is presented in a dialog
to be optionally edited and confirmed by the user. Note that the
resulting name must not already exist in the Drawing data bank.
After converting the IGES file, the resulting drawing is created
and made the current one.
Options:
None.
Result:
A drawing in IGES file format will, after conversion to drawing

format, be opened.
Purpose:
To import a drawing from a file in SDB format. A new current

drawing will be created and stored in the PADD database. (This
function performs the same task as the migration utility sy013.)
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Import, then SDB.
SDB
In the dialogue that follows you can browse to the desired SDB
file. In the next step a name can be given to the new drawing. By
default the name suggested is the name of the selected drawing.
It is important to notice than that an export followed by an import
may cause loss of data in the PADD database. If you first export
a drawing, delete the drawing in PADD and then import it again
the resulting PADD data may not be the same as for the original
drawing. The reason for this is that some data of a drawing only
exist in PADD and not in the drawing object stored in the SDB
file. PADD data can be lost for:
Dimensions
Texts containing intelligent text expressions
Labels
Options:
None.
Result:
A new current drawing will be created. Drawing data is created in

the PADD database.

1:11
12 Series

EXPORT
DXF
Purpose:
To save the current drawing in DXF file format.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Export, then DXF.

In the form that appears select the type of export, 2D, 3D or
2D+3D. The 2D export will only export the drawing while 3D
export converts the selected models to DXF 3D Facet format.
2D+k3D will do both. Then select the file type, Text or Binary.
When the 3D export is selected it is possible to make a selection
of model objects available in the drawing to export also the detail
level to use. Note that the size of the DXF file grows with
increased detail level.
It is possible to select if hidden elements an/or layer should be
exported or not. This feature is only relevant for 2D export. The
version of DXF file output can be any of the versions from R12 to
AutoCAD 2004. If 2D+3D export is selected it is possible to set
the printable area by clicking the Printable area... button and
then selecting printer and available paper formats and orientation
in the printer form.
Finally select the output directory and name of the exported DXF
file and click the OK button to perform the export.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be saved in DXF file format.
CGM, TIF, SVG
Purpose:
To save the current drawing in SVG, HPGL, TIF or CGM
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Export, then CGM, TIF, SVG.

In the form that appears select the type of output format.
It is possible to specify size of TIF image (in pixels). The size can
depend on drawing aspect ratio. Select this option and specify
length of longer drawing edge.
Finally select the output directory and name of the exported file
and click the OK button to perform the export. Browse button can
be used for this purpose.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be saved in selected file format.

1:12
12 Series

IGES
Purpose:
To save the current drawing in IGES file format.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Export, the IGES.

A dialog now appears, in which You are prompted to key in the
name of the resulting IGES file.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be saved in IGES file format.
Purpose:
To save the current drawing in SDB format. The main purpose of

the function it to export drawings stored in PADD to nonpersisted drawings stored outside the PADD database. The
exported drawing object will be cleared from references to the
PADD database.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Export, then SDB.
SDB
In the dialogue that appears you can select the name and the
directory where to place the exported file.
By default the name suggested is the name of the current
drawing
The default directory is the one assigned to the environment
variable SB_PDB.
The selected name must by valid for a non-persisted drawing:
1. Must be less than 26 characters
2. May contain capital letters A-Z, numbers 0-9, '-' and '_'. If
using lower case they will automatically be converted to
capital letters.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be saved in SDB file format in the

selected directory.

1:13
12 Series

DATA BANK
LIST
Purpose:
To list objects in arbitrary data banks.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Data bank, then List.

Selecting what kind of objects to list
The specific kind of objects to list is selected from a multiple
choice dialog, showing the different alternatives (initial systemproposed data banks to the right):
1. Drawings
Drawing DB
SB_PDB)
2. Standards
Standard Library DB
(SBD_STD)
3. Subpictures
Subpicture DB
(SBD_PICT)
4. In Book
Standard Library DB
(SBD_STD)
5. Other
user-defined DB
The first 4 choices denotes specific kinds of objects while the
last choice Other means that any kind of object can be listed. In
this case, the initial data bank is first supplied by user.
Listing Objects
The name of the object(s) to list is keyed in. Wild cards are
accepted. The names of the matching objects will be listed
together with the following attributes:
Revision date
Object codes
Size, in 512 byte blocks
To list a data bank, other than the initially system-proposed, click

Options. The system will then let You key in the name of another
data bank (the name of the current data bank is proposed).

1:14
12 Series

Listing the Book

If In Book is selected, another multiple choice dialog appears
from where the kind of book to list in is selected:
1. Standard Detail Book
2. Hatch Pattern Book
Next, all existing pages in the book are presented in a dialog,
from where the page to list is selected by user. Once selected, all
existing details within that page are listed. To confirm the listing,
click Close.
Options:
None.
Result:
Objects will be listed according to Users action.
Purpose:
To delete objects in arbitrary data banks.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Data bank, then Delete In.
DELETE
Selecting what kind of objects to delete

The specific type of objects to delete is selected from a multiple
choice dialog, showing the different alternatives (initial systemproposed data banks to the right):
1. Drawings
Drawing DB
(SB_PDB)
2. Standards
Standard Library DB
(SBD_STD)
3. Subpictures
Subpicture DB
(SBD_PICT)
4. In Book
Standard Library DB

1:15
(SBD_STD)
12 Series

Deleting Objects
to key in the name of the object to delete. It is possible to browse
the contents of the data bank by keying in a wild card name. To
delete in a data bank, other than the initially system-proposed,
click Options. The system will then let You key in the name of
another data bank (the name of the current data bank is
proposed).
Before the actual deletion of an object takes place, it must be
confirmed by You.
Deleting in the Standard Book
If In Book is selected, another multiple choice dialog appears
from where the kind of book to delete in is selected:
1. Standard Detail Book
2. Hatch Pattern Book
Next, the user decides what to delete:
Whole pages
Single details within pages
If deleting whole pages, all existing pages in the book are

presented in a dialog, from where the page to delete is selected
bIf deleting single details, the page is selected as above. All
existing details within the selected page are then presented and
the user is asked to select the detail to delete.
Before the actual deletion of a page/detail takes place, it must be
confirmed by You.
Options:
None.
Result:
Objects will be deleted according to Users action.
PROPERTIES
Purpose:
To add, change and remove some predefined information in the

current drawing such as the drawing name, date, author, scale,
security class etc. The information is saved as part of the
drawing form, connected to specific text rules. For details about
creating a form with text rules, refer to the function Tools /
Drawing Form / SAVE.
Prerequisites:
The current drawing must contain a drawing form, with the

underlying form object available in the Standard Data bank.

1:16
12 Series

Instructions:
In the File menu, click Properties.

The function uses a SBFS form dialog when interacting with the
user. This form contains a number of fields corresponding to
certain information connected to the drawing e.g. drawing name,
date, author, scale etc. Each field in the SBFS form has a
specific rule number connected to it. The information in such a
field will be inserted in the drawing, according the corresponding
rule number in the drawing form (if it exists). When this function
is entered, it tries to read the information (if there is any) in the
current drawing and when the SBFS form appears this info will
be shown in the appropriate fields. If no information is found for a
certain field, this fields will be empty.
For general information on rules and dynamic texts, see Drawing
Forms and Rules in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting.
The function can handle three slightly different SBFS forms as
described below. The SBFS form to use is controlled by the
Default Keyword UPDATE_DRAW_INFO_FORM.
Fields in the SBFS form #1
The different fields and their corresponding rule numbers:

1:17
12 Series

The last eight rule numbers @600 - @607 deserves some

explanation. As given by the @ sign, these are rule numbers of
type table. There can be a total of twenty rows for each such rule.
It is possible in the SBF form to scroll between these 20 rows but
not individually; all eight fields will be scrolled together. In the
drawing form, it is recommended to position these rule definition
texts to each other and also to give them the same maximum
number of rows when specifying these rules.
Also the last of these rules deserves an explanation. There are
three "internal" lines for each of the 20 table rows connected to
@607. The distance between the internal lines is predefined to
0,5*<height of text>. One must have this in mind when specifying
the height and interline space for this rule number.
New form rules in Drafting for TDM Information.

1:18
12 Series

Fields in the SBFS form #2.

The different fields and their corresponding rule numbers:

1:19
12 Series


1:20
12 Series

New form rules in Drafting for TDM Information.
Fields in the SBFS form #3

The layout of this form is nearly identical with the form number 1
depicted above, the difference is the handling of the drawing
name.
If a drawing is named as follows:
<drawing name> = <drawing no>-<sheet no>-<revision>, where
<drawing name> = $2000
<drawing no> = $2113
<sheet no> = $2111
<revision> = $2112
the corresponding fields in the SBFS form are updated
automatically.

1:21
12 Series

Functionality
Here follows a description of the functions buttons in the lower
part of the SBFS form dialog:
The following three functions handles the scrolling of the @

fields.
When the function New rev. is used and the drawing update with
this information, there will be one more row of the @ tables in the
drawing. If there already are 20 rows (maximum no of rows), the
first row of the @ tables will be removed and there will be a new
row at the bottom of each table. This means that the information
in these tables will be scrolled upwards when new information is
entered. As long as there are less than 20 rows in these tables
they will increase downwards.
Options
None.
Result:
The drawing is updated with the information as defined by the

User.

1:22
12 Series

MODULES
MONITOR
Purpose:
To switch to the Monitor module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Monitor.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current module will exit and the selected module will be
started.
HULL DESIGN
Purpose:
To switch to the Hull Design module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Monitor.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
OUTFITTING
Purpose:
To switch to the Outfitting module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Outfitting.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
OUTFITTING DRAFT
Purpose:
To switch to the Outfitting Draft module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Outfitting Draft.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.

1:23
12 Series

DIAGRAMS
Purpose:
To switch to the Diagrams module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Diagrams.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
Purpose:
To switch to the Spooler module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Spooler.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
SPOOLER
ISODRAFT
Purpose:
To switch to the Isodraft module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Isodraft.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
Purpose:
To switch to the Paragon module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Paragon.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
PARAGON

1:24
12 Series

SPECON
Purpose:
To switch to the Specon module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Specon.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
Purpose:
To switch to the Propcon module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Modules, then Propcon.
Options:
None.
Result:
started.
Purpose:
To exit the Marine Drafting module.
Instructions:
In the File menu, click Exit.
PROPCON
EXIT
Any current work will, after user confirmation, be saved before

terminating the module.
Options:
None.
Result:
The Marine Drafting module is terminated after optionally saving

the current work.

1:25
12 Series

EDIT
DELETE
Purpose:
To enable the User to permanently delete all types of graphic

items in the current drawing.
Instructions:
Several alternative deletion commands are available, each being

for a specific group of graphic entities, including geometry, text,
dimensioning, hatching and drawing layers, etc. The use of each
of the available commands is described in the associated Tip
Text for each.
It is to be noted that deleting a graphic entity does not result in
the automatic deletion of any graphic entities that related to or
referred to the deleted entity.
It is to be noted that the deletion is immediately permanent and
the EDIT > DELETE > LAST ENTITY command does not work in
this context.
Options:
None.
Result:
Graphic entities, geometry, text and dimensioning, etc. are

permanently deleted from the display and the associated
drawing file.
GEOMETRY
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of basic geometric entities like points,

contours, texts and symbols in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Geometry.

You are now prompted to indicate a geometric entity to delete.
Once the entity has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
actually deleted until You confirm it by
clicking Operation Complete or
indicating another entity to delete
To cancel the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.

Finally note that geometry belonging to Drawing References
cannot be deleted.

1:26
12 Series

Options:
At entrance (or more exactly as long as no geometric entity is

highlighted for deletion), it is possible to specify what kind of
geometry to delete: just click Options and a multiple choice
dialog will appear, containing the following alternatives:
1. Point
2. Segment
3. Contour
4. Text
5. Symbol
6. Any
The alternative Segment means that, when indicating a multiplesegment contour, only the segment closest to the indication will
be deleted.
The alternative Any means that any kind of geometric entity
(points, contours, texts or symbols) will be identified for deletion.
Result:

User-indicated geometric entities in the current drawing will be

deleted.
1:27
12 Series

SUBPICTURE
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of general subpictures in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Subpicture.

Initially, You are prompted to identify the subpicture to delete by
cursor. However, it is possible to specify how to identify the
subpicture to delete: just click Options and a multiple choice
dialog will appear, containing the following alternatives:
1. By cursor (indicate)
2. By name
3. Envelope
4. By Area
When identifying by cursor, the level of the first indicated
subpicture will be used as default level for subsequently
indicated subpictures. In this way, the user only has to select the
level once when deleting multiple subpictures on the same level.
To change the default level of the subpicture there are three
alternatives:
Leave and re-enter the function.
Click Options and re-select by cursor alternative
To get the currently selected subpicture deleted before

changing the default level, first indicate another subpicture,
then click Cancel twice.
When the subpicture has been identified, the system will then
search for all other subpictures on the same level and with same
name as the indicated one. If a single subpicture has been
identified, it will be highlighted but not actually deleted until You
confirm by
identifying another subpicture to delete
To deny the deletion, click Cancel or Quit.

If more than one subpicture with the same name are found, all
will be highlighted and the user can then order if all, or just the
one indicated should be deleted. To deny the deletion, click
Cancel.
When identifying by name, the system will find all subpictures
with the given name on any level (it is supposed that a drawing
does not contain identical subpicture names on different levels)
and then proceed to highlight them one by one while letting user
accept (Yes) or deny (No) the proposed deletion. To quit this
dialog, click Cancel. To delete the remaining subpictures without
confirmation, click Options.

1:28
12 Series

When identifying Envelopes (by cursor), only the indicated

enveloped subpicture will be handled here, regardless the name
of this subpicture.
When identifying by Area, the system will capture all subpictures
on a given level and totally inside a user-defined area (rectangle
or polygon) and then proceed to highlight them one by one while
letting user accept (Yes) or deny (No) the proposed deletion. To
quit this dialog, click Cancel. To delete the remaining subpictures
without confirmation, click Options.
Finally note that subpictures belonging to Drawing References
can be deleted only if they are collapsed
Options:
None.
Result:
User-identified subpictures in the current drawing will be deleted.
DIMENSION
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of dimension components in the

current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Dimension.

You are now prompted to indicate a dimension to delete. Once
the dimension component has been identified, it will be
highlighted but not actually deleted until You confirm it by
indicating another dimension to delete

Options:
By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a dimension to

delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all
dimensions in the drawing.
If You want to delete all components within a specific subpicture
(view or subview), click Options during user confirmation and
indicate the subpicture to treat. All components only within the
specified subpicture will then be deleted.
Result:

User-indicated dimension components in the current drawing will

be deleted.
1:29
12 Series

PART OF DIMENSION
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of parts of dimension components in

the current drawing.
This function is applicable only on dimensions, consisting of a
number of sub-measures. Such kind of dimensions are:
Instructions:
linear of type normal or staircase
curved of type normal or staircase
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Part of Dimension.

You are now prompted to indicate a part of dimension to delete.
Once the part has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
indicating another part of dimension to delete

Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated parts of dimension components in the current

drawing will be deleted.
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of note components in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete / DIM, see that

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Note'.
Options:
See Edit / Delete / DIM.
Result:
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of label components in the current

drawing.
Instructions:

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Label'.
Options:
Result:
NOTE
LABEL

1:30
12 Series

POSITION NUMBER
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of position number components in the

current drawing.
Instructions:

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Position
Number'.
Options:
Result:
HATCH PATTERN
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of hatch pattern components in the

current drawing.
Instructions:

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Hatch Pattern'.
Options:
Result:
HATCH PATTERN ISLAND
Purpose:
This function is used to remove arbitrary regions (islands) of an

existing hatch pattern in the drawing. The boundary of the island
is given by indicating a (closed) contour or a text. It is also
possible to define the boundary as a general closed area within
the hatch pattern.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Hatch Pattern Island.

After indicating the hatch pattern to modify, the user is prompted
to indicate the boundary of the island. Any closed contour, or
contour possible to close by a straight line, will do as a boundary
definition. The boundary may also be defined by the
circumscribed box a user-indicated text.
By clicking Options when the user is prompted to indicate the
island, it is possible to define the boundary by a rectangle,
polygon or a general closed region. The user interaction here is
the same as in the Edit/Delete/By Area function.
Once identified, the hatch pattern inside the boundary will be
removed. When ready, click Operation complete.

1:31
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
Hatch patterns islands will be removed.
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of cloud components in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete/ DIM, see that

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Cloud'.
Options:
See Edit / Delete/ DIM.
Result:
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of markup components in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
The user-interaction is similar to Edit / Delete/ DIM, see that

section for details, substituting 'Dimension' with 'Markup'.
Options:
Result:
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of symbols in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Symbol.
CLOUD
MARKUP
SYMBOL
The user is now prompted to indicate a symbol to delete. Once

the symbol has been identified, it will be highlighted but not
indicating another symbol to delete

By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a symbol to
delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all symbols
in the drawing. However, if a symbol already is highlighted for
deletion when All is clicked, only symbols of same sort as
highlighted will be deleted.

1:32
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated symbols in the current drawin will be deleted.
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of texts in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Text Line.
TEXT
The user is now prompted to indicate a text to delete. Once the

text has been identified, it will be highlighted but not actually
deleted until You confirm it by
indicating another text to delete

By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a text to
delete, the system will, after user confirmation, delete all texts in
the drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated texts in the current drawing will be deleted.
DRAWING REFERENCE
Purpose:
To administer the deletion of Drawing References in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Drawing Reference.

The user is now prompted to indicate a Drawing Reference to
delete. Once the Drawing Reference has been identified, it will
be highlighted but not actually deleted until You confirm it by
indicating another Drawing Reference to delete

By clicking All when You are prompted to indicate a Drawing
Reference to delete, the system will, after user confirmation,
delete all Drawing References in the drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
Drawing References in the current drawing will be deleted.

1:33
12 Series

CONSTRUCTION LINES
Purpose:
To delete all construction lines in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Construction Lines.

Before the operation is carried out, the user must confirm the
deletion
Options:
None.
Result:
All construction lines in the current drawing will be deleted.
Purpose:
To enable a User to delete all of the information that is on a

specific layer.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then By Layer.
BY LAYER
Enter the Layer number into the dialog box and input 'OK' as and
when correctly entered. In this function the User can enter '0' for
Layer 0 and delete the information on that layer if required.
For layers other than '0', the system will 'high-light' the
information on the specified layer and requests the User to either
input 'Yes' or 'No', according to whether or not the correct layer
has been selected.
For information on Layer 0 the system draws a box around the
geometry/information in order to further 'high-light' that the User
has reached the basic level of the early input.
Options:
None.
Result:
All of the information on the specified layer is deleted from both

the graphic display and the drawing file.

1:34
12 Series

BY AREA
Purpose:
This function is used to and delete all geometric information

inside or outside a restricting area, defined by a rectangle,
polygon or as a general closed area in the current drawing. Note
that contours intersected by the restricting area will be cut up
prior to deletion.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then By Area.

The subpicture to treat is selected by user. Click All to treat the
whole drawing.
The restricting to define will divide the geometric information in
the subpicture (or the whole drawing) in two parts. Before
proceeding, the user must decide what part to keep. A multiple
choice dialog shows up with the two alternatives:
1. Keep inside
2. Keep outside
The way of defining the restricting area is selected by user from a
multiple choice dialog showing up:
1. Rectangle/Polygon
2. General Area
Finally, the restricting area is defined by user. After the restricting
area has been defined and confirmed by user, all geometric
information inside or outside the area is now captured and
deleted.
Note: It is possible to capture also invisible geometry (geometry
that are marked as invisible and geometry that are not
shown because its layer is hidden). This option is
controlled
by
the
Drafting
Default
keyword
ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVISIBLE_GEOM. This condition
can also be enabled/disabled in this context by clicking
the Options button in the multiple choice dialog
presenting the restrict conditions "Keep inside" and "Keep
outside". Clicking this button will swap the "capture
invisible geometry" condition (from "invisibles ignored" to
"invisibles captured" and vice versa).
Options:
None.
Result:
Geometric information in the drawing will be deleted according to

user's action.

1:35
12 Series

LAST ENTITY
Purpose:
This function is used to 'undo' (remove) the last added geometry

or system component.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Delete, then Last Entity.

Note: The system does not keep any history of added items,
only the last one created can be removed.
Options:
None.
Result:
The last created entity will be removed.
TEXT
Purpose:
To edit the contents of a text line in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Edit menu, click Text.

The User is prompted to indicate a text to edit. Once indicated, a
text edit dialog appears with the contents of the text initially
presented. After updating the contents in the dialog, click OK to
realize the change.
Options:
None.
Result:
The contents of indicated texts are changed in the current

drawing.
Purpose:
Restore the visual quality of the display after deletion operations.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Repaint.
VIEW
REPAINT
The action of simply selecting the View > Repaint function

restores the visual quality of the display by fully repainting the
graphic entities that remain in the drawing file and currently
displayed on the screen. No other User action is required.
(See also screen icon for 'short-cut' entry.)
Options:
None.
Result:
The visual quality of the current display is restored to the

previous as-defined state.

1:36
12 Series

ZOOM
IN
Purpose:
To enable a User to visually 'zoom' into a selected region and

thus reduce the apparent scale, resulting in graphic entities
appearing to be larger.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then In.

Position the cursor at a suitable position on the screen and click
the left-hand button on the mouse.
Move the cursor to a new position. The system responds by
continuously drawing a rectangular box. This box is positioned
and proportioned according to the selected first point and the
current cursor position becoming the opposite corner along a
diagonal.
When the cursor is in the required position click the left-hand
button again.
The system responds by linearly scaling the box size up to fit the
screen size, with the centre of the box coinciding with the new
centre of the display window and the display contents becoming
increased in size accordingly.
Options:
There are no options available within this process.
Result:
The apparent size of objects, including geometry and text,

displayed on the screen is increased according to the User's
requirements. Additionally the graphic elements may appear in a
different location on the screen.

1:37
12 Series

OUT
Purpose:
To enable a User to visually 'zoom' away from a selected region

and thus increase the apparent scale, resulting in graphic entities
appearing to be smaller
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Out.

Position the cursor at a suitable position on the screen and click
the left-hand button on the mouse.
Move the cursor to a new position. The system responds by
continuously drawing a rectangular box. This box is positioned
and proportioned according to the selected first point and the
current cursor position becoming the opposite corner along a
diagonal.
When the cursor is in the required position click the left-hand
button again.
The system responds by linearly scaling the screen contents
down to fit the box size, with the centre of the original screen
coinciding with the centre of the box and the display contents
becoming decreased in size accordingly. The scale of the
reduction is related to the relative proportions of the sides of
rectangular box to the corresponding screen sides, with the
system choosing the maximum value
Options:
There are no options available within this process.
Result:
The apparent size of objects, including geometry and text,

displayed on the screen is reduced according to the User's
requirements. Additionally the graphic elements may appear in a
different location on the screen
SUBPICTURE
Purpose:
To enable a User to zoom the graphics view to a selected subpicture.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Subpicture.

Cursor-select any element of the sub-picture. The function then
re-centres the graphics view to be over the selected sub-picture
and automatically re-scales the view of the sub-picture to
maximum-fit the screen.

1:38
12 Series

Options:
There are no options within this process. The User can use
separate Zoom Up and Zoom Down functions, etc., in order to
bring sub-pictures into the view and to subsequently change the
scale in order to display more clearly the details of the selected
sub-picture.
Result:
The centre of the graphic view is positioned over the centre of

the selected sub-picture and the scale changed in order to
provide a maximum view of the sub-picture.
Purpose:
To display all information in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Auto.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing is zoomed to display all information.
AUTO
PREVIOUS
Purpose:
To undo the last zoom/pan operation in the current drawing, i.e.

display the previous visible section.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Previous.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing is zoomed to display the previous visible

section.
Purpose:
To double the zoom factor in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Double.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing is zoomed in by a factor two.
Purpose:
To decrease by two the zoom factor in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Half.
DOUBLE
HALF

1:39
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing is zoomed in by a factor two.
DEFINE WINDOW
Purpose:
To associate the current window (i.e. the visible part of the

drawing), or any user-defined window in the current drawing,
with a window number (0-9) or a description. This number/
description is then used to identify the window in the Select
Window function.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Define Window.

First, all currently defined windows in the drawing will be
highlighted. You are then prompted to give the window number
(0-9) to associate the current window with. The window number
is given by holding the <Ctrl> while clicking one of the 0-9 keys.
The window can also be associated with a string by keying in a
string in the Predefined Window toolbar and clicking the Define
Predefined Window button in the toolbar.
Note: that any previous association with this number/description
will be broken.
Options:
The window to associate with a number is by default the current

window. However, it is possible also to explicit define the window.
In this case, click Options when You are prompted for the
window number/description. You may then define the desired
window extension (two opposite corners) before giving the
window number/description. This way of giving the window
extension followed by the window number/description is then
repeated until You click Operation Complete.
Result:
Windows in the current drawing will be associated with window

numbers/descriptions according to user's action.

1:40
12 Series

SELECT WINDOW
Purpose:
To display one of the windows, defined in the Define Window

function, in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Zoom, then Select Window.

First, all currently defined windows in the drawing will be
highlighted. You are then prompted to give the window number
(0-9) or description, associated with the window to display. The
window number is given by holding the <Ctrl> while clicking one
of the 0-9 keys. The window description is given by selecting the
description in the Predefined Window toolbar and clicking the
Display Predefined Window button.
Options:
Instead of giving the associated window number/description, it is

possible to indicate the window to display. Just indicate one of
the windows when the system asks you to indicate the window.
Result:
A predefined window in the current drawing, selected by user,

will be displayed.
Purpose:
To enable a User to 'pan' the screen view over the drawing in

order to position a selected region, showing the associated
graphic entities, in the viewing window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Pan.
PAN
The system draws a straight line from the centre of the graphics
screen to the current cursor position, as soon as the cursor is
moved by any amount. The User can then move the cursor in
any direction to a new position and when the left-hand button on
the mouse is clicked the system makes this position to be the
new centre of the graphics window. Any graphic entities on the
screen will appear to move in the opposite direction, and by the
same amount, to the movement of the cursor. The scale of the
drawing and the associated graphics entities are not changed by
this operation.
Options:
None.
Result:
The working graphics window is relocated on the drawing and all

subsequent input and graphic output is through this window.

1:41
12 Series

LAYER
Purpose:
To enable a User to hide or show

drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Layer.
layers from the current
The Layers dialog has 2 treatment modes: hide mode and show
mode. If in hide mode, all graphical information, on any level
associated with a selected layer, will not be displayed. If in show
mode, only graphical information, on any level associated with a
selected layer, will be displayed.
A list of all different layers in the drawing and all layers currently
selected are presented in the dialog. For each layer, a check box
controls if it is selected.
The combo box Class number, description contains defined
layer classes. The selection of such a class will add its layers to
the layer list. The newly added layers are selected by default.
The user can select (or deselect) all the listed layers using the
Select All check box.
Note: Changing treatment mode resets the list of selected
layers.
The OK button closes the dialog and saves the changes.
Note: The display will be updated automatically
Options:
None.
Result:
The selected layers, together with the treatment mode, will

control subsequent repaint operations.
Purpose:
To create a particular orthogonal grid pattern to be used in a

specific graphic display.
Instructions:
The User can select from one of three available sub-functions,

namely:
GRID
Result:

visible
snap
define
If the User has 'defined' a grid, then it is stored by the system and
it is automatically presented as part of the current display, and
remains on the display until it has been switched off.
1:42
12 Series

VISIBLE
Purpose:
To show or hide the grid in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Grid, then Visible.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the grid will be reversed.
Purpose:
To activate or deactivate the grid snapping in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Grid, then Snap.
Options:
None.
Result:
The snap state of the grid will be reversed.
SNAP
DEFINE
Purpose:
To redefine the size and origin of the orthogonal grid in the

current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Grid, then Define.

In a dialog box showing up, the user is prompted to key in the
grid size, i.e. the distance between two adjacent grid points along
the x- and y-axis (the current size is proposed by the system). A
single value keyed is accepted and will be interpreted as the
distance along both the x- and y-axis.
Next, the user is prompted to key in the x- and y-coordinate of
the grid origin (the current origin is proposed by the system).

1:43
12 Series

Options:
There are alternatives for defining both the grid size and the grid
origin.
When You are prompted to key in the grid size, click Options
and a multiple choice dialog appears:
1. Standard
2. Key in
3. Two positions
The Standard grid size is controlled by the Default Keyword
GRID_SIZE, while defining by Two positions means that You are
expected to supply two points in the drawing giving the diagonal
of one square of the grid.
When You are prompted to key in the grid origin, click Options
and a multiple choice dialog appears:
1. Standard
2. Key in
3. One position
The Standard grid origin is controlled by the Default Keyword
GRID_ORIGIN, while defining by One position means that You
are expected to supply a point in the drawing giving the origin.
Result:

The grid belonging the current drawing is redefined according to

the user.
1:44
12 Series

ENVELOPE
DEFINE
Purpose:
To define Envelopes in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Envelope, then Define.

The subpictures to define as enveloped can be identified in two
ways:
One by one, by user indication
All level-2 subpictures (subviews) inside a user-defined

rectangle
To flip between these alternatives, click Options when about to

define the subpictures. A multiple choice dialog containing the
alternatives for selection will then show up.
Initially, the system assumes You want to define the subpictures
one by one. You are then prompted to indicate subpictures on
level 1 or 2 (views or subviews) to define as enveloped.
When defining subpictures all inside a rectangle, You are
supposed to define a rectangle (two opposite corners) in the
drawing. After confirmation, all level-2 subpictures inside the
rectangle will be defined as enveloped.
The definition of envelopes is repeated until You complete by
clicking Operation Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
Subpictures, identified by user, will be defined as enveloped.

1:45
12 Series

REMOVE
Purpose:
To remove Envelopes in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Envelope, then Remove.

The envelopes to remove can be identified in two ways:
One by one, by user indication
All envelopes inside a user-defined rectangle
To flip between these alternatives, click Options when about to

identify the envelopes. A multiple choice dialog containing the
alternatives for selection will then show up.
Initially, the system assumes You want to remove envelopes one
by one. You are then prompted to indicate the envelopes to
remove.
When removing envelopes all inside a rectangle, You are
supposed to define a rectangle (two opposite corners) in the
drawing. After confirmation, all envelopes inside the rectangle
will be removed.
The removing of envelopes is repeated until You complete by
Options:
None.
Result:
Envelopes, identified by user, will be removed.
2D RESTRICTIONS
VISIBLE
Purpose:
To show or hide the 2D restriction frames, if any.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click 2D Restriction, then Visible.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the view frames will be reversed.
NEW VIEWPORT
Purpose:
To pen a new viewport of the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click New Viewport.

Indicate a part of the drawing to be shown in the new viewport.

1:46
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
A new viewport with the indicated part of the drawing will be

opened.
SHADED VIEWPORT
Purpose:
To open a shaded viewport of one of the views in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shaded Viewport.

The system will search for a model view in the drawing to shade;
if there are more than one model views in the drawing, the
system asks the user to indicate the view to shade. After the view
has been identified, the system will shade the view and enable it
by entering shading mode.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current function is applied to the selected model part.
Purpose:
To allow the user to select a model part from the model view in
shading mode within functions that require selection of a model
part.
Instructions:
When the system is in Shading mode and the active function that
require selection of a model part, choose the icon Select on the
Shading toolbar and click on the model part you wish.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current function is applied to the selected model part.
SHADING
SELECT
AUTOSCALE
Purpose:
To scale all the models to fit the shaded view.
Instructions:
Select Auto Scale icon on the Shading toolbar and the scaling
is automatically done.
Options:
None.
Result:
The whole shaded model view is displayed.

1:47
12 Series

ZOOM WINDOW
Purpose:
To display window defined by two opposite corners from the

current display.
Instructions:
Select Zoom Window icon on the Shading toolbar, then click

and hold the left button and move the cursor until the requested
area of the model is covered by the rectangle. Release the
button in order to view the selected area.
Options:
None.
Result:
A new defined window is displayed.
Purpose:
To zoom the requested part of the shaded view.
Instructions:
Select Zoom icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold
the left mouse button and move the cursor in the requested
direction for either zooming or panning. Release the button when
the desired results are achieved.
Options:
None.
Result:
The shaded model view is displayed in a new perspective.
Purpose:
To slide the current shaded view on the display.
Instructions:
Select Slide icon in Shading toolbar, then click and hold the left
button and move the mouse in the requested direction. Release
the button when the desired results are achieved.
Options:
None.
Result:
The shaded model view is moved in the desired direction.
ZOOM
SLIDE

1:48
12 Series

SPIN
Purpose:
To spin current shaded view on the display.
Instructions:
Select Spin icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button on the current display and move in the requested
direction. The model will rotate in the same direction. The centre
of rotation is the click point. After the button is released the
rotation stops. The User can define again a new centre and
direction in the same manner.
Options:
None.
Result:
The Shaded model view is rotated around a chosen point in the

requested direction.
Purpose:
To walk through the model in shaded view. This function can be

used only if the Perspective camera is turned on.
Instructions:
Select Walk icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button and move the mouse upwards to run forwards and
respectively downwards to move backwards. Point the cursor left
to spot on the left and right to spot on right.
Options:
None.
Result:
The perspective moves through the model and the User can see
any model part from the desired distance.
Purpose:
To tilt the displayed model.
Instructions:
Select Tilt icon on the Shading toolbar, then click and hold the
left button and move the pointer to the left to rotate the displayed
model clockwise or move it to the right to rotate counter
clockwise, around the view centre point.
Options:
None.
Result:
the model view is rotated around centre point.
WALK
TILT

1:49
12 Series

ZOOM MODEL
Purpose:
To zoom a user-indicated model part in the currently
Instructions:
In View menu, click Shading, then Zoom Model.

This function is available only if the system is in Shading mode.
The system prompts the user to indicate the model part to zoom.
Options:
None.
Result:
the indicated model part is zoomed in.
Purpose:
To present the models in the currently shaded view by looking in

the down direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Top View.
TOP VIEW

Options:
None.
Result:
The imodels in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the down direction.
FRAME VIEW - LOOKING AFT
Purpose:

the backward direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Side View - Looking

AFT.
Options:
None.
Result:
The models in the currently shaded view are fitted to the view
and then presented by looking in the backward direction.

1:50
12 Series

FRAME VIEW - LOOKING FOR
Purpose:

the forward direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Side View - Looking

FOR.
Options:
None.
Result:
and then presented by looking in the forward direction.
SIDE VIEW - LOOKING PORT
Purpose:

the port side direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Frame View - Looking

Port.
Options:
None.
Result:
and then presented by looking in the port side direction.
ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING AFT
Purpose:
To present the models in the currently shaded view by an

isometric projection. The main viewing direction is along the
backward direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Isometric view.

Options:
None.
Result:
and then presented by an isometric projection direction.

1:51
12 Series

ISOMETRIC VIEW - LOOKING FOR
Purpose:
To present the models in the currently shaded view by an

isometric projection. The main viewing direction is along the
forward direction.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Shading, then Isometric view Looking For.
Options:
None.
Result:
and then presented by an isometric.
PERSPECTIVE CAMERA
Purpose:
To switch on/off Perspective camera and enable/disable the

Walk function.
Instructions:
Select Perspective camera icon on the Shading toolbar to

switch on/off this mode.
Options:
None.
Result:
When the Perspective camera is switched on, the model is

automatically displayed in perspective view.
MESSAGE WINDOW
Purpose:
To hide or show the Message window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Message Window.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the message window will be reversed.
LOG VIEWER
Purpose:
To display the Log Viewer.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Log Viewer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The Log Viewer dialog appears.

1:52
12 Series

EXPLORERS
DESIGN EXPLORER
Purpose:
To hide or show the Design Explorer window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Design Explorer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Design Explorer will be reversed.
MANUFACTURING EXPLORER
Purpose:
To hide or show the Manufacturing Explorer window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Manufacturing Explorer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Manufacturing Explorer will be reversed.
DRAFT EXPLORER
Purpose:
To hide or show the Draft Explorer window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Draft Explorer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Draft Explorer will be reversed.
DRAWING EXPLORER
Purpose:
To hide or show the Marine Drawing Explorer window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Drawing Explorer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Marine Drawing Explorer will be

reversed.

1:53
12 Series

ADDINS
DRAW LIST
Purpose:
To hide or show the Draw List window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Draw List.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Draw List window will be reversed.
Purpose:
To hide or show the My Data window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click My Data.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the My Data window will be reversed.
MY DATA
SEARCH UTILITY
Purpose:
To hide or show the Search Utility window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Search Utility.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Search Utility window will be reversed.
SEARCH RESULTS
Purpose:
To hide or show the Search Results window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Search Results.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Search Results window will be reversed.

1:54
12 Series

REFERENCE LIST
Purpose:
To hide or show the Reference List window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Reference List.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Reference List window will be reversed.
ATTRIBUTES UTILITY
Purpose:
To hide or show the Attributes Utility window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Attributes Utility.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Attributes Utility window will be reversed.
COMMAND WINDOW
Purpose:
To hide or show the Command Window.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Command Window.

It is not recommended to use the Command Window in Marine
Drafting.
Options:
None.
Result:
The display state of the Command Window will be reversed.
LINK DOCUMENTS
ADD LINK
Purpose:
Add a document link to current element.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Add Link.

In the dialog that opens, select or create the appropriate
document link.
Options:
None.
Result:
A document link descriptor is associated with current element.

1:55
12 Series

LINKS
Purpose:
Bring up the link documents pane.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Links.
Options:
None.
Result:
Displays the linked documents pane. In this it is possible to view

and open documents associated with model elements.
WINDOWS
Purpose:
To allow the user to select any of the redefined windows.
Instructions:
In the View menu, click Windows and click the wanted

predefined window.
Options:
None.
Result:
The predefined window will be shown.
INSERT
Purpose:
This mode provides a range of functions and sub-functions, any

of which can be selected at the choice of the User, and that
enable him to systematically evolve a geometric arrangement
comprised of point, line, arc, circle, conic, and spline entities,
etc., together with other simple standard constructs that are
useful in the drawing development process.
Instructions:
A range of facilities is available for use and from which a User is

free to select according to the geometric elements that need to
be created and embodied within a drawing.
Select the screen icon that is appropriate to the geometric
element that is to be created. The selected mode of geometric
definition remains the current mode until the User exits from that
form of geometry definition and either selects another geometric
element definition mode, within the Insert menu, or changes to
another facility within the overall module.

1:56
12 Series

Options:
Any options that are available during the creation of geometric

elements and their insertion within drawings are described in the
Tip Text for each individual function.
Result:
The two-dimensional geometric entities, elements, that either

collectively define a physical object, or which are used as
constructions in the definition of the physical object, can be
created and displayed on the screen and subsequently stored
within a drawing.

1:57
12 Series

MODEL
Purpose:
To view model information in arbitrary model views in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Model.

The Model Selection dialog is shown up, in which the user can
Collect the models to be presented.
Select how to define the target view(s) in the drawing.
The collection of models is an iterative process in which the user

repeatedly adds one or more models by selecting the type and
keying in the name and module of desired models. The names
may be given as a list, separated by commas, and each name
may contain wild cards. Module names may be given as
wildcards. Note that an empty name or module field matches
anything. For some kinds of Hull models, the side may also be
specified. To add the specified models to the collection, click the
All or Verify button. If Verify is selected, the user has the
possibility to exclude models at this stage before adding to the
collection. As a complement to the name specification, it is
possible to restrict the inclusion of models by means of a userdefined axis-parallel box in space. All models fulfilling the name
specification and also inside or partly inside the box will then be
added to the collection. To order the box restriction, check the
Use Box button.
To define the restriction box, click the Def. Box button, and the
Box Criteria dialog will show up. In this dialog, the limiting
corners of the box may be keyed-in. Another way is to define the
box as the union of a number of model extension boxes. For this
purpose, click the Indicate button and identify the models in the
drawing. The coordinates of the box may be presented in
different ways, such as absolute, relative to user-defined
coordinate tables, GENTAB etc. This presentation is controlled
by the Coord button.
Any box defined by the User may be saved for later access. Just
key in the desired name of the box and click the Save button. To
retrieve a saved box, key in the name of the box and click Load.
The Restrict Views button controls how to treat the presentation
of models collected but partly outside the restriction box. If
checked, parts outside the 2D projection of the restriction box will
be removed in the target view.
Another way to add models to the collection is to indicate models
in the drawing. Click Indicate button in the Model Selection
dialog and collect the models desired.
Clicking the Filter button will invoke a specific Vitesse Drafting
Trigger and is explained in User's Guide / Vitesse / Utilities /
Triggers / Drafting Triggers / Insert Model Filter Pre-Trigger.

1:58
12 Series

The number of models collected so far is shown at the bottom of

the Model Selection dialog. To list all collected models so far,
click the List button.
To complete the model collection and start viewing the models,
click the OK button. The definition of the target view(s) now
depends on the current selection in the Projection combo box
as follows:
New
A new model view will be created. The user gives the
wanted projection and position in the drawing
All
The models are presented in all existing model views in the
drawing.
Single
A single model view in the drawing is indicated by the user
Multiple
Multiple model views in the drawing are indicated by the
user. Click Operation Complete when ready.
Existing
Same as All, but the models will only be presented in nonempty model views (i.e. views already containing model in
information).
Options:
The Hull View functions Create, Recreate, Detail and Modify

are described in Hull / Planar Modelling / User's Guide /
Interactive Planar Hull Modelling Functions / Model Generations
and View Functions / View.
Result:
Collected models are presented in user-given views in the

drawing.

1:59
12 Series

VIRTUAL MODE
Purpose:
When the system is waiting for the user to indicate a segment

(line or arc), it is possible to define a virtual segment by clicking
"Virtual Mode" followed by the definition mode of that segment.
Example: The user is about to define a midpoint of a segment
and the system asks the user to indicate a segment. At this
stage, the user can click "Virtual mode" followed by one of the
definition modes in the "Geometry Line" or "Geometry Arc"
toolbars, in order to define a virtual segment from where the
midpoint is derived.
For instance, instead of indicating an existing segment, the user
wants to define a virtual segment defined as a line between two
points. He then clicks "Virtual segment" followed by the "Line:
Two points" button in the "Geometry Line" toolbar. The system
will now let the user define this line and use the midpoint from
that one.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Virtual Mode.

Then click one of the available definition mode buttons in the
"Geometry Line" or "Geometry Arc" toolbar.
Options:
None.
Result:
Instead of indicating an existing segment, a virtual one is defined

by the user.
Purpose:
To insert a point in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Point.
POINT
The 2D point mode toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select
the appropriate way to define the point. See Point Definition in
Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional
details.
Options:
If the 2D point mode toolbar is displayed, a click on a point

definition mode in this toolbar will implicitly initiate the insertion of
a point, using this mode
Result:
User-defined points are inserted in the current drawing.

1:60
12 Series

LINE
Purpose:
To insert a line in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Line.

The Geometry toolbar will appear. From this toolbar, select the
appropriate way to define the line. See Line Definition in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional details.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-defined lines are inserted in the current drawing.
Purpose:
To insert a circle or a circular arc in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Arc.
ARC
appropriate way to define the arc. See Arc Definition in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting for additional details.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-defined circles/ circular arcs are inserted in the current

drawing.
POLYLINE
Purpose:
To insert an arbitrary contour in the current drawing. The contour

is built up by an arbitrary number of line and arc segments.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Polyline.

The Geometry toolbar will appear, with the last used segment
definition initially proposed. This segment definition can, at any
time while building up the contour, be changed to whatever
desired.
Options:
The resulting contour may optionally be chained to an existing

contour in the drawing, see the default keyword AUTO_CHAIN
for further information.
Result:
User-defined contours are inserted in the current drawing.

1:61
12 Series

STAIRCASE
Purpose:
To insert a contour built up from orthogonal line segments. All

lines in the contour will be horizontal or vertical.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Staircase.

Start by selecting a point. When you are asked to indicate the
next point you will have a staircase cursor showing what the next
part of the contour will look like. The next part will contain the
horizontal line first followed by a vertical line. Clicking shift while
moving the mouse (and when selecting the point) will flip the next
part, i.e. the vertical line comes first followed by the horizontal
line.
Options:
None.
Result:
A user-defined staircase contour is inserted in the current

drawing.
Purpose:
To enable a User to create a spline through a set of points, with

controlled tangency where required, and to include such in 2-D
drawings
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Spline.
SPLINE
When the routine is first entered, respond to the system multiple

choice question prompt that the purpose is to 'create' a spline.
The system will then request information regarding tangency
conditions, and the User must select from one of the three
options given. The following assumes that the choice of 'none'
has been selected, and the other options are reviewed in the
following section.
Select, with the cursor, the first point, and which will be the
starting point, and then select the other points in the same
sequence in which it is required that the spline is to be fitted.
Signify that all of the points to be splined through have been
identified by clicking the screen button for Input Complete.
The system will create and display a spline together with the
previously defined points, together with a request that the User
respond to the question, is the spline that has been created 'OK'.

1:62
12 Series

Options:
If the User has selected tangency control over the spline at the
first and last points, or at all points, then the system will request
the User to input the required angle in degrees as each particular
point is identified. The angle is defined where positive denotes
anti-clockwise and measured from the horizontal
Ability to change/modify if required.
Result:
A spline will be created, displayed on the screen and stored in

the drawing file. The colour of the spline will be black, unless the
User has changed the colour through the Format > Colour
command, and the line type will be solid.
Purpose:
To insert an ellipse or a conic segment in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Conic.
CONIC
appropriate way to define the ellipse or conic segment.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-defined ellipses/conic segments are inserted in the current

drawing.
RECTANGLE
Purpose:
To insert a rectangle in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Rectangle.

Two diagonal corners in the rectangle are supplied by the user.
The order of defining the diagonal points are not important.
Options:
Fillets may be created at the corners automatically. To activate

this facility, click Options when the system prompts for the first
corner. The fillet radius is then keyed in by the user.
Result:
User-defined rectangles are inserted in the current drawing.

1:63
12 Series

SQUARE
Purpose:
To insert a square in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Square.

The user-interaction is similar to Insert / REC.
After the two corners have been supplied, the second corner will
be adjusted in order to form a square. For this purpose, the
shortest side will be extended.
Options:
Fillets may be created at the corners automatically. To activate

this facility, click Options when the system prompts for the first
corner. The fillet radius is then keyed in by the user.
Result:
User-defined squares are inserted in the current drawing.
PARALLEL CURVE
Purpose:
To insert a contour, parallel to an existing contour, in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Parallel Curve.

First, the desired distance is given in the combo box in the
Geometry toolbar. Next, the source contour is indicated by the
user. The sign of the distance and the side of the contour
indicated together determines in what direction the resulting
curve will 'grow'.
Instead of keying in a distance in the combo box, the alternative
Indicate can be selected. In this case, the user is prompted to
define a point in the drawing, through which the resulting curve
should pass.
Options:
In the resulting contour, gaps between line segments may be

eliminated in two ways:
by trimming the line segment to meet
by inserting a fillet in the gap
Use Options to toggle this behaviour.

Result:

User-defined parallel contours are inserted in the current

drawing.
1:64
12 Series

FILLET
Purpose:
To create fillets, with no trim, between two segments, (lines, arcs,

splines, etc.), in 2-D drawings.
(See also Modify / Trim / Fillet for combined 'fillet and trim'
operations)
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Fillet.

First. the system shows a dialog in which the user can select the
fillet type and key in the dimension.
Then, the user is requested to indicate the two segments
(typically a corner) where to insert the fillet. Click Options or
Operation Complete to go back to the Fillet type selection
dialog.
The User should position the cursor very close to, and within, the
corner between the two segments lines where the fillet is to be
created. Following a single click of the left button the system will
create the required fillet, but without any trimming operations.
If the segments are two lines and stop short of one another and
do not actually intersect, then the system will still try to find the
one quadrant that would be bounded by the two lines if they were
to be extended towards the point of theoretical intersection,
however the process still requires the cursor to be positioned
close to the theoretical intersection point. (Arc fillets are not yet
implemented.)
In case the wanted fillet is hard to define by a single indication, it
is possible to indicate both segments individually. Click Cancel to
flip between indicating fillet and both segments.
The system will fail if there is another entity, particularly an arc,
which would be between the fillet and the corner point.
Options:
There are no options, except for the type of fillet, within this
process.
Result:
A fillet will be created, The colour and line type of the resulting
fillet will be the same as the segment closest to user indication.

1:65
12 Series

HATCH PATTERN
Purpose:
To add a hatch pattern to a user-defined region in the drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Hatch Pattern.

The user is prompted to indicate the contours that together
define the region to be hatched within. The sequence of
identification must be continuous such as to create the definition
of effective contiguous contour and the cursor indication should
preferably be within the area to be hatched. These rules provide
the system with guidance in the event that there may be more
than one intersection point between any two successive contours
that bound the region to be hatched.
When all contours defining the region boundary have been
given, click Operation Complete. If the resulting boundary is not
closed, the system will close it by appending a straight line to the
boundary definition.
The system responds by filling in the region with the default
standard hatch pattern.
Options:
If the default hatch pattern is set to Key In, then the user is
requested to supply the angle and line spacing of the hatch
pattern.
It is possible to delete islands in the hatch pattern just created.
The system will then enter the Edit/Delete/Hatch Pattern Island
functionality automatically after that the hatch pattern has been
created. Operation Complete completes the island deletion. To
activate/deactivate this feature, click Options while the system
prompts for the boundary definition.
Result:

A hatch pattern will be created.
1:66
12 Series

CONSTRUCTION LINES
Purpose:
To toggle the construction geometry mode.

While the construction geometry mode is turned on, all basic
geometry created by the user (lines, arcs, contours etc.) will
defined as construction geometry.
Construction geometry will be assigned the following properties,
regardless of the modal settings:
Colour: White
Line Type: Short-Dashed
Layer: -4
Furthermore, it is possible to create some useful compound

construction geometry inside this function. The construction
geometry mode will in this case not be affected.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Construction Lines.

A multiple choice dialog will pop up, showing four alternatives:
1. Start
2. End
3. Def 0/90
4. Def 45/-45
Click Start to enter construction geometry mode (if not already
turned on), or End to exit construction geometry mode (if
currently turned on).
The choice Def 0/90 will create one horizontal and one vertical
line, while the choice Def 45/-45 will create two perpendicular
lines at 45 and -45 degrees angle from horizontal respectively. In
both cases, the intersection point is supplied by the user.
Options:
None.
Result:
The construction geometry might be turned on or off. Some

compound construction geometry might be created.

1:67
12 Series

TEXT
Purpose:
To insert texts in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Text.

First, the text is keyed in, using a simple multi-line editor dialog.
To complete the input, click OK. The effect of typing keyboard
Enter depends on the status of the radio box MultiLine: If
unchecked the input is completed (like clicking OK). If checked a
new line is started.
By clicking Import a browse dialog is shown. The Open button of
the browse dialog allows the User to insert the content of the
browsed file in the multi-line editor dialog. The Cancel button of
the browse dialog closes its own dialog without anything
happening.
By clicking Model Info the User is asked to indicate a model
object and its model information is inserted in the multi-line editor
dialog.
By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to change some
modal characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline
space and font) of the resulting text. It is also possible to define a
lock position in u- or v direction, by indicating another text as lock
reference. See below for more details.
Once the User is ready with the block of text in the dialog, he/she
can place it in the drawing after clicking OK.
By clicking Options before positioning the text, the User can
change the text characteristics and lock position, as described
below. Once positioned, new copies of the text can be positioned
repeatedly until the user interrupts by clicking Operation
Complete.

1:68
12 Series

Options:
In order to create text of the required font, size, orientation, etc.,

the User can select from a range of options, namely:
Properties:
Fonts: select font type from table of alternatives, e.g. Arial.
Font Style: select font style from table of alternatives, e.g.

regular.
Size: select font size from table of alternatives. The default

value is 3.50.
Effects: Strikeout and Underline.
Color.
Aspect: to stretch out the text. The default value for normal
text is 1.0.
Slant: key-in slant angle. The default value is 90 degrees.
Interline space: key-in interline space factor. The default

value is 1.5.
Layer.
Copy prop: it copies the properties of an indicated text.

Rotation:
Standard
Key in (angle in degrees).
Same as: indicated existing text.
Two positions.
Lock U:
The text is constrained to start at a vertical position, regardless of
cursor position when left button is clicked, the vertical boundary
is established by the User, move the cursor to required position,
click Left button.
Lock V:
The text is constrained to be above a horizontal line, regardless
of cursor position when left button is clicked, the horizontal
boundary is established by the User, move the cursor to required
position, click Left button.
Unlock:
Removes any previously ordered locking.
Auto positioning:
Refer to Automatic Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model

Viewing and General Drafting for details.
If and when a User sets one or more of the options to other than
the standard default value, the selected new option specification
remains as the new default value until the User effects a change.
Result:

User-defined texts are inserted in the current drawing.
1:69
12 Series

SYMBOL
Purpose:
To enable a User to insert a standard symbol into a drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Symbol.

First, the symbol is selected from a dialog showing all symbols in
the modal symbol font. Inside this dialog, it is possible to select
from any existing symbol font. Just select the wanted font in the
Font combo box.
Once selected, the symbol is dragged into desired position in the
drawing. By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
change some modal characteristics (height and rotation) of the
resulting symbol, as well as mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction.
It is also possible to toggle the "auto symbol positioning" status,
see Automatic Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing
and General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the symbol can be positioned
repeatedly until the user interrupts by clicking Operation
Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-defined symbols are inserted in the current drawing.

1:70
12 Series

SUBPICTURE
Purpose:
To insert a subpicture, fetched from the Subpicture data bank or

any other data bank, into the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Subpicture.

to key in the name of the subpicture. It is possible to browse the
contents of the Subpicture data bank by keying in a wild card
name.
If the subpicture selected is a view, no owner has to be defined.
Otherwise, the user is requested to indicate the owner, to which
the subpicture shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation
Complete here means that a new view and possibly a subview
will be created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the
subpicture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by
the user.
Note: For subpictures to be used in nesting sketches the
highest level should always be level 3. By ensuring that
subpictures do not have a higher level than 3 then it will
be possible to control in which subview of the nesting
picture object the inserted subpicture should be put
Options:
To fetch subpictures from a data bank other that the initially

system-proposed, click Options while inside the browser. The
system will then let You key in the name of another data bank
(the name of the current data bank is proposed).
Result:
A copy of the user-given subpicture is inserted and transformed

in the current drawing.

1:71
12 Series

SUBPICTURE FROM SBD
Purpose:
To insert a sub-picture, retrieved from an SDB file, into the

current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Sub-picture from SDB.

In the file browser dialog that now appears, you are prompted to
select an SDB file. The file must contain a drawing of sub-picture
type otherwise you will see an error message in the message
window.
If the selected sub-picture is a view, no owner has to be defined.
the sub-picture shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation
Complete here means that a new view and possibly a sub-view
will be created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the subpicture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by the
user.
Note: For sub-pictures to be used in nesting sketches the
highest level should always be level 3. By ensuring that
sub-pictures do not have a higher level than 3 then it will
be possible to control in which sub-view of the nesting
picture object the inserted sub-picture should be put.
Options
None
Result:
A copy of the user-given sub-picture is inserted and transformed


1:72
12 Series

STANDARD DETAIL
Purpose:
To insert a detail, fetched from the Standard Detail Book, into the
current drawing (details reside as subpictures of level 1-3 (view,
subview or component) in the Standard data bank).
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Standard Detail.

All existing pages in the book are now presented in a dialog, from
where the desired page is selected by user. Once the page is
selected, all existing details within this page are presented in
another dialog from where the user is asked to select the wanted
detail.
If the detail selected is a view, no owner has to be defined.
the detail shall belong structurally. Clicking Operation Complete
here means that a new view and possibly a subview will be
created automatically.
The transformation of the owner will now be applied on the detail,
before it is positioned and possibly transformed by the user.
Options:
None.
Result:
A copy of the user-given detail is inserted and transformed in the

current drawing.
PLATE PART
Purpose:
This function is used to bring in plate parts from the Plate Data
Bank (logical name SB_PLDB) as subpictures, into the current
drawing. The purpose is partly to have a powerful visualisation
function for plate parts but primarily to enable interactive
changes to plate parts in general.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Plate part.

The name of the plate part is defined in a browser dialog, either
from keyboard or from the selection list. Click OK when ready. To
update the browser selection list, type a wild card name and click
OK. Once selected, a level-1 subpicture containing a 'flat' view of
the plate part will now be created and used for insertion in the
drawing. The default drawing scale will be applied on the
subpicture, before it is positioned and possibly transformed by
user.
Options:
None.
Result:
The chosen plate part is inserted and transformed as required by

the User.

1:73
12 Series

DRAWING FORM
Purpose:
This function is used to insert a drawing form in the current

drawing. The form definition is fetched from the Standard Library
data bank (logical name SBD_STD).
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Drawing Form.

The name of the form is given in a browser dialog, either from
keyboard or from the selection list. Click OK when ready. To
update the browser selection list, type a wild card name and click
OK. When retrieved, the form layout will be inserted in current
drawing, followed by an auto scale. If a form already exists in the
drawing, it will, after user confirmation, be exchanged. When
exchanging the form, all 'ruled' texts in the existing form that
have a correspondence in the replacing form will be copied.
Options:
None.
Result:
A new drawing form is inserted in the current drawing. If any

previously used form exists, it will be replaced by the new one.
Purpose:
To highlight all nodes in a user-indicated contour and optionally

insert them as points in the current drawing
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Nodes, then Contour.
NODES
CONTOUR
The user is prompted to indicate the contour to verify. Once

indicated, all nodes in the contour are highlighted and the user is
prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all nodes are finally added as points in the
current drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
All nodes in a user-indicated contour are highlighted and

optionally inserted as points in the current drawing. Note that
points inserted at a previous stage will not be duplicated.

1:74
12 Series

SPLINE
Purpose:
To highlight all spline nodes in a user-indicated (spline) contour

(e.g. created by the Insert Spline function) and optionally insert
them as points in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Nodes, then Spline.

The user is prompted to indicate the (spline) contour to verify.
Once indicated, all spline nodes in the contour are highlighted
and the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all spline nodes are finally added as points
Options:
None.
Result:
All spline nodes in a user-indicated (spline) contour are

highlighted and optionally inserted as points in the current
drawing. Note that points inserted at a previous stage will not be
duplicated.
TANGENTS
CONTOUR
Purpose:
To highlight all node tangents in a user-indicated contour and

optionally insert them as lines in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Tangents, then Contour.

The user is prompted to indicate the contour to verify. Once
indicated, all node tangents in the contour are highlighted and
the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all node tangents are finally added as lines
Options:
None.
Result:
All node tangents in a user-indicated contour are highlighted and

optionally inserted as lines in the current drawing. Note that lines
inserted at a previous stage will not be duplicated.

1:75
12 Series

SPLINE
Purpose:
To highlight all spline node tangents in a user-indicated (spline)

contour (e.g. created by the Insert Spline function) and
optionally insert them as lines in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Tangents, then Spline.

The user is prompted to indicate the (spline) contour to verify.
Once indicated, all spline node tangents in the contour are
highlighted and the user is prompted to confirm the insertion.
If confirmed by user, all spline node tangents are finally added as
lines in the current drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
All spline node tangents in a user-indicated (spline) contour are

highlighted and optionally inserted as lines in the current
drawing. Note that lines inserted at a previous stage will not be
duplicated.
FORMAT
Purpose:
To establish some aspects of the format of newly created and

displayed entities on the graphic screen and in drawings.
Instructions:
The format commands that are available can be selected from at

the discretion of the User. The system assumes various standard
defaults unless the User makes changes through these
commands. Typically a User may wish to use the available
commands at the commencement of a new drawing.
The format commands can be used at any time, however the
actions of format changes are not retroactive to the graphic items
and geometry, etc., that has been created before the format
change was made through use of these commands. The Format
> Layer command establishes the drawing layer on which all
subsequent input is to be stored. The User may need to use the
available alternative 'modify' facilities if changes are
subsequently required to previously existing entities.
Options:
Any options that are available during format activities are

described in the Tip Text for that particular command.
Result:
The user can set the colour, line type, hatch pattern, various
defaults and drawing layer to be used for all subsequent input.

1:76
12 Series

COLOUR
Purpose:
To enable the user to set the modal colour for new geometries in
the current drawing
Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Colour.

Select the wanted colour from the colour selection dialog,
followed by OK.
To collect the colour from an existing entity, click Options and
indicate the wanted colour in the drawing.
(The user can subsequently change the colour of an established
entity through a Modify function).
Options:
None.
Result:
All subsequent added geometry will be presented with this line

type.
LINE TYPE
Purpose:
To enable the user to set the modal line type for new geometries
in the current drawing. See Line Types in Chapter Model Viewing
and General Drafting for details.
Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Line Type.

The modal line type is selected from a dialog showing all
available line types. It is also possible to collect the line type from
existing geometry in the drawing: just click Indicate and indicate
the geometry from where to collect the line type.
Options:
None.
Result:
All new geometries in the current drawing will be presented with

the model line type.

1:77
12 Series

LAYER
Purpose:
To enable the user to set the modal layer for new geometries in
Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Layer.

The number of the layer or layer class is keyed in. It is also
possible to collect the layer from existing geometry in the
drawing. Just click Options and indicate the geometry from
where to collect the layer.
Unless the User specifies otherwise, by default the system
assumes that all input is to be associated with Layer 0. Thus
unless the User has already invoked this function, all input made
up to the time when the User opens this function and defines a
specific layer, is associated with Layer 0.
See Tools>Inquiry>Used Layers for identification of existing
layers in the drawing.
Options:
The User can define the unique layer identification by either a

simple numeric value or as a 'Layer Class'. A 'Layer Class' is
identified by the User typing '#' followed by the unique class
number.
Result:
All subsequent added geometry and text will be associated with

this layer.
HATCH PATTERN
Purpose:
To enable a user to select either one of the standard hatch

patterns or to create a new one.
Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Hatch Pattern.

The system presents the user with a simple dialog box
containing three pre-established standard patterns, one 'key in'
option and one user option.
The user selects the required one with the screen cursor. If the
user option is selected, the desired hatch pattern is then
selected from the Hatch pattern book.
Options:
The User can change the predefined standard patterns through

Format > Default.
Result:
The hatch pattern to be used when a selected region of a

drawing is being defined as being represented in hatched form,
is established.

1:78
12 Series

DEFAULTS
Purpose:
This function is provided in order to control various Default

Keywords in the Drafting system. The underlying file is denoted
by the environment variable SBD_DEF1.
These defaults as used in processes that cover a range of
aspects, including:
texts
symbols
projection vectors
dimensioning
hatch patterns
note & position numbers
draw codes
colours & line types
name presentations
units systems
It should be understood that some of the default keywords can

be updated directly in the contexts in which they are used. Also
note that the underlying default file, holding the current default
settings, can be modified by usage of a standard text editing
program.
Within this function, it is possible to list and update default
settings, to reset the current settings to initial values, and finally
to load or save the current settings.

1:79
12 Series

Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Defaults.

Update default settings
When invoking the function, the Update activity will be entered
automatically.
The current settings will be listed in a dialog showing up. Any
default statement can now be updated by typing the
corresponding default statement in the text field of the dialog. By
single-clicking on desired statement in the list, this will statement
will appear in the text field and can be used as a stub for update.
Click OK when ready.
By clicking Options, it is possible to access the remaining
default handling activities. A multiple choice dialog will then show
up, presenting the following alternatives:
1. Load
2. Save
3. Update
4. Reset
Load a default file
This activity loads the current default settings from a specific file.
The user is prompted for the name of this file.
Save the default settings
This activity saves the current default settings in a specified file.
The user is prompted for the desired name of this file.
Reset the default settings
This activity resets the current default settings to initial values.
Options:
None.
Result:
The resulting default settings will be the ones accessed, when

required, in the Drafting system.

1:80
12 Series

LOCAL ORIGIN
Purpose:
To redefine the local origin in the current drawing. If the origin is

keyed in, then the given coordinates equal the new origin;
otherwise the given coordinates will be divided by the current
scale giving the new origin, The local origin is initially set to (0, 0)
whenever an old drawing is fetched from the data bank or a new
drawing is created. The local origin in combination with the
current scale is taken in consideration when keying in 2D
coordinates.
Instructions:
In the Format menu, click Local Origin.

In a dialog, the user is prompted to key in the new coordinates of
the local origin (the current value is suggested). To change the
2D point definition mode, first give CR, then select the desired
definition mode from the 2D point Mode toolbar. Once a new
local origin has been defined this will be verified, where after the
definition phase is repeated until interrupted by the user.
Options:
None.
Result:
The local origin is verified and possibly redefined by the user.
GEOMETRY MODE
2D POINTS
Purpose:
These functions represent all different ways of defining a 2D

point in the drawing.
See Point Definition in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for additional information.
Note: The 2D point definitions can also be selected from a popup menu activated by a right mouse button click.
CURSOR POSITION
Purpose:
To allow the User to give a free-hand point.
Instructions:
Click at desired position in the drawing.

1:81
12 Series

NODE POINT
Purpose:
To allow the User to define an end point of a segment.
Instructions:
Indicate the end of a line or arc segment.
Purpose:
To allow the User to key in the coordinates of a point.
Instructions:
Key in U, V coordinates from keyboard, then click OK.
KEY IN
EVENT POINT
Purpose:
To allow the User to define an event point in a model view.
Instructions:
Indicate an event point in a model view.
Purpose:
To allow the User to define the mid point of a segment, or a

whole contour.
Instructions:
Indicate the middle of a line segment, arc segment, or a whole

contour.
MID POINT
INTERSECTION
Purpose:
To allow the User to define an intersection point between two

segment.
Instructions:
Indicate the intersection of two line or arc segments. To indicate

the two segments explicitly, click Options.
NEAREST POINT
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a point on a segment, closest to the

free-hand position.
Instructions:
Indicate nearest position on a line or arc segment.

1:82
12 Series

EXISTING POINT
Purpose:
To allow the User to indicate an existing point.
Instructions:
Indicate near an existing point.
ARC CENTRE
Purpose:
To allow the User to define the centre of an arc segment.
Instructions:
Indicate at the centre of a circle or arc segment.
ARC BY ANGLE
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a periphery point on an arc segment.
Instructions:
Enter the angle in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.

Instead of giving an explicit angle, the value 'Indicate" can be
selected from the combo box.
Indicate the arc segment. The point on periphery at given angle
will be selected. If the angle has been defined implicit (as
'Indicate') the point on the arc is defined as the periphery point
closest to the arc indication. Here, periphery points close to one
of the four cardinal directions will snap to the corresponding
quarter points (0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees).
DISTANCE CONTOUR
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a point on a contour or a single

segment, at a certain distance from the closest end of this
contour/segment.
Instructions:
First, indicate the contour. To treat a single segment, click

Options, then indicate.
Next, key in the absolute distance along this contour/segment.
Click Options to key in the relative distance instead.

1:83
12 Series

CENTRE OF GRAVITY
Purpose:
To allow the User to define the COG of a closed area in the

drawing.
Instructions:
Indicate a closed contour. It is possible to define the area as a

combination of an arbitrary number of contours. The definition is
always completed by Operation Complete. If the resulting area
is not closed, the system will close it automatically.
SYMBOL CONN
Purpose:
To allow the User to define the coordinates of a symbol

connection.
Instructions:
Indicate a connection in a symbol.
OFFSET CURRENT
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a point, at an offset from the current

point.
Instructions:
If there is a current point defined, key in the desired offset. For

valid offset formats, see 2D Offset Input Format in Chapter
Model Viewing and General Drafting.

1:84
12 Series

AUTOMATIC
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a "automatic" point, derived from a

free-hand position.
Given a free-hand position, the system derives up to six points in
six different ways as controlled by the six default keywords
AUTO_MODEx, where x = 1,2,3,4,5 or 6. Each of these key
words may contain the code for a certain point definition mode.
Supported definition modes are:
3 - Node Point
5 - Symbol Connection
8 - Arc Centre
10 - Mid Point of segment
13 - Intersection
23 - Event Point
The resulting point will then be the one of the six points that is
closest to the free-hand position. However, if the minimum
distance exceeds the value of the default keyword AUTO_DIST,
the free-hand position is used instead.
Instructions:
Indicate a desired position in the drawing.
ADD OFFSET
Purpose:
To allow the User to add a 2D offset, after the definition of a

point.
Instructions:
After the point has been defined, key in the desired offset. For
valid offset formats, see 2D Offset Input Format in Chapter
Purpose:
These functions represent all ways to define a 3D point in the

drawing.
3D POINTS
See 3D Point Definition in Chapter Model Viewing and General

Drafting for additional information.
The 3D point definition requests can also be selected from a
pop-up menu activated by a right mouse button click.

1:85
12 Series

KEY IN
Purpose:
To allow the User to key in the coordinates of a point.
Instructions:
Key in X, Y and Z coordinates from keyboard, then click OK.
Purpose:
To allow the User to indicate an event point in a model view.
Instructions:
Click close to an event point in a model view.
EVENT
OFFSET CURRENT
Purpose:
To allow the User to define a point, at an offset from the current

point.
Instructions:
If there is a current point defined, key in the desired offset. For

valid offset formats, see Basic 3D Point Definition Modes in
Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting.
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock the line through the current point and
parallel to the v-vector.
Instructions:
If there is a current point defined, click Format / Geometry

Mode / 3D Points / Lock U to lock the line through the current
point and parallel to the v-vector.
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock the line through the current point and
parallel to the u-vector.
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock V to lock the line through the current
point and parallel to the u-vector.
LOCK U
LOCK V

1:86
12 Series

LOCK VIEW
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock a plane through the current point.
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock View.
Select a view to pick the plane (projection) from.
LOCK X
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock X to the X coordinate of the current

point.
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock X.
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock Y to the Y coordinate of the current

point.
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock Y.
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock Z to the Z coordinate of the current point
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock Z.
LOCK Y
LOCK Z
LOCK EVENT PLANE
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock a plane through an event point and

perpendicular to the event vector
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Plane.

1:87
12 Series

LOCK XZ
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and
parallel to the Y-cardinal vector (0,1,0).
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock XZ.
Purpose:
parallel to the X-cardinal vector (1,0,0).
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock YZ.
Purpose:
parallel to the Z-cardinal vector (0,0,1).
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock XY
LOCK YZ
LOCK XY
LOCK EVENT LINE
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock a line through an event point and

parallel to the event vector
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Line.
LOCK ANY LINE
Purpose:
To allow the user to lock a line through the current point and a
second point.
Instructions:

Mode / 3D Points / Lock Event Line.
Click the desired point to give the second point.

1:88
12 Series

UNLOCK
Purpose:
To allow the user to cancel a previous lock.
Instructions:
Click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D Points / Unlock
SET CURRENT
Purpose:
To allow the user to set the current point.
Instructions:
Click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D Points / Set Current.

Click the desired point to give the current point
ADD OFFSET
Purpose:
To allow the user to add an offset to the defined point. This

should be done prior to the point definition. The offset will be
given after the point definition.
Instructions:
Before the point definition, click Format / Geometry Mode / 3D

Points / Add Offset.
Three scenarios exist (depending on the lock status):
1. No lock (a three dimension offset is requested).
2. Plane lock (a two dimension offset is requested).
3. Line lock (a one dimension offset is requested).

1:89
12 Series

VERIFY
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a 3D point in an iterative way.
Instructions:
Click in the desired position to define a point.

Verify the point. Yes means point is defined. No means this point
is set as current point and system proceeds to next step.
Click in the desired position to define a point.
Key in relevant coordinates (XYZ).
Empty string means keep all coordinates of the previous point.
XYZ means keep all coordinates of this point.
YZ means keep Y- and Z-coordinates of this point and keep Xcoordinate of previous point.
X means keep X-coordinate of this point and keep Y- and Zcoordinates of previous point.
LINE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line in different ways.
Instructions:
Select Insert / Line followed by the wanted line definition mode.
TWO POINTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line between two points.
Instructions:
Define the first point.

Define the second point.
ANGLE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line through a point at an angle to

another line.
Instructions:
Define the 'through' point.

Enter the angle in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Indicate the line.

1:90
12 Series

VERTICAL
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a vertical line through a point.
Instructions:
Define the through point.
HORIZONTAL
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a horizontal line through a point.
Instructions:
Define the through point.
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line parallel to another line at a

certain distance.
Instructions:
Enter the distance in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
PARALLEL
Instead of giving an explicit distance, the value 'Indicate" can be

Indicate the 'parallel to' line. The resulting line will be defined at
given distance from the indicated line.
If the distance has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') the
resulting line is dragged into the desired position.
PERPENDICULAR
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line perpendicular to another line

through a point.
Instructions:
Indicate the 'perpendicular' line.

Define the 'through' point. The resulting line will be restricted by
this point and the nearest point on the 'perpendicular' line.

1:91
12 Series

TANGENT POINT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc through a

point.
Instructions:
Indicate the arc.

Define the 'through' point. The resulting line will be restricted by
this point and the tangent point on the arc, nearest to the arc
indication.
TANGENT PARALLEL
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc and parallel to

another line.
Instructions:
Indicate the arc.

Indicate the 'parallel to' line. The resulting line will be parallel to
this line and tangent to the arc.
TANGENT PERPENDICULAR
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line tangent to an arc and

perpendicular to another line.
Instructions:
Indicate the first arc.

Indicate the second arc. The resulting line will be tangent to both
arcs.
TANGENT TWO ARCS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a line tangent to two arcs.
Instructions:
Indicate the first arc.

Indicate the second arc. The resulting line will be tangent to both
arcs.
ARC
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an arc in different ways.
Instructions:
Select Insert / Arc followed by the wanted arc definition mode.

1:92
12 Series

THREE POINTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an arc through three points.
Instructions:
Define the start point of the arc.

Define a periphery point on the arc.
Define the end point of the arc.
CENTRE AND RADIUS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a circle with a centre and a radius.
Instructions:
Enter the radius in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.

Define the centre of the circle.
TWO POINTS AND AMPLITUDE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an arc with two end points and an
amplitude.
Instructions:

Enter the amplitude in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.
Instead of giving an explicit amplitude, the value 'Indicate" can be
Define the end point of the arc. The resulting arc will be defined
with given amplitude.
If the amplitude has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') a third
point is required to give the amplitude.
TWO POINTS AND RADIUS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an arc with two end points and a
radius.
Instructions:

Define the start point of the arc. Define the end point of the arc.
The resulting arc will be defined with given radius.

1:93
12 Series

CENTRE AND POINT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a circle with a centre point and a point
on the circle.
Instructions:

Define a point on the circle edge.
CENTRE AND TANGENT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a circle with a centre point and a

tangent to the circle.
Instructions:

Indicate the tangent (line or arc).
TWO TANGENTS AND RADIUS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a circle with two tangents and a

radius.
Instructions:
Indicate first tangent (line).

Indicate second tangent (line).
THREE TANGENTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a circle with three tangents.
Instructions:
Indicate first tangent (line).

Indicate second tangent (line).
Indicate third tangent (line).

1:94
12 Series

POINT, RADIUS AND TANGENT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an arc with an end point, a radius and
a tangent.
Instructions:

Indicate the tangent.
CONIC
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a conic or ellipse in different ways.
Instructions:
Select Insert / Conic followed by the wanted conic definition

mode
CIRCUMSCRIBED RECTANGLE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an ellipse using the circumscribed

rectangle.
Instructions:
Define first corner of the rectangle.

Define opposite corner of the rectangle.
MAJOR AND MINOR AXIS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an ellipse using the major and minor
axes.
Instructions:
Define centre of ellipse (axis intersection).

Define end point of first semi-axis.
Define end point of second semi-axis.

1:95
12 Series

FOCAL POINTS AND MAJOR AXIS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an ellipse using the two focal points
and the length of the major axis.
Instructions:
Define first focal point.

Enter the length of the major axis in the value field in the
Geometry toolbar.
Define second focal point.
FOCAL POINTS AND PERIPHERY POINT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define an ellipse using the two focal points
and a point on the periphery.
Instructions:
Define first focal point.

Define second focal point.
Define point on ellipse periphery.
SEGMENT DATA
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a conic segment using start point, end
point, amplitude vector and a form factor.
Instructions:
Define start point of segment.

Define end point of segment.
Define end point of amplitude vector.
Key in the form factor (Greater or equal to 0.0, less than 1.0).
END POINTS, SLOPE AND PERIPHERY POINT
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a conic segment using the two end
points, slopes and a point on the periphery.
Instructions:
Define start point of segment.

Define end point of segment.
Define end point of start slope vector.
Define end point of end slope vector.
Define point on segment periphery.

1:96
12 Series

POLYLINE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment in different ways.
Instructions:
Select Insert / Polyline followed by the wanted polyline

definition mode. It is possible to switch polyline definition mode
while defining a polyline.
TWO POINTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment as a line segment.
Instructions:
Define the end point of the line segment.
DIRECTION AND LENGTH
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment as a line, given by

direction and length.
Instructions:
Enter the length in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.

Define the endpoint of the direction vector.
THREE POINTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment as an arc using

three points (last point of previous segment used as first point).
Instructions:
Define a periphery point on the arc.

Define the end point of the arc.

1:97
12 Series

TWO POINTS AND AMPLITUDE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment as an arc using

two end two points and amplitude (last point of previous segment
used as first point).
Instructions:
Enter the amplitude in the value field in the Geometry toolbar.

Instead of giving an explicit amplitude, the value 'Indicate" can be
with given amplitude.
If the amplitude has been defined implicit (as 'Indicate') a third
point is required to give the amplitude.
TWO POINTS AND RADIUS
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a polyline segment using two end

points and radius (last point of previous segment used as first
point).
Instructions:

with given radius.
TOLERANCE
Purpose:
To allow the user to define a tolerance used when defining an arc

in a polyline. Arc segments with amplitude less than a stipulated
tolerance will be considered as a line segment by the system.
Instructions:
Key in the wanted tolerance.
ZAP
OPERATION COMPLETE
Purpose:
To enable the User to specify to the system that all input required
for a particular function or activity within a function has been
completed.
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Operation Complete.

1:98
12 Series

QUIT
Purpose:
To enable a User to abort the currently invoked function,

disregarding the input given so far
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Quit.
Purpose:
To enable a User to step back in the sequence of input in the

currently invoked function
Instructions:
In Zap menu, click Cancel.
Purpose:
To enable the User to get access to optional functionality at a

certain stage within a particular function.
Instructions:
In Zap menu, click Options.
Purpose:
Some functions can affect all determinate object types in the

entire drawing. All is used to enable the User to select all objects
in the drawing when the running function requires selection.
Instructions:
In Zap menu, click All.
CANCEL
OPTIONS
ALL
SUBPICTURE LEVEL
VIEW
Purpose:
For view level selection during the indication of a subpicture.
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then View.

1:99
12 Series

SUBVIEW
Purpose:
For subview level selection during the indication of a subpicture.
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Subcomponent.
COMPONENT
Purpose:
For component level selection during the indication of a

subpicture.
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Component.
SUBCOMPONENT
Purpose:
For subcomponent level selection during the indication of a

subpicture.
Instructions:
In the Zap menu, click Subpicture Level, then Subcomponent.

1:100
12 Series

TOOLS
MODEL
PRESENT
Purpose:
This function is used when a model in the drawing shall be

presented in one of the following ways:
1. Sectioning
2. Volume
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model, then Present.

The prompt is: 'Select a model part'. It is possible to choose level
2 (one model part or level 1 (all in the view)). The process of
collecting model parts continues while the User clicks Operation
Complete. The next Multiple choice window gives three ways of
presentation. The User can select:
1. Sectioning.
The system needs a projection from which to create
subpicture with section of model parts. This projection is
fetched from existing. The prompt is: 'Indicate an existing
view (OPTIONS for new)'. When the projection is chosen,
the User must give the plan of sectioning. This plan is
perpendicular to the screen and passes through a line
defined by two points in the selected view. When this is
done, the next options are available:
Display
Shows on the display zoomed subpicture with section of
the selected model parts.
Save subpicture
Saves the subpicture with User given name of
Subpicture DB.
Add to drawing.
Adds the subpicture to the current drawing as subpicture
level 1
2. Volume.
Select model parts and choose level. Click Operation
Complete. The system calculates the volume of selected
model parts and presents the result on the display.
Options:
None.
Result:
The model in the drawing is presented as per user requirements.

1:101
12 Series

CROSS SECTION
Purpose:
Function gives the true cross section of an indicated longitudinal

or transversal at a selected cursor position.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model, then Cross Section.

The User needs two different orthogonal model views contain
longitudinal or transversal (for example XY and XZ). The prompt
in the message window is: Indicate long/trans. Click on
Longitudinal or Transversal in one of the views. You will see in
the second view direction line parallel to the third coordinate axis.
On this line you must select a point that defines the location of
the section along the third coordinate
Options:
None.
Result:
The system calculates cross section contour and represent it in

the first model view.
PANEL INTERSECT
Purpose:
This function is used to place symbols in a drawing in order to

show which one of two intersecting panels is penetrating.
Different symbols are used if a panel section in a view is
penetrating or being penetrated.
The size of the symbol is decided by the default height for
symbols as defined in the default file of Drafting. The colour of
the symbol is the default colour for notes.

1:102
12 Series

EXCHANGE
Purpose:
This function is to enable a User to exchange one or more model

parts in the current drawing with model parts from the data bank.
Instructions:
The User commences this process by identifying the model part

to be replaced with the aid of the cursor and clicking the left-hand
button on the mouse once. The user can also click the Options
button and type in the name of the model to exchange.
The system responds by drawing a small box around the
selected part, in the view that the User has chosen in order to
make the identification, and then by presenting the User with a
simple 'Question' dialog box in which he can signify if the
identification is correct.
If the User then keys-in 'Yes', signifying that the correct part has
been identified, he is then presented with a 'Multiple Choice'
dialog box asking the User to identify which actual part is to be
exchanged, namely 'All', 'Confirm one by one', or 'Only indicated'.
This is to allow for the possibility that there may be more than
one model part of the same name in the region that was
originally indicated by the User.
The system then presents the User with a simple Dialog box
containing the names of possible replacement parts and from
which the User is required to select the appropriate one.
Options:
There are no options available within this function.
Result:
A model part within a drawing is exchanged for another model

part contained within the data bank.

1:103
12 Series

COPY
Purpose:
To copy to an arbitrary number of models in the current drawing

to another model view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model, then Copy.

First, the user is requested to collect all models that should be
copied. This is done by an arbitrary number of indications in the
drawing, completed by Operation Complete. After the first
indication the user is prompted to select level of collection: all
models in the view (level 1) or just the specific model indicated
(level 2). This level selection will then be the default one in
succeeding indications. Click Options to go back to level
selection.
When the collection of models is completed, the user is
prompted to indicate the target view, i.e. the view to which the
models will be copied. Once indicated, the models are copied to
this view and then automatically transformed according the
current transformation of the view.
To create a new target view, click Options when the user is
prompted to indicate the target view. The projection of the new
view is then defined by the user, where after the models are
copied to this view and transformed interactively by the user to
desired position and scale.
Options:
None.
Result:
A number of user-collected models will be copied to an arbitrary

model view.
MODEL VIEW
Purpose:
This function provides a range of sub-functions that enables the

User to add-to and amend various attributes to a drawing.
Instructions:
The User is presented with a Model View sub menu from which
he can select a function, or series of functions, that meet his
requirements.

1:104
12 Series

Options:
Result:
The User is presented with the following optional functions:
Exchange
Clear
AutoScale
AutoScale All
Change projection
Slice
Clear
Explode
Validate
Hull symmetry
All of these sub-functions will end with all or part of the view
being redrawn with the new attribute.
EXCHANGE
Purpose:
This function is used to exchange all models of a specific type in

a User-indicated model view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model View, then Exchange.

The view to exchange is indicated by the User. To treat all model
views, click All. After the view selection, the model type to treat
within the view, is selected from a multiple-choice dialog (the All
choice is available). If the model type selection involves Hull
specific models, the source of draw code is given by the User
(either from model or default settings).
Options:
None.
Result:
The selected views are exchanged.
AUTOSCALE
Purpose:
To scale a view in a drawing. Can be used in a drawing form with

predefined views, that contains projection information
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model View, then AutoScale.

Indicate view to be scaled. Click All to scale all views at once.
Options:
None.
Result:
The indicated views are scaled and fitted to its predefined size in
the form.

1:105
12 Series

AUTSCALE ALL
Purpose:
To scale all views at once. Can be used in a drawing form with

predefined views that contains projection information.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model View, then AutoScale All.
Options:
None.
Result:
All views are scaled and fitted to its predefined size in the form.
2D RESTRICTION
Purpose:
To modify the 2D restriction settings for a view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model View, then 2D Restriction.

Indicate the view to be modified. The 2D restriction dialogue is
displayed. Here it i possible to:
1. Modify the view frame: either key in the coordinates or click
the Modify Frame button. Then it is possible to indicate the
corners of the view frame on the screen.
2. Delete the 2D restriction frame: click the Delete Frame
button.
3. Define whether the view should be clipped or not. If Apply
Clipping is checked then the program will ask if you want to
trim away geometry outside the view frame. Apply clipping
will also set a clipping attribute in the view which activates
clipping in the update design/update all operations.
4. Define whether the 2D restriction window should have a fixed
position or if it should adjust to a new position of the view
when it is moved. If you choose the fixed position, by
checking Fixed Position, the restriction window stays in the
same position when you move the view. If you then move
models outside the restriction window when clipping is
activated they will disappear (outfitting models) when you do
an update design. If the restriction window does not have a
fixed position it will follow when you transform the view.
However it will not adjust to scaling, the size of the restriction
window remains the same.
Options:
None.
Result:
The 2D restriction settings for the view will be modified.

1:106
12 Series

CHANGE PROJECTION
Purpose:
This function is used to change the projection of a user-indicated

model view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model View, then Change Projection.

Indicate model view to be changed. The next possibilities for
defining the projection are shown in the window Choose option:
Same As View.
Indicate an existing view in the drawing, and the projection
will be the same as in the indicated view.
Point Vector.
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and a vector defining
the normal to that plane.
Three Points.
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and two vectors
defining the U-axis and the V-axis of the projection plane.
Two Cursor Positions.

Two cursor indications in an existing view define the U-axis
of the new projection; the V-vector is the same as the
normal to the projection indicated. A third cursor indication
defines the normal, and thereby the observer side, of the
new projection plane.
3D Rotate.
Starting from an existing view, the User defines the new
projection by rotating around the co-ordinate axes. This can
be done either in predefined steps, or in arbitrary steps via
keyboard input. The resulting projection is shown with a
small coordinate system and can be applied to the view by
Operation complete.
Predefined Projection.
There is a possibility to define 5 standard projections in the
default handling, and each of these is displayed and is
accessible as a direct choice.
Select either one of the ways to define projection or predefined

projection.
If the drawing is an Assembly ADP drawing (a drawing generated
by the Assembly ADP utility) the system will ask you if you want
to re-run tasks. This will regenerate the labels and the bounding
box that was created by the Assembly ADP.
Please note that these tasks are a part of the Assembly ADP
application and they will only work if you are in Marine Drafting. It
will not work in Hull Design.
Options:
None.
Result:
The selected view changes its projection as per Users choice.

1:107
12 Series

UPDATE DESIGN
Purpose:
To allow the user to update design models in selected views.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Update Design.

Select the view to update. Click Operation Complete to exit the
function.
Options:
Click All to update all views in the drawing.
Result:
The design models in the indicated model views are updated.
UPDATE ANNOTATIONS
Purpose:
To allow the user to update annotations in selected views.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Update Annotations.

function.
Options:
Result:
The annotations in the indicated model views are updated.
UPDATE ALL
Purpose:
To allow the user to update everything in selected views.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Update All.

function.
Options:
Result:
Everything in the indicated model views are updated.

1:108
12 Series

SLICE
Purpose:
This function is used to present a 'sliced', or 'unsliced', version of

a user-indicated view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Slice.

First, the view to slice is indicated by user. The system will then
present the current slice information (if any) in this view and also
highlight it in all other views in the drawing. The slice limits are
defined by two cutting planes parallel to the view. The cutting
planes, in turn, are defined by two positions in another
(perpendicular) view. After the view selection, the system
prompts for two positions in another (perpendicular) view
defining the slice limit. To unslice the model view, click
Operation Complete when the system asks for a point in the
first slicing plane.
Here is a restriction regarding outfitting models: the slice has no
effect when the view type is wireline or wireline hidden line.
Please select another view type. You can change the view type
in the Marine Drawing Explorer: select the view in the tree
control, right click and select Properties.
Options:
None.
Result:
The indicated model views are sliced.
Purpose:
This function moves a selection of model sub-views to a new

view with the same properties as the source view (i.e. the same
projection, position, scale etc.). This function is different from the
Tools > Subpicture > Split function in the way that it is
dedicated for model views and will also update the ID-lists of
both source and target views.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Split
SPLIT
You will now be prompted to indicate model sub-views. Please

note that all the model sub-views must be selected from the
same view. Finish your selection with Operation Complete. The
system will now create a new view with exactly the same
properties as the source view. The selected models will be
removed from the source view and added to the target view.
Finally you will get the possibility to transform the new view;
move it and change the scale for instance.
Options:
None.
Result:
The indicated model sub-views are moved to a new view.

1:109
12 Series

CLEAR
Purpose:
This function is used to empty the contents of the User-indicated

model view.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Clear.

Indicate model view to be cleared. Before the view is cleared, the
User must confirm the operation. If you wish to clear all views in
the current drawing, click All instead of indicating a view.
Options:
None.
Result:
The indicated view is cleared.
Purpose:
This function gives the User a possibility to explode models into

their parts. It is also possible to 'undo' a previous exploded view.
The function is limited to handle the following models:
EXPLODE
Instructions:
Plane panel
Curved panel
Longitudinal
Transversal
Outfitting.
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Explode.

The explode factor is keyed in by the User. This factor controls
the degree of disassembly to be applied on the components
within each model. By clicking Options here, the function will
switch to 'implode' mode, i.e. prepare for undoing previously
exploded model information. The model information to explode
(implode) is indicated by User. If the function already is in
'explode' mode, click Options to get access to some options
ruling the explode process. When accessing the explode options,
a multiple choice dialog pops up presenting the following
alternatives:
Explode view: Treats whole views (default).
Explode model: Treats single models.
Panel status: To control if profiles and brackets should stay

on panel or be part of the explode process.
Picture size: The size of the model view after explosion

could be kept (scale changed) or enlarged (scale
unchanged).
When function is in explode mode, click Options (before

indicating the model to explode) to get access to the options
ruling the explode process.

1:110
12 Series

Options:
Click Options in the Explode model dialog to switch from

explode to implode. Click Options to switch back from implode
to explode mode
Result:
The selected model parts or views are exploded with the explode
factor given by the User (or imploded).
Note: Measurements in a drawing will be ignored by the
Explode function. Creating linear measurements
referring to different exploded models is meaningless.
Note: Model functions as Exchange Model. Input Model,
Hidden Line Removal etc., will redraw even exploded
models ignoring the explode information.

1:111
12 Series

VALIDATE
Purpose:
This tool is used to track and optionally exchange all "out-ofdate" models in the current drawing. The validation tool will also
track and optionally remove all models in the drawing that is not
found in the data bank.
Note that the criteria for 'out-of-date' is controlled by time stamps
solely: a model is considered 'out-of-date' if the creation date of
the model in the drawing is older that the date of the model in the
data bank. This means that a model may be considered out-ofdate, even if the graphic representation in the drawing will be the
same after exchange.
It is possible to let the system automatically validate the drawing
when brought in from the data bank (via File/Open).The value of
the default keyword VALIDATE_MODELS_WHEN_OPEN_DWG
controls this:
Instructions:
No
No validation (system value)
Confirm
Validate drawing but let user confirm the exchange/remove
operations
Yes
Validate drawing and exchange/remove without user
confirmation
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Validate.

The system prompts to indicate model view to validate. The User
can validate all views in the current drawing by clicking All.
Window with list of possibly out-of-date models appears. Here
you can choose what to validate or all models in the list. When
validation procedure is performed, new list in the window shows
the models that are not found in the data bank. Now you can
select what to remove from the drawing or all models in the list.
Then click OK to return in the first step: indicate model view to
validate (All is available). Click Operation Complete to finish. If
there are no models in the indicated view that do not exist in the
data bank, the system gives message: 'All models in the model
view(s) are valid'.
Options:
None.
Result:
Models in may be exchanged from data bank. Invalid (non

existing in the databank) models may be deleted from the
drawing.

1:112
12 Series

HULL SYMMETRY
Purpose:
To change 'Hull symmetry' property of a model view with hull

model parts, those are designed as symmetric. The idea of this
property is to show PS, SB or both hull model parts in the same
view by changing from Symmetry to PS or SB and vice versa.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Model view, then Hull Symmetry.

If in the view are inserted B (both P and S) hull model parts, the
property Hull Symmetry can be changed to P or S by this
function. The system prompts to indicate model view.
Subsequently the system presents Select view Symmetry
dialog with three alternatives:
Symmetric
PS
SB
Choose one of them. Indicate another view to change symmetry

or Operation complete to finish the function.
The result can be seen after exchanging the view
Options:
None.
Result:
In the exchanged views all hull symmetric model parts are shown
as is chosen in the 'Select view Symmetry' dialog.
BACKDROP
Purpose:
This function is used to define any 2D view that is a Level 1

subpicture, as a backdrop.
Instructions:
In Tools menu, click Backdrop.

Indicate the 2D structure to use as backdrop. The system
responds with simple graphics dialog in which You can choose
projection for the backdrop. The next prompt is 'Cursor position'.
Indicate point to be referred to model space. (2D point mode
toolbars are available). Key in X, Y and Z. coordinates. Finally,
the current scale is fetched from the view, presented to the user
and made possible to update in case not correct. Thus the
backdrop will be connected to specific location in the model
space with defined projection.
Options:
None.
Result:
The subpicture will be recognised by the system as an ordinary

model view. Subsequently when placing equipment in a model
view that contains a backdrop, then these items will be initially
placed in the backdrop position and all further transformations
can be done in 2D.

1:113
12 Series

SUBPICTURE
CURRENT
Purpose:
This function allows the user to predefine the current subpicture

to which subsequent user-added geometric information will
belong to.
When adding geometric information to the drawing, the structural
positioning, i.e. which subpicture the added information will
belong to, depends on what kind of information that are to be
added and the circumstances under which the adding is taking
place. Some information, like dimensioning components, will
always belong to the same structure as the (first) item involved in
the calculations. In other situations, like restoring of subpictures,
the user is explicitly prompted to indicate the owner of the
subpicture.
There are still other situations, where the structural positioning
depends on the current subpicture, i.e. the owner structure is
supposed to have been defined in advance. This function allows
the user to predefine the current subpicture in such situations
and thereby add information to any part of the drawing. A
subpicture can be made current either by indicating an existing
subpicture or by creating a new one. The current drawing scale
will always equal the scale of this subpicture. It is possible to
redefine the drawing scale to use when new views (level-1
subpictures) are created. In this case a new view with this scale
will be created and made current, independently of what
subpicture that was current before this operation. The current
subpicture is modal, i.e. it is valid until it is redefined by the user.
If no information about the current subpicture has been given by
the user, the system will create a default structure and make this
structure the current one. It is always possible to change the
drawing structure at a later stage by using the functions Split
Subpicture and Regroup Subpicture.
The current subpicture structure may also be set to Automatic.
This means that there is no predefined current subpicture; it must
be derived each time the information is added. The automatic
structural positioning may roughly be derived in two ways,
depending on the circumstances. In most cases where the user
has the possibility to indicate the geometric position of the
information, by using the cursor, this position is used to derive
the structural position by somehow finding the "closest"
subpicture. In the rest of the cases, in which there always exists
some kind of "original", this original will define the structural
position. If the current subpicture is set to automatic, the current
scale can of course not be predefined but will equal the scale of
the subpicture, derived as above.

1:114
12 Series

Below, all Geometric-Information-Adding functions that rely on

the current subpicture information, will be listed. Furthermore,
the way to find the structural positioning when the current
structure is set to automatic is given.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Current.

Information about the current subpicture will be reported and a
multiple choice dialog containing the following alternatives will
show up:
Existing component
New subpicture (auto)
New subpicture (manual)
New view
Automatic
Existing component
The subpicture to become the current one is indicated by the
user.
New subpicture (auto)
A new subpicture, with level decided by the system, will be
created and made the current one. The owner of the new
subpicture is indicated by the user. If the owner contains model
information, a new component will be created, otherwise a
subview.
New subpicture (manual)
A new subpicture, with level decided by the user, will be created
and made the current one. The owner of the new subpicture is
indicated by the user. To create a new view, click Options here.
Depending on the level of the owner, a new view, subview or
component will be created. If a new view is created, the scale will
be fetched from the Default Keyword PICT_DEF_SCALE.
New view
A new view will be created and made the current one. The scale
of the view is supplied by the user (the current scale is
proposed).
Automatic
The current subpicture will be derived automatically each time it
is needed.
Options:
None.
Result:
The current subpicture will be redefined, according to users

action.

1:115
12 Series

SAVE
Purpose:
To save a subpicture in the current drawing in the Subpicture

data bank, or any other data bank.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Save.

Identifying the subpicture
The subpicture to save can be identified in two ways:
By indicating the subpicture. To identify by name instead,

click Cancel.
By keying in the name of the subpicture. If the drawing

contains more that one subpicture with the given name, You
have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
instead, just type an empty Return.
Establishing the external name

Before saving the subpicture, You are prompted to supply the
external name (as saved in the data bank) in a dialog box (if the
subpicture has a name, this one will be proposed by the system).
If a subpicture with the same name already exists in the data
bank, You have to confirm the overwriting before the subpicture
is saved.
Saving the subpicture
If the subpicture contains drawing components (like
dimensionings, notes etc.), You are informed about this and
decide if these also should be saved.
For obvious reasons, the subpicture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank. Now, the system
has accumulated every transformation that has been applied on
the subpicture during its lifetime. To achieve neutral format, the
inverse of this transformation history will be applied to the
subpicture before saving it. Note that the transformation history
of a subpicture can be viewed and optionally redefined in the
function Redefine Transformation.
Options:
To save on a data bank, other then the initially system-proposed,

click Options while identifying the subpicture. The system will
then let You key in the name of another data bank (the name of
the current data bank is proposed).
Result:
The user-given subpicture is saved in the data bank, in a neutral

format with any transformations that may have been made to it
during its lifetime effectively reversed.

1:116
12 Series

SAVE AS STD DETAIL
Purpose:
To save a subpicture in the current drawing as a detail in the

Standard Detail Book (details reside as subpictures of level 1-3
(view, subview or component) in the Standard data bank).
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Save as Std Detail.

Identifying the subpicture
The subpicture to save can be identified in two ways:
By indicating the subpicture. To identify by name instead,

click Cancel.
By keying in the name of the subpicture. If the drawing

contains more that one subpicture with the given name, You
have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
Joining the book

Once the subpicture has been identified, it should be registered
as a detail in the Standard Detail Book. This is done by giving the
page, followed by the detail number within this page.
First, all existing pages in the book are presented in a dialog,
from where the desired page is selected by user. If the user
wants to create a new page, or update the description of an
existing page, click Options. The system will then ask the user to
key in the number of the page of interest, where after the page
description is supplied by user (if the page already exists, the old
description is proposed).
Once the page is given, all details within this page are presented
in a dialog, from where the desired one is selected by user. Nonexisting details are revealed by the description
"<not defined>".
Once selected, the system will then ask the user to supply/
update the description for this detail (if the detail already exists,
the old description is proposed).

1:117
12 Series

Saving the detail

If the subpicture contains drawing components (like
dimensionings, notes etc.), You are informed about this and
decide if these also should be saved. If the detail already exists
in the data bank, the You must confirm the overwriting before the
detail is saved.
For obvious reasons, the subpicture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank.
Now, the system has accumulated every transformation that has
been applied on the subpicture during its lifetime. To achieve
neutral format, the inverse of this transformation history will be
applied to the subpicture before saving it. Note that the
transformation history of a subpicture can be viewed and
optionally redefined in the function Redefine Transformation.
Options:
None.
Result:
The user-given subpicture is saved as a detail in the Standard

Detail Book, in a neutral format with any transformations that
may have been made to it during its lifetime effectively reversed.
SAVE AS STD HATCH PATTERN
Purpose:
To allow a User to store a new hatch pattern in the Standard

Hatch Pattern Book such that it can then be made available for
subsequent general usage.
Instructions:
The pattern that the User has created must currently exist as a
level-3 sub-picture and the User initiates the process by
identifying either by name or with the aid of the screen cursor.
The user can toggle between these by clicking the Options
button.
Once the component/pattern has been identified it must be
registered as a pattern within the Hatch Pattern Book. This is
undertaken by giving the page number in the book, followed by
the pattern identifying description to be the used for future
referencing.
The system presents all of the existing pages in a dialog box and
the User is required to input the number of the page that suits his
purpose. The User is able to create a new page or to update the
description of an existing page by selecting the Options button
and inputting the required information.
If an existing page number is given by the User, all patterns
contain within that page are presented to the User in a dialog
box. Patterns are provided with a description and non-existing
patterns are revealed by the description not defined. The system
will ask the User to input the description for the new pattern.

1:118
12 Series

Options:
There are no other options available within this function.
Result:
A new pattern is stored within the Standard Hatch Pattern Book.
SAVE TO SDB
Purpose:
To save a sub-picture in the current drawing in the SDB file

format.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Sub-picture, then Save to SDB.

Identifying the sub-picture
The sub-picture to save can be identified in two ways:
By indicating the sub-picture. To identify by name instead,

click Cancel.
By keying in the name of the sub-picture. If the drawing

contains more than one sub-picture with the given name,
you have to confirm which one to save. To identify by cursor
Select the name of the file and the sub-picture

Before saving the sub-picture, you are prompted to select the
name and location of the resulting SDB file. The file name will
also be the name of the sub-picture. Please note that the file
system has limitations regarding what characters can be
included in the file name so the same limitations apply to the subpicture name.
Dimensions etc
If the sub-picture contains drawing components (like dimensions,
notes etc.), you are informed about this and you can choose if
these also should be saved.
Transformation
For obvious reasons, the sub-picture must be saved in a neutral
format (i.e. not transformed) in the data bank. Now, the system
has accumulated every transformation that has been applied on
the sub-picture during its lifetime. To achieve neutral format, the
inverse of this transformation history will be applied to the subpicture before saving it. Note that the transformation history of a
sub-picture can be viewed and optionally redefined in the
function Redefine Transformation.
Options:
None
Result:
The user-given sub-picture is saved in the selected file. The subpicture will have the same name as the file. Any transformations
that may have been made to it during its lifetime is effectively
reversed.

1:119
12 Series

EXCHANGE
Purpose:
To enable a User to exchange a sub-picture within a drawing with

another one that is in the data bank.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Exchange.

The user is asked to indicate the subpicture to exchange. By
clicking Options the user can instead key in the name of the
subpicture to exchange.
If more than one copy of the sub-picture is found within the
drawing, then the system provides the options:
1. All
2. Confirm one by one
4. Only indicated
It is then possible to identify which ones are to be exchanged and
the system requests input of the name of the new sub-picture
that is to replace those that are to be exchanged.
If the sub-pictures that are to be exchanged within a drawing are
replaced by more than one different sub-picture, then this will
require multiple use of this function.
Options:
There are no other options within this function.
Result:
Sub-pictures are exchanged by other sub-pictures within the

data bank.

1:120
12 Series

RENAME
Purpose:
To enable a User to rename a subpicture in the current drawing.
Instructions:
The subpicture that is to be renamed can be identified in two

ways:
by indicating the subpicture with the aid of the screen

cursor, and
by keying in the name of the subpicture.
In order to identify the subpicture by its previously assigned

name, it is first necessary to click the Options button. If the
drawing contains more than one subpicture with the supplied
name then the User must confirm the one that is to be renamed.
If the User has identified the subpicture through direct screen
interaction he is then required to identify the level of the
subpicture that he has selected to rename. Otherwise all levels
within the subpicture are automatically selected in order to be
subsequently renamed.
The system displays the name of the selected subpicture.
The User is required to key in the new name for the subpicture
and the renamed picture is then stored in the databank.
Options:
Result:
The subpicture in the databank is renamed. It is to be noted that

system-defined names, such as nodal names, cannot be
renamed by this operation.

1:121
12 Series

REDEFINE TRANSFORMATION
Purpose:
This function is used to display and possibly redefine the

transformation history of user-indicated subpictures. The
transformation history is used by the system to map between
world and drawing coordinates. This is necessary to maintain
consistency within the drawing, such as for example
exchanging subpictures
saving or inserting subpictures
retrieving the scale of subpictures
The transformation history is automatically maintained by the

system and is normally no subject for user redefinition. There
are, however, circumstances in which such a redefinition is
justified, namely when the user wants to control the neutral
format of subpictures saved in the data bank. See help about
Insert Subpicture for a discussion of this neutral format.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu,

Transformation.
click
Subpicture,
then
Redefine
Viewing the History

The subpicture of interest is indicated by user. Once indicated, a
multiple choice dialog presenting the transformation history will
appear. The history includes the following attributes:
Reflection
(None/U-axis/V-axis)
Rotation angle
(in degrees)
Scale
(absolute)
It should be mentioned that the translation also is a part of the

history. Because this attribute should be of no interest for the
user, it is hidden and hence cannot be redefined explicitly by
user.
It should be mentioned that the translation also is a part of the
history. Because this attribute should be of no interest for the
user, it is hidden and hence cannot be redefined explicitly by
user.
When ready, click Cancel to view another history, or Quit to
leave this function.
To redefine the history, select the appropriate attribute for
update.

1:122
12 Series

Redefining the History

To redefine the reflection, select the Reflection alternative. A
new dialog showing the possible alternatives will appear:
1. None
2. U-axis
5. V-axis
Select between None, U-axis and V-axis.
To redefine the rotation, select the Rotation alternative. The
desired angle, in degrees, is then keyed in by user (the current
value is proposed by the system).
To redefine the scale, select the Scaling alternative. The desired
scale factor is then keyed in by user. A scale factor given as a
single value (i.e. not containing ':' or '/') is always interpreted
reciprocally (both 50 and 1:50 means 0.02).
The redefinition will be applied on the subpicture instantly and
the resulting transformation history will be presented to the user.
Example of Justified Use
As mentioned above, the use of this function could be justified as
a necessary step prior to saving of a subpicture on the data
bank. Now, imagine that the user wants to fetch a subpicture in
the data bank, modify it somewhat and finally save it back in the
data bank. Lets assume the following steps:
Fetch the subpicture, using the function Insert Subpicture
Rotate the subpicture 45 degrees, using the function

Transform Subpicture. When applied, the transformation
history of the subpicture will be updated with this rotation.
Save it back in the data bank, using the function Save

Subpicture
The result of the save operation is nothing! This is because the

45 degree rotation, applied on the subpicture, was automatically
added to the transformation history as well. When saving it back
in the data bank, the inverse of the transformation history was
applied on the subpicture to make it saved in neutral format. The
user modification was lost!
To force the system to include the user modification in the data
bank, You have to make the system forget this modification
before storing the subpicture. This is done by redefining the
transformation history of the subpicture. Just decrease the
rotation angle of the subpicture with 45 degrees before storing it
in the data bank.
Options:
None.
Result:
The transformation history is displayed and possibly updated by

the user.

1:123
12 Series

REGROUP
Purpose:
This function is used to reorganise the structure of the drawing.

In this operation a 'part' of the drawing can be moved from its
'present' owner to another owner. In this manner components
can be reorganised, for example, into different subpictures, thus
facilitating subsequent manipulation and storage, etc. Parts of
drawings can be moved in five different ways, namely:
Instructions:
The first step, regardless of the actual re-grouping process itself,

is to indicate the new owner and to choose the required level.
The 'owner' can be a complete subpicture in level 1-3. By clicking
the 'operation complete' icon when the User is prompted to
indicate the 'owner', a new subpicture on level 1 will be created
as the new 'owner'. Regroup confirmation can be turned on or off
with the Options button.
The system then presents the User with a simple multiple choice
dialog box containing:

1:124
12 Series

Options:
Within each of groups 4 and 5, the User has two sub-options to

control the select of entities for regrouping, namely
This action is controlled, that is 'set', by clicking the Set (CUT/

NOCUT) button in the multiple choice dialog box, until buttons 4
and 5 read accordingly. This performance can be swapped
interactively.
Result:

(This function is not to simply reverse the effects of a 'splitting'

operation, however a User can achieve such a complete reversal
if he so wishes.)
1:125
12 Series

SPLIT
Purpose:
To enable the User to organise the contents of a sub-picture, if

required, at three 'levels'.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Subpicture, then Split.

Indicate any entity on the drawing geometry that is to be 'split'.
The splitting operation, when completed, organises the total
information at three levels, namely:
Level 1, denotes the full view
Level 2, denotes a sub-view
Level 3, denotes a component
Each level contains the information both at current and all lower
levels, level 3 being the lowest.
If the User selects an element that is on an external boundary
then the system automatically responds by drawing three
consecutive external boxes around the selected subpicture,
representing the three possible levels. This signifies that all
information is at 'level 1' only.
If the User selects an entity that is within the overall geometry
then the system responds by drawing a box, representing the
lowest level, that is level 3, around the internal elements, and
levels 1 and 2 boxes around the overall sub-picture again.
The User can select the level either by clicking the level number
icon on the Subpicture level toolbar or by simultaneously
clicking the keys CTRL and 'number' of the level, that is, 1, 2 or
3.

1:126
12 Series

Following the selection of a level, the User is presented with a

Split menu from which to select
1. Auto
Selection of this option results in the system automatically
creating a separate 'owner' for each subordinate level.
2. Subordinate
In this case the User identifies the owner for each subordinate
layer.
8. Geometry
By use of this option, the User defines the 'owner' of individual
graphic entities. Thus the User can control the 'level' each
selected geometric entity is to be assigned, that is 'owned'.
This option may result in some geometric/text entities being split
between levels and thus discontinued at the lower level.
4. Polygon (CUT/NOCUT)
The User creates a new owner for all geometric entities inside a
user-defined rectangle/polygon.
If the option Polygon is set to (CUT), geometry that intersects the
restricting boundary will be partitioned prior to splitting (CUT) and
geometry totally inside restricting boundary will be processed.
If the option Polygon is set to (NOCUT), geometry that intersects
the restricting boundary will be ignored and only geometry totally
inside restricting boundary will be processed (NOCUT).
5. Area (CUT/NOCUT)
The User creates a new owner for all geometric entities inside a
general user-defined area.
If the option Polygon is set to (CUT), geometry that intersects the
restricting boundary will be partitioned prior to splitting (CUT) and
geometry totally inside the restricting boundary will be
processed.
If the option Polygon is set to (NOCUT), the geometry that
intersects the restricting boundary will be ignored and only
geometry totally inside restricting boundary will be processed
(NOCUT).
6. Set CUT/NOCUT
This option switches Polygon (CUT) and Area (CUT) to Polygon
(NOCUT) and Area (NOCUT).
When the function is invoked, the User can switch Split confirm
ON/OFF by Options before indicating a subpicture to split. If
Split confirm is set ON, the involved entities will be highlighted
prior to prompt for split confirmation.

1:127
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The indicated subpicture will be split as defined by the User.
VITESSE
RUN SCRIPT
Purpose:
To allow the User open script with location defined by

SB_PYTHON in the project file.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Run Script.

In the Vitesse dialog box select desired script and click Open.
Options:
None.
Result:
The selected script is started and its name is added in the Script
Combo Box.
RUN SELECTED
Purpose:
To allow the User run currently selected script in the Script

Combo Box.
Instructions:
Select the script to be started in the Script Combo Box in the

Vitesse toolbar.
Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Run Selected.
Options:
None.
Result:
The chosen script is started.
Purpose:
Contains recently started scripts.
Instructions:
Select the script to be started in the Script Combo Box in the

Vitesse toolbar.
FILES
See RUN SELECTED.

Options:
None.
Result:
The chosen script is started.

1:128
12 Series

EDIT
Purpose:
To allow the User open script with location defined by

SB_PYTHON in the project file.
Instructions:
Select the script to be opened in the Script Combo Box in the

Vitesse toolbar. Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then
Edit Script.
The script is opened. The editor can be chosen from Tools /
Vitesse / OPT. After editing save changes and close the editor.
Options:
None.
Result:
The changed script is ready for starting.
Purpose:
To allow the User debug current script.
Instructions:
Select script to be debugged in the Script Combo Box in the

Vitesse toolbar.
DEBUG
Then, in the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Debug.

Options:
None.
LOG WINDOW
Purpose:
To switch ON/OFF the Log window.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Log window.

The window can be opened when the User starts scripts and
reloads modules
Options:
None.
Result:
You can see the list of started scripts and events of reloading
modules.
Purpose:
To reload the Python modules.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Reload modules.
RELOAD

1:129
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
All Python modules are reloaded.
Purpose:
To allow the User choose options for the editor, log output,
debugging and number of recently running scripts
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Options.
OPTIONS
The default editor is Notepad. File Associations mean OS choice

of the editor by file association. By Custom option in the text box
can be specified the program file name of the editor. An editor
with start parameters can be used also.
In the Logging options frame can be activated log output and
enabled when status window is not visible.
The text box Debug script name in the Other frame is used to
define the name of the script to debug. 'Number of recent scripts'
text box specifies the number of recently started scripts in the
Script Combo
Options:
None.
Result:
The script editor, Logging options, Debug script name and

number of recent scripts are defined according to the user's
choice.
STOP SCRIPT
Purpose:
Terminate the currently running Vitesse script.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Vitesse, then Stop Script.

Please note that it is only possible to stop a script while the script
is running a function that requires user input (e.g. point2D_req).
Options:
None.
Result:
The script is stopped.

1:130
12 Series

INQUIRY
MODEL
Purpose:
To enable a User to obtain current information on a displayed

model.
Instructions:
With the screen cursor the user must first select the model on the
drawing. The system will highlight the 'model' nearest to the
cursor when the left-hand button on the mouse is clicked. The
system then presents a simple dialog box that contains
information relevant to the selected model. The User can
continue to select further models within the drawing with the
system again presenting data on the selected model. By clicking
the Options button the user can get information on connection
points in the model.
Options:
Result:
The User is presented with a list of information relevant to a

selected model in the current display.
Purpose:
To provide the User with the name of a subpicture.
Instructions:
With the screen cursor the User can select a local within the
screen and the system will determine the nearby subpicture.
NAME
The name of the subpicture is then displayed in the Message

Window, if currently displayed, at the bottom of the screen. The
user can further specify the name inquiry by clicking the Options
button.
Options:
Result:
The User is provided with the name of the subpicture that he has
selected.

1:131
12 Series

VERIFY
Purpose:
To provide the User with a list of the characteristics of selected

arbitrary geometry and its superior elements and subpictures.
Instructions:
The User is required to identify on the screen the particular

geometry that he wishes to verify. This then causes the system to
create and display a dialog box listing:
the geometric entities
the superior elements, component, view, layer, etc.,
the drawing title.
Options:
The User can restrict the identification to a particular kind of

geometry by clicking the Options button and then selecting the
desired type from the dialog box that the system then presents to
him.
Result:
A list of information relevant to the selected geometry within the

workspace is provided for the User's consideration and
information.
USED LAYERS
Purpose:
To provide the User with a simple listing of the layers, and their
identification, which have been established for use within a
drawing.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry, then Used Layers.

On entering this function the User is presented with a simple
selection from which to choose, namely:
All
User defined
System defined
If Layer 0 has been used then this will not be displayed in the list.
Following a selection by the User, the system displays a simple
list containing the identification of the layers that have been
established.
Options:
None.
Result:
The User can decide on the layer identification number for an

addition layer, or for additional layers.

1:132
12 Series

WORKSPACE
Purpose:
To provide the User with a list of the names and the sizes of
objects which are currently residing in the workspace.
Instructions:
Simply selecting this function causes the system to create and

display a dialog box containing:
a pointer to each object
the total size of each object, (in words)
the used space within each object, (in words)
the length of the name string
the name of each object
the grand total object size, (in words)
the grand total used space, (again in words)
Options:
There are no options available within this function.
Result:
A list of information relevant to the contents within the workspace

is provided for the User's consideration and information.
DRAWING STATUS
Purpose:
This function is used to display some general information about

Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry, then Drawing Status.

Information about the current drawing and modal settings is
listed in a dialog.
Options:
None.
Result:
General drawing information is displayed.
ATTRIBUTES
Purpose:
To show the Attributes window, which lists all of the attributes of

the current element.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Attributes...
Options:
None.
Result:
The attributes window is displayed.

1:133
12 Series

Design Area Docs
Purpose:
The design areas in a project, modelled using Space

Management, can have relevant links to design documents and
drawings with project design rules and decisions. This function
finds the space arrangement that is used for design areas by
using the logical variable AM_DESAREA_DOC and allows the
user to give a point in space by indicating in the drawing.
Documents linked to the selected design area are presented and
can be selected for viewing. Note that when linked drawings are
displayed, the currently open drawing is replaced on the canvas..
An alternative way to avoid this is to link drawings as e.g. TIF
files.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Design Area Docs.
Options:
None.
Result:
Relevant design documents are presented to the designer.
Purpose:
To show the Query Project window, which provides information

about the current project. You can list Users, Teams, Databases,
MDB and Stamp elements.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Project...
Options:
None.
Result:
The Query Project window is displayed.
PROJECT
USER STATUS
Purpose:
To show the User Status window, which provides information

about the users who are accessing the current project. You can
list Users by various filters and see user information and the
databases they are accessing.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then User Status...
Options:
None.
Result:
The User Status window is displayed.

1:134
12 Series

DATA ACCESS CONTROL
Purpose:
To show the Query Data Access Control window, which provides

information about the access the current user has to database
elements and attributes.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Data Access

Control...
Options:
None.
Result:
The Query Data Access Control window is displayed.
DB CHANGES
Purpose:
To show the Database Changes window, which allow the user to

report on changes made to database elements since a particular
instance in time, or differences between the current state and a
previous state.
This window is the same as that called by the option Tools>DB
Listing as described later.
The window functions for both options through the Control
menu.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then DB Changes...
Options:
None.
Result:
The DB Changes window is displayed.
GLOBAL COMMUNICATIONS
Purpose:
Checks the communication when using global databases.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Global

Communications. This will check that a remote server is
reachable.
Options:
None.
Result:
Information about global communication status is received.

1:135
12 Series

GLOBAL LOCKING AND ISOLATION
Purpose:
Check the Lock and Isolation state of all online global locations.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Inquiry and then Global Locking and
Isolation. This will display the query location lock and isolation
dialog.
Options:
None.
Result:
Information about the state is received.
DRAWING FORM
OPEN
Purpose:
To open an existing drawing form and make this the current

drawing. The drawing form is fetched from the Form data bank or
any other data bank. This function is used in combination with
the function Save to update an already existing drawing form, or
to create a new drawing form based on a modification of an
existing drawing form.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Drawing Form, then Open.

drawing before the new one is opened.
to key in the name of the drawing form. It is possible to browse
the contents of the Standard data bank by keying in a wild card
name.
Result:

The drawing form will be converted to a general drawing and

renamed by prefixing the form name with "F_". The layout and
the set of rules can then be updated with ordinary tools, before
converting it back to a drawing form, using the function Save.
1:136
12 Series

SAVE
Purpose:
To convert the current drawing into a drawing form and save it in

the Standard data bank. Text insertion rules are defined in
interaction with the user.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Drawing Form, then Save.

The geometry in the drawing, except rule definition texts, will
make up the layout of the form. A rule definition text is a text
beginning with a "$" or a "@" followed by a running number that
denotes the identification (number) of the rule. Standard slant
and aspect of the text is assumed. The font, position, rotation
and height of the text are characteristics that will be saved
together with the rule description. Additional attributes
(adjustment, max number of characters etc.) will be defined by
user within this function.
A rule definition text can be of type single ($) or table (@). The
single text will contain only one row, while a table text may
contain several rows. The attribute data for a single text is the
adjustment and the max number of characters allowed. The table
text takes two more attributes, namely the max number of lines
and the interline space factor.
First, the user is prompted to key in the desired name of the
form. Note that this name cannot equal the name of the current
drawing. If an object with the same name already exists in the
data bank, You have to confirm the overwriting before the
drawing form is saved.
The user now gets a chance to supply the name of a reference
form. The rule attributes of this form can then be used in the form
about to save, if desired. If the form already exists in data bank,
this name will be proposed by the system. Note that the
reference form is not needed by the system; it just makes things
easier for the user. If a reference form has been supplied, the
system now asks if the rule parameters in the form about to save
should be defined automatically, via the reference form. This
means that only the attributes of rules not present in the
reference form must be defined explicit by user.
Next, the system will go through all rule definition texts in the
drawing to establish the definition for each rule, with or without
the assistance of the reference form. The attributes of rules that
can/should not be defined automatically must be supplied explicit
by the user. Predefined values will be proposed, if possible.
When the rule definition is completed, all rules will be listed in a
dialog. The user now gets the possibility to update the additional
attributes of any rule. Just key in the number of the rule, or select
the rule in the dialog list. The update session is completed with
an empty rule selection (or Cancel), where after the form will be
saved.

1:137
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The current drawing will be converted into a drawing form and

saved in the Form data bank.
Purpose:
To enable a User to update an individual symbol.
Instructions:
The User is presented with a simple dialog box containing the

various symbols and font sets that are currently available. With
the screen cursor, followed by clicking the left-hand button, the
User can select the symbol that is to be updated. The system
responds by drawing a simple rectangular box round the selecte
symbol.
SYMBOL
OPEN
If the user then clicks OK, the dialog box is then replaced on the
screen by an enlarged copy of the selected symbol, created in a
drawing form of size 511*511. This representation of the symbol
is held in a drawing named FONTSYMB<symbol
number>. It is to be noted that the original font and symbol
number will be save by the system, along with the drawing to be
used, when recreating the symbol.
The User can then update, modify, etc., this symbol using the
basic Drafting facilities of the system. In order to assist him the
symbol is automatically exploded, that is degenerated into its
original geometric elements, e.g. contours and chains.
Furthermore, the connections and text positions, if any and that
would have been established when the symbol was first created
and entered into the symbol file, will be shown as internal
symbols, showing the point and vector of each connection and
text position. The connections will be shown in white and the text
positions in red.

1:138
12 Series

Options:
The User can update and/or delete old connections and he can
add new connections. The system keeps track of the next free
connection number and allows the User to supply all necessary
information, namely:
the connection point
the connection vector
the connection code
The adding of new connections is terminated by inputting the

command 'Operation Complete'.
The User can update and/or delete text positions and he can add
new text positions, in a similar manner as for the creation of a
new connection, except where supplying the relevant
information, namely:
the text position
the text vector
the text position code
the minimum height and width
The updating of text positions is terminated by inputting the

command Operation Complete.
Result:

When the redefinition of the symbol has been completed, the

system will store the symbol in the 'symbol font' file and from
which it can be subsequently accessed for copying into a
drawing. The modified symbol will then be used in any drawing
that contains this symbol, including drawings that may have been
created before the modification was made.
1:139
12 Series

SAVE
Purpose:
To enable a User to create and save, in the system Symbol Font

file, a new symbol.
Instructions:
The first task is to key-in, into the dialog box that appears on the
screen, the 'symbol font' ID number that is to be used, noting that
this must be unique and not one that is already used within the
'symbol font' set. When this input has been entered and the OK
button has been clicked, the display returns to the open drawing.
It is recommended that a drawing form of size 511*511 is used
when creating symbols from scratch. (This drawing form is
automatically created by the system when a symbol is fetched for
any subsequent updating.)
The User can then employ the full Drafting capability of the
system in order to create a symbol, inclusive of geometry and
text, which meets the design needs.
The 'symbol' object, when deemed by the User to be complete,
will then be scanned for 'contours' that define the shape of the
symbol. It is to be noted that geometric or text items that are
partly outside of the boundary of the drawing form will, after
verification, be omitted from the final symbol. Thus the User
needs to exercise some discipline in ensuring that the contours
and text that define the required symbol lay completely within the
drawing form. The User should note that in subsequent
applications of a symbol within a new drawing that he can, of
course, change the relative scale of the symbol at that time.
The total size of a single symbol is internally maximised by the
system and will be checked against the symbol shape definition.
If the system considers that the shape is too complicated, then
the User will receive an error message and the symbol creation
process will be aborted by the system. The User can reduce the
apparent 'complexity' of a symbol by 'chaining' geometric
elements together, as described in the corresponding Drafting
function.
Options:
Result:
When the definition of the symbol has been completed, the

system will store the symbol in the Symbol font file, with an
appropriate graphic representation, and from which it can be
accessed at any time for copying into a drawing.

1:140
12 Series

REMOVE
Purpose:
To remove a symbol from the list of available fonts. (It is to be

noted that this is not the same as removing a symbol from a
drawing: this latter action is undertaken under Edit / Delete /
SYM.)
Instructions:
The User is presented with a simple dialog box containing the

various symbols that are currently available. By selecting the font
number and horizontally scrolling, the User can select with the
cursor and the left-hand mouse button the symbol that is to be
deleted. The system draws a simple rectangular box around the
selected symbol.
If the user then clicks OK in this dialog box, the system asks him
to confirm that he really wishes to delete the selected symbol.
This Remove function should be used with care. When a symbol
is used within a drawing, only the reference to the symbol font,
together with any associated scaling, etc., information is held
within the electronic file version of the drawing, not a full copy of
the symbol itself. Only when a drawing is being displayed, or
plotted/printed in 'hard copy' form, is a full copy of the symbol
temporarily fetched from the symbol file. Thus deleting a symbol
from the symbol file may result in previously complied drawings
being inadvertently effected
Options:
There are no other options within this function.
Result:
The Symbol Font file is updated to meet the Users current

requirements.

1:141
12 Series

EXPLODE
Purpose:
To explode a symbol into it's individual unconnected geometric

components. This function can be applied either with regard to
any symbol within the data bank of symbol fonts that are
provided for possible incorporation within drawings and require
modification in some manner, or at the stage when a symbol has
actually been incorporated within a drawing and requires
subsequent modification.
Instructions:
Cursor-select the symbol that is to be exploded and click the lefthand button once. The system responds by highlighting the
selected symbol. If the correct symbol has been identified then
cursor-select the 'operation complete' icon.
The User can then select any of the constituent geometric
elements of the original symbol and undertake any operations on
that original uncoupled element that may be deemed to be
necessary, e.g. delete it, move it, etc.
This facility provides a form of local control over the geometry of
the symbol. However it must be used with care as the various
components can no longer be manipulated in a contiguous
manner.
Options:
There are no options within this function.
Result:
The selected symbol within a display, and the associated

drawing, is exploded into its constituent geometric elements, with
no implied grouping or connectivity, without any change in locally
defined size and orientation, and the various elements stored as
individual entities within the drawing.
INSPECT DRAWING
Purpose:
This is a data management facility that enables a User to

examine the full spectrum of information that is either contained
or is implicit within a drawing.
Instructions:
On selecting this function the User is presented with a Multiple

Choice box and from which he can select the specific nature/
form of the data or information that he wishes to inspect. Some of
the choices lead the User to other dialog boxes and from which
he is required to make a further selection in order to more closely
determine the type of data and/or information that he requires to
examine.

1:142
12 Series

Options:
The initial Multiple Choice box presents the user with the
following alternatives, and in some cases, further selection
choices:
1. Recreate windows
Updates the sub-picture extension cache in the current drawing.
Note that this cache is normally kept up-to-date automatically by
the system. However, this is a way of forcing the cache to be
updated in case the automation for some reason has failed.
2. List object
Supervisor for listing the overall contents of the current drawing.
3. List element
Supervisor for listing/verifying the structural parts of the current
drawing.
4. Integrity check
Make sure no duplicate PADD references exist in the current
drawing.
Note that this functions is used for debugging purposes. The
normal state is that no duplicate PADD references exist.
5. Show windows
Supervisor for highlighting sub-picture or geometry extensions in
6. Flag
Special function for making all information detectable and/or
possible to delete in the current drawing.
Aimed for debugging purposes.
7. Delete
Special function for deleting elements by pointer in the current
drawing
Aimed for debugging purposes
8. Performance
Supervisor for tuning the output to the graphical screen.
9. Purge
Removes obsolete sub-pictures (empty and non-vital) in the
current drawing.
10. Attributes
Supervisor for accessing attributes in the current drawing.
Aimed for debugging purposes

1:143
12 Series

11. Change text code page

In some cases, text will not be displayed properly on drawings
migrated from Tribon M3 to AVEVA Marine (12 Series). It can be
due to that the codepage used to encode multibyte text has been
changed to UTF-8 in AVEVA Marine (12 Series). This function
displays a dialogue box presenting a list containing all texts
within the current drawing in order to correct such texts.
To convert one or more texts, check the associated check boxes

in the list and click the Convert button. A second dialogue will
be displayed to let the user specify another code page than UTF8. The Preview window reflects what the resulting text will look
like.

1:144
12 Series

When the correct code page has been selected and the text is
readable, click OK and the texts in the list will be updated. To
update the texts in the drawing, click OK once more.
12. Remove dimensioning from PADD
To prevent un-persisted changes to be overwritten after a
subsequent evaluation of the dimensioning, it is possible to
remove the dimensioning from PADD before modifying it.
Note that when removing a dimensioning from PADD, the
associativity will permanently be lost and the sub-functions Move
dimension text, Text properties and Edit Dimension text
within the Modify/Dimension dialog will not apply anymore.
Result:
The user is eventually presented with dialogue boxes that

contain detailed sets of data and information that should assist
the user in data management operations.
CLEAN WORKSPACE
Purpose:
To enable a User to quickly clean a current workspace of unused

objects.
Instructions:
By the User simply picking this function the system responds by

clearing the current workspace, that is the display, of all objects
that are not needed. The objects that are retained depend on the
application and hence this function is intended for use with the
system in the primary Drafting mode.
Options:
There are no options within this process.
Result:
Unused objects are removed from the graphic workspace and

the associated drawing files.
GLOBAL TRANSACTIONS
Purpose:
View transactions in a global project.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Global Transactions. This will display a

dialog showing global transactions.
Options:
None.
Result:
The dialog is displayed.

1:145
12 Series

MESSAGE CONFIRM
Purpose:
To set the level of user experience regarding confirmation of

system messages. There are three types of messages displayed
to the user:
Never confirmed
User-controlled confirmation
Always confirmed
Messages that should not be confirmed are displayed in the

message window, while messages to confirm are displayed in a
message dialog.
Messages with user-controlled confirmation are handled in this
function. There are three alternatives:
Instructions:
Avoid confirmation
Let system decide
Prefer confirmation
In the Tools menu, click Message Confirm.

A multiple choice dialog is displayed, with the following
alternatives:
Avoid
Default
Prefer
Options:
None.
Result:
The level for user-controlled message confirmation is set.
CLAIM LISTS
Purpose:
To show the Multiwrite Claims List window, which allows the user
to view claimed database elements, and also claim and unclaim
database elements.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Claim Lists
Options:
None.
Result:
The Multiwrite Claims List window is displayed.

1:146
12 Series

LISTS
Purpose:
Handle Lists and Collections.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Lists.
Options:
None.
Result:
The List-Collections dialog will be shown.
DB LISTING
Purpose:
To show the Database Listing window, which allows the user to

create a macro that fully describes an element and all of its
offspring and which can be re-input at a later stage.
This window is the same as that called by the option
Tools>Inquiry >DB Changes as described earlier.
The window functions for both options through the Control
menu.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click DB Listing
Options:
None.
Result:
The Database Listing window is displayed.
SETTINGS
EXPLORER
Purpose:
To allow the user to define some settings for Explorers.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu click Settings then Explorer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The behaviour of the Explorers will change according to the

settings.
RESET WINDOW LAYOUT
Purpose:
To reset the window layout. This should be used when any

window has been placed in an unwanted position and it is
impossible to move it.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Reset WindowsLayout.

1:147
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The window layout will be reset to the default layout.
PREFERENCES
Purpose:
To control some settings that are modal, i.e. valid independently

of what drawing is current, such as colours and model draw
codes.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Preferences.

A tree property sheet will appear, containing the categories
Colours
Miscellaneous
Model Draw Code
Just navigate in the tree structure to show and possibly modify

desired properties.
The Model Draw Code is used to control how to present models
of a specific type in the current drawing, e.g. when invoking the
Insert Model function. Note that the draw codes are part of the
Drafting default file.
In order to get also non-graphical information in a panel possible
to pick, graphical handles can be turned on or off by checking the
appropriate check box. These panel components are Weld,
Excess, Notch, Tap, Point, Cutout, Seam, Compensation and
Boundary.
Options:
None.
Result:
Modal preferences will be modified according to user's action.
DIMENSION
Purpose:
To enable a User to create and layout the comprehensive

dimensioning that is required in a two-dimensional drawing.
Instructions:
The User can select any one of the available sub-functions within
this group in order to create and add the types of dimensioning
that are available within that sub-function. More than one subfunction may be employed in order to create the full
dimensioning details that are needed on an individual drawing
and the sequence of usage of the sub-functions, and of the
optional capabilities within them, is at the discretion of the User.

1:148
12 Series

Options:
The only options are to select the required sub-function from

within the menu that is presented at the top of the screen.
Dimensioning in 2D offers the following functions:
Linear
Radius
Diameter
Angle
Curve length
Area
Distance 2 point
Dimensioning in 3D offers the following functions:
Result:

Linear
Axis Parallel
Coordinate
Curve Length
Weight and COG
Shell Profile Mounting Angle
Distance To Plane
Complete dimensioning can be added to the graphic display and

in the associated drawing file, and with the system automatically
extracting the required numeric dimensions from the actual
geometry of the stored graphic items.
1:149
12 Series

LINEAR
Purpose:
This function calculates the distances between a number of usergiven 2D points in the drawing, along a given projection direction,
and generates the complete Dimensioning component
automatically.
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click Linear.

The user is requested to give a sequence of measure points,
completed by Operation Complete. Note that the points may be
given in any order, they will eventually be sorted along the
projection direction.
The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged into
desired position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text height etc) by clicking Options
and thus entering the Advanced function, see below.
Once positioned, the user is requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To remove the last created
dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.
Initially, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before first
measure point is given.
1. Direction
The Direction group shows the direction of the dimensioning: all
measure points will be projected along this direction.
If Parallel direction is selected, the user is requested to indicate
a line that defines the direction. Here, Operation Complete
means that the direction will be derived implicit from the two first
measure points given.

1:150
12 Series

2. Type
The Type group shows the type of the resulting dimensioning:
Normal means that distances between each two adjacent
measure points are presented.
Chain means that distances from the base point to each other
measure point are presented on a common dimension line. The
base point is one the two end-most points when sorted,
depending on the two first points given related to the stipulated
direction.
Staircase presents the same distances as Chain but each one
on a separate dimension line.
3. Tolerance
The Tolerance group shows the tolerance that will be appended
to the resulting dimension text.
None means no tolerance will be appended
means symmetric tolerance. The value is typed in the field
below.
+/- means unsymmetrical tolerance. The Max and Min values
are typed in the two fields below.
4. Include
The Include group shows what should be included in the
resulting dimension text:
Value - the measured distance
- a diameter symbol to prepend
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the measure points
5. Text and Arrow Layout
Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings of type
Normal are possible:

Text inside, both arrows inside
Text inside, both arrows flipped
Text outside, one arrow flipped
Text outside, both arrows flipped
1:151
12 Series

6. Dimension Text
This field controls the format of the resulting dimension text. It is
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
system default (only the measured distance is presented).
Intelligent markers available:
#DIM()
The measured distance
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
~+<max value>/<min value>
Unsymmetrical tolerance
#/
New-line separator
The field is normally not edited by user. However, arbitrary text
may be inserted at any position in between the intelligent
markers.

1:152
12 Series

7. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button the User can view and
optionally change any of the remaining parameters controlling
the layout of the dimensioning. The parameters are:
Number of decimal positions in the measured distance.
Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension lines.
Height of dimension text.
Various tolerances controlling the layout of resulting

dimensioning, like
Distance text-line
Reference line gap
Reference line excess
Chain gap
Staircase factor
Fit control for dimension text in restricted spaces.
Shrink
Rotate
No adjust
Position of the dimension text.

Alternatives for normal dimensionings:
Above dimension line
Splitting the dimension line
Above the dimension line, but rotated

Alternatives for chained dimensionings:
Centered
At arrow
At arrow, rotated
At reference line, rotated
Options:
None.
Result:
A complete dimensioning component is added to the drawing.

The User has full control in order to ensure a suitable and clear
layout that is consistent with the requirements and the
complexity of the overall arrangement.

1:153
12 Series

RADIUS

1:154
12 Series

Purpose:

This function calculates the radius of a user-indicated arc or

circle entity in the drawing, and generates the complete
Dimensioning component automatically.
1:155
12 Series

Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click Radius.

The user is requested to define the arc or circle from which to
create the radius dimensioning. Initially the system asks for an
existing arc, but any arc definition mode can be selected from the
Geometry Arc definition toolbar.
If the type is Knuckled or Cross, the position of the leader must
also be given.
Once created, the user is requested to create another
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before the
arc/circle is given.
1. Type
There are three styles available:
Straight
Knuckled
Cross
The straight style need only the arc/circle indication. The radius
is presented on a leader line aiming at the arc edge.
The knuckled style consists of a two-segment leader, with the
radius presented on a horizontal line. Here another user-given
point is required to locate the horizontal part of the leader.
The cross style presents the radius on a leader line from the
centre of the arc/circle to a point on the arc/circle edge. Here the
edge point is indicated by the user. Note that there are four
different layouts for the cross style, see the Text and Arrow
Layout section below.

1:156
12 Series

2. Tolerance
below.
3. Include
Value - the measured radius.
Four different layouts for cross radius dimensionings are
possible:
5. Dimension Text
system default (only the measured radius prepended by 'R' is
presented).
#DIM()
The measured radius
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator
Note: The field is normally not edited by user. However,
arbitrary text may be inserted at any position in between
the intelligent markers.

1:157
12 Series

6. Parameters
Number of decimal positions in the measured radius.
Type and size of arrowhead at the end of leader lines.
Distance between measure text and leader line.
Options:
None.
Result:
A complete dimensioning component, containing the leader and

the measured radius, is added to the drawing.
DIAMETER
Purpose:
This function calculates the diameter of a user-indicated arc or

circle entity in the drawing, and generates the complete
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click Diameter.

The user is requested to indicate the arc or circle from which to
create the diameter dimensioning. If the type is Knuckled or
Cross, the position of the leader must also be given.
parameters are displayed. Changes here can be done before the
arc/circle is given.

1:158
12 Series

1. Type
There are three styles available:
Straight
Knuckled
Cross
The straight style need only the arc/circle indication. The

diameter is presented on a leader line aiming at the arc edge.
The knuckled style consists of a two-segment leader, with the
diameter presented on a horizontal line. Here another user-given
point is required to locate the horizontal part of the leader.
The cross style presents the diameter on a leader line from the
centre of the arc/circle to a point on the arc/circle edge. Here the
edge point is indicated by the user. Note that there are four
different layouts for the cross style, see the Text and Arrow
Layout section below
2. Tolerance
below.
3. Include
Value - the measured diameter
Four different layouts for cross diameter dimensionings are
possible:

1:159
12 Series

5. Dimension Text
system default (only the measured diameter prepended by the
diameter symbol is presented).
#DIM()
The measured diameter
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator
6. Parameters
Number of decimal positions in the measured diameter.
Type and size of arrowhead at the end of leader lines.
Distance between measure text and leader line.
Options:
None.
Result:
A complete dimensioning component, containing the leader and

the measured diameter, is added to the drawing.

1:160
12 Series

ANGLE
Purpose:
This function is used to calculate the angle between two lines in

the current drawing and generates the complete dimensioning
component automatically.
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click Angle.

The user is requested to define the two leg lines used to create
the angle dimensioning.
Next, the user is requested to indicate the desired sector (there
are four possibilities) the angle shall be measured in, and at the
same time the point through which the dimension arc should
pass.
Finally, user positions the text denoting the measured angle. By
clicking Options here, the text attributes like height, font, aspect
etc can be changed. Note that the change of text height will be
modal while change of other attributes only will apply on this
dimensioning. Changing text attributes other than the height
permanently is done by updating the corresponding default
keywords via Format>Defaults. If the text is placed outside the
sector (and the smallest angle is presented, see below) the
arrows will flip 180 degrees and the dimension arc will be
somewhat extended (useful when sectors are narrow).
Reference lines are created automatically if necessary (e.g.
when the dimension arc does not meet one (or both) of the given
leg lines).
first leg line is given.

1:161
12 Series

1. Text Orientation
The Text Orientation group shows the orientation of the
dimension text:
Horizontal
Vertical
Tangential
If Tangential orientation is selected, the text will be rotated to

align with the dimension arc at the point on this arc closest to the
text when positioned. Initially, the text is aligned to the middle of
the dimension arc.
2. Tolerance
below.
3. Include
Value - the measured angle
Unit - the unit of the angle (degree symbol)
4. Range
Given the two leg lines, two different angles can be presented:

Smallest - the indicated sector will be measured (up to 180

degrees)
Biggest - the indicated plus the two adjacent sectors will be

measured (up to 360 degrees)
1:162
12 Series

5. Dimension Text
system default (only the measured angle plus unit is presented).
#DIM()
The measured angle
~0
Unit symbol (degree)
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator
6. Parameters
By selecting the Advanced button it is possible to view and
Number of decimal positions in the measured angle.
Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension arc.
Reference line gap and excess (when created)
Options:
None.
Result:
A complete dimensioning component, containing the dimension

arc, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

1:163
12 Series

CURVED
Purpose:
This function calculates the length of a 2D curve (a contour or

part of it) in the current drawing and generates the complete
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click Curved.

First, the contour to measure is indicated.
Next, the user is prompted to supply an arbitrary number (at least
two) of restricting points on the contour. These points are used to
divide the contour in subparts. Each such subpart will then be
measured. The definition of restricting points is completed by
clicking Operation Complete. Note that the points may be given
in any order, they will eventually be sorted along the curve. If no
restriction points are defined, the ends of the contour are used as
restriction points and the whole contour will then be measured.
Next, the resulting dimension line (a copy of the measured curve)
is dragged into desired location by the User. Click Operation
Complete at this stage to skip the dimension and witness lines.
Finally, if Text Adjust (see below) has been ordered, the User has
the possibility to indicate and transform any of the resulting
submeasure texts. Complete with Operation Complete.
contour is indicated.

1:164
12 Series

1. Type
The Type group shows the type of the resulting dimensioning:
Normal means that lengths of each curve subpart are presented.
Chain means that distances (along the curve) from the base
point to each other curve restricting point are presented on a
common dimension line. The base point is one the two end-most
restricting points on the curve, depending on the order of two first
restricting points given.
Staircase presents the same distances as Chain but each one
on a separate dimension line.
2. Tolerance
below.
3. Include
Value - the measured distances
Ref Lines - leaders, aiming at the restriction points on the curve
Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings of type
Normal are possible:
5. Text Adjust
If Text Adjust is on, it will be possible to identify and adjust any of
the resulting submeasure texts, using the general 2D
transformation tool.

1:165
12 Series

6. Dimension Text
#DIM()
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator

1:166
12 Series

7. Parameters

dimensioning, like
Distance text-line
Reference line gap
Chain gap
Staircase factor
Shrink
Rotate
No adjust

Alternatives for normal dimensionings:

Alternatives for chained dimensionings:
Centered
At arrow
At arrow, rotated
At reference line, rotated
Options:
None.
Result:

line, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

1:167
12 Series

AREA
Purpose:
This function calculates the area of a user-defined closed

contour in the drawing, and generates the complete
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click Area

The closed contour is defined by indicating one or a number of
contours that together define the shape on which to apply the
area calculation. Complete the shape definition by Operation
Complete. A non-closed shape will automatically be closed by a
straight line.
The resulting dimension text is dragged into desired position in
the drawing. At this stage the height and rotation of the
dimension text can be changed by clicking Options. The unit in
which the area is presented is controlled by the default keyword
UNIT_AREA_FAC.
Options:
None.
Result:
Text stating the bounded area can be placed close to any entity
in a display and stored in the associated drawing file.
DISTANCE
Purpose:
This function calculates the straight line distance between two

given points in the current drawing and generates the complete
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click Distance.

The two points are supplied by the user.
Next, the text denoting the measured straight length is positioned
by user. By clicking Options here, some text attributes (height
and rotation) can be changed.
Options:
None.
Result:
A complete dimensioning component, containing the measure

text is added to the drawing.

1:168
12 Series

3D
LINEAR
Purpose:
This function presents the distances between a number of

successive 3D points in an arbitrary view and generates the
complete Dimensioning component automatically. The measures
are calculated along the direction parallel to a line passing
through the first two 3D points given (all given 3d points are
projected on this line before distances are calculated).
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Linear.

The user is requested to give a sequence of 3D points in an
arbitrary view, completed by Operation Complete. Note that the
points may be given in any order, they will eventually be sorted
along the projection direction (a line passing through the first two
3D points given).
The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged into
desired position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
parameters is displayed. Changes here can be done before first
measure point is given.

1:169
12 Series

1. Tolerance
below.
2. Include
Four different layouts for single-measure dimensionings are
possible:
4. Dimension Text
#DIM()
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator

1:170
12 Series

5. Parameters

dimensioning, like
Distance text-line
Reference line gap
Shrink
Rotate
No adjust
Options:
None.
Result:

1:171
12 Series

AXIS PARALLEL
Purpose:
This function calculates the distances between two 3D points,

along each cardinal axis and generates the complete
dimensioning component automatically.
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Axis Parallel.

parameters is displayed.
Changes here can be done before first 3D point is given.
The user is requested to define two 3D points in an arbitrary
view. Using these points it is possible to create up to three
(depending on the view) linear measures, each along one of the
cardinal axes.
Next, the user is requested to locate the dimension line in the
currently proposed direction. A dialog controlling what direction
to measure along, together with direction and base of witness
lines, is displayed. The user may change these controls if
desired. Once positioned, the system repeats this request for the
two remaining measure directions. Note that the system will skip
measure directions perpendicular to the selected view, and also
measure directions yielding a zero distance.
During location of the dimension line, it is possible to change the
Once all possible (and wanted) dimensions have been
positioned, the user is requested to start all over by giving two
new 3D points or quit the function. To remove the last created

1:172
12 Series

1. Tolerance
below.
2. Include
Four different layouts are possible:
4. Dimension Text
#DIM()
~D
Diameter symbol
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator

1:173
12 Series

5. Parameters

dimensioning, like

Distance text-line
Reference line gap
Shrink
Rotate
No adjust
1:174
12 Series

1. Measure Along
Shows along which cardinal direction the current dimensioning
will be measured. Note that the system will accept neither a
direction perpendicular to the selected view, nor a direction
yielding a zero distance.
2. Witness Along
Shows along which cardinal direction the witness lines will be
presented. For each measure along direction, there are two
possible witness line directions.
3. Witness Base
Shows the base point for the witness lines. One of the witness
lines will aim directly at the selected base point while the other
will aim at projection of the non-base point.
4. Add Help Ref Lines
If checked, additional reference lines will be drawn from the nonbase point along one or two cardinal axes to meet its
corresponding witness line.
Options:
None.
Result:

1:175
12 Series

COORDINATE
Purpose:
This function retrieves the x-, y- and z- components of a 3D point

in the current drawing and generates the complete Dimensioning
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click 3D, then Coordinate.

The user is requested to give the 3D Point to present. The
dimensioning will by default be presented in the model view
derived from 3D point definition (e.g. if the 3D point is defined as
an event point, the model view in which the point is indicated is
chosen). The resulting dimensioning component is then dragged
into desired position in the drawing. The action when clicking
Options here depends on the number of model views in the
drawing: If there only is one view, the user can change text
properties and rotation directly. If there is more than one model
view the user can change the default view in which the
dimensioning will be presented by indicating that model view.
Another click on Options here lets the user change text
properties and rotation.
3D point is given.

1:176
12 Series

1. Dimension Text
These three fields control, for each axis, the format of the
resulting dimension text. Each one is built up by intelligent
markers and optionally string constants.
By clicking the Reset button, the contents of the specific field is
reset to system default (the coordinate value prefixed by
<X|Y|Z>= is presented).
#DIM()
The value of the coordinate
Note: The fields is normally not edited by user. However,
2. Translation
These check buttons control, for each axis, if the coordinate
should be translated using GENTAB (references to frames and
longitudinal positions) or not. Initial check status is fetched from
the default keywords DIM_COORD<X|Y|Z>_TRANSLATION.
3. Additional Text
Optionally, a line of Additional Text may be included in the
resulting dimension text, below the coordinate values. The
Include check button controls this.
Options:
None.
Result:

text inside a box and a reference line to the measured point in
the model view, is added to the drawing.

1:177
12 Series

CURVE LENGTH
Purpose:
This function calculates the length of a 3D curve (curved panel/

plate boundary) in the current drawing and generates the
complete Dimensioning component automatically.
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Curve Length.

The User must select curved panel/plate boundary in the model
view and locate the dimension line moving with the cursor. When
the location of the dimension line is chosen, click to position.
Second click defines location of the measure text.
Before defining the dimension line location, Options can select
two event points belonging to the selected plate boundary.
Before defining the measure text location, Options can change
height and rotation of the text.
Options:
None
Result:

text and a reference line to the measured boundary, is added to
the drawing.
WEIGHT AND COG
Purpose:
This function calculates the weight and centre of gravity for a

collection of models and generates the complete dimensioning
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Weight and COG.

The models to participate in the calculation are collected in
interaction with the User. In conjunction with the first indication,
the user must choose the desired level of collecting, i.e. whether
only the indicated or all models in the view should be collected.
This level will be modal in subsequent indications. Click Option
to return to level selection. The collection is completed by
Operation Complete.
To remove a previously
Edit>Delete>Last Entity.

1:178
created
dimensioning,
click
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:

text inside a box and a reference line to the measured point
(COG) are added to the drawing.
Important: The Weight and COG dimension is based on models
collected from the drawing (and not from primary
source in Dabacon PADD view). In case models are
collected on view level, there is a potential risk that
not all models are included. This could be the case if
the view initially has been created with Global or
Universal Hidden Line, or if the drawing has been
created in releases before 12.0 SP6.15. A warning
will be issued in this case. To avoid this warning,
please change the view properties to Wireline and
do an Update Design before calculating the WCOG.
If You still get a warning it is recommended to create
a new view if you want to use the Weight and COG
dimension.

1:179
12 Series

SHELL PROFILE MOUNTING ANGLE

Purpose:
This function is used to guide the mounting angle of shell profile

webs, crossing the seam between two adjacent sections, during
the assembly phase. The function calculates this 'mounting'
angle between a shell profile web and a section seam, in the
seam plane, and generates the complete dimensioning
As described above, only seams defined as the intersection
between the surface and a plane can be used.
The side of the shell profile web to calculate the angle is
controlled
by
the
Drafting
default
keyword
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF_SIDE.
The length of the seam leg, i.e. the leg simulating the seam side
is
controlled
by
the
Drafting
default
keyword
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF.LEG..
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Shell Profile Mounting

Angle.
The user indicates the section seam/shell curve and shell profile.
Once indicated, the seam/curve will be valid until this function is
left, or the user rejects the indication of a shell profile. Using the
seam/curve indication, the view to present the dimensioning in,
will be defined. The section seam/shell curve and the shell profile
will together define the angle vertex and the two angle legs. The
shell profile leg is defined as the intersection between the plane
of the section seam and the shell profile web. The vertex is
defined as the intersection between the section seam and the
mould line of the profile.
The dimension arc will be presented in the view defined by the
shell profile indication and is located by a user-defined point
through which the dimension arc should pass, Once the
dimension arc is located, the User drags the text denoting the
measured angle into desired location. By clicking Options here,
the text attributes like height, font, aspect etc can be changed.
Note that the change of text height will be modal while change of
other attributes only will apply on this dimensioning. Changing
text attributes other than the height permanently is done by
updating
the
corresponding
default
keywords
via
Format>Defaults. If the text is placed outside the sector (and
the smallest angle is presented, see below) the arrows will flip
180 degrees and the dimension arc will be somewhat extended
(useful when sectors are narrow).
section seam/shell curve is given.

1:180
12 Series

1. Text Orientation
The Text Orientation group shows the orientation of the
dimension text:
Horizontal
Vertical
Tangential
If Tangential orientation is selected, the text will be rotated to

align with the dimension arc at the point on this arc closest to the
text when positioned. Initially, the text is aligned to the middle of
the dimension arc.
2. Tolerance
below.
3. Include
Value - the measured angle
Unit - the unit of the angle (degree symbol)

1:181
12 Series

4. Range
Given the two leg lines, two different angles can be presented:
Smallest - the indicated sector will be measured (up to 180

degrees)
Biggest - the indicated plus the two adjacent sectors will be

measured (up to 360 degrees)
5. Dimension Text
system default (only the measured angle plus unit is presented).
#DIM()
The measured angle
~0
Unit symbol (degree)
~+<symmetric value>
Symmetric tolerance
#/
New-line separator
6. Parameters
Number of decimal positions in the measured angle.
Type and size of arrowhead at the ends of dimension arc.
Reference line gap and excess.
Options:
None.
Result:

arc, the measure text and the reference lines are added to the
drawing.

1:182
12 Series

Purpose:
This function calculates the distance from an arbitrary point to a

principal plane, i.e. a plane perpendicular to any of the cardinal
axis. Special cases of such principal plane are the base line,
centre line or aft perpendicular plane, where the 'depth' of the
plane is implicitly predefined.
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and

Leader.
First, the user selects the Principal Plane from a simple dialog
with the following alternatives:
YZ plane through a given x-coordinate
XZ plane through a given y-coordinate
XY plane through a given z-coordinate
Base line plane - BL
Centre line plane - CL
Aft perpendicular plane - APP
In the general case, the coordinate defining the depth of the

plane is required. The depth is then supplied from keyboard.
Clicking Options here, the depth can be indicated in the
drawing.
Next, the point to measure the distance from is given, in a view
perpendicular to the principle plane. This means that it is enough
to define a 2D point in such a view. During the definition of the 2D
point, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed, see below. Changes here can be done
before the 2D point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is located in the view. Here, it
is possible to change the dimensioning parameters (text height
etc) by clicking Options and thus entering the Advanced
function, see below.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance along a
dimension line denoting the direction of the measure (parallel to
the normal of the principle plane) plus a reference line denoting
the 2D point. The user is now requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To select another principal
plane, click Cancel. To remove the last created dimensioning,
click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

1:183
12 Series

1. Dimension Text
built up by intelligent markers and optionally string constants. By
clicking the Reset button, the contents of the field is reset to
#DIM()
#/
New-line separator
Note: The fields are normally not edited by the user. However,
2. Plane Reference Text
Optionally, a string denoting the principal plane may be included
in the resulting dimension text, appended to the measured
distance. The Include check button controls this. For BL, CL
and APP these Plane Reference Texts are part of the Drafting
Default Keywords.
3. Parameters

Type and size of arrowhead at the end of the dimension line.

dimensioning, like
Distance text-line
Reference line gap
1:184
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
The distance to chosen principal plane is presented in the model

view as is defined by the User.

1:185
12 Series

DISTANCE TO RSO

1:186
12 Series


1:187
12 Series

Purpose:
This function calculates the distance from a selected model to

the closest RSO along one of X-, Y- or Z-axis. It also creates a
dimensioning component to display the resulting value. The
function will measure from the point on the model given by the
POS attribute. If no RSO is found you will get the measure to the
closest frame or LP-plane. (The RSO does not have to be in the
drawing, the system will search in the database).
Note that some activities need to be completed to make this
work as expected. The RSDIM attribute of the RSOs needs to
be set so that it is possible to measure to. Also, the Ship
Coordinate Option must be activated using the command
SHIPCO ON in the Command Window. For more information
refer to User Guide Marine Customisation / Customising
Presentation of Ship Coordinates.

1:188
12 Series

Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to RSO.

Initially the Distance to RSO dialog is shown. Here you can
select along which axis you want to measure (X, Y or Z):
The dimension text can be customised by clicking one of the

Format radio buttons.
Now select which model to measure from. The distance will be
from the POS attribute of this model.
Finally place the dimension in the drawing. The placement of the
dimension text will either be on the same or on the opposite side
of the arrow. This depends on which side of the model (or more
specific on which side of the point given by the POS attribute) is
indicated.
In case the distance should be represented in a box like a label
and not as a dimension, this is easily achieved with the function
Annotate Label. Use the attributes SHIPX, SHIPY and
SHIPZ for the distance along the X-, Y- and Z-axis respectively.
Options:
None
Result:
A new dimension component is created that will show the

distance to the closest RSO.

1:189
12 Series

DISTANCE TO PLANE
LEADER
Purpose:

axis. Special cases of such principal plane are the base line,
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and

Leader.

drawing.
Next, the point to measure the distance from is given, in a view
perpendicular to the principle plane. This means that it is enough
to define a 2D point in such a view. During the definition of the 2D
point, a dialog showing current dimension controls and
parameters is displayed, see below. Changes here can be done
before the 2D point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is located in the view. Here, it
is possible to change the dimensioning parameters (text height
etc) by clicking Options and thus entering the Advanced
function, see below.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance along a
dimension line denoting the direction of the measure (parallel to
the normal of the principle plane) plus a reference line denoting
the 2D point. The user is now requested to create another
dimensioning or quit the function. To select another principal
plane, click Cancel. To remove the last created dimensioning,
click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

1:190
12 Series

1. Dimension Text
#DIM()
#/
New-line separator
Note: The fields are normally not edited by the user. However,
Default Keywords.
3. Parameters


dimensioning, like
Distance text-line
Reference line gap
1:191
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:

view as is defined by the User.
Purpose:

axis. Special cases of such a principal plane are the base line,
Instructions:
In Dimension menu, click 3D, then Distance to plane and Box.
BOX

drawing.
Next, the 3D point to measure the distance from is defined by
user in any model view. During the definition of the 3D point, a
dialog showing current dimension controls and parameters is
displayed, see below. Changes here can be done before the 3D
point is given.
Finally, the resulting dimensioning is dragged into desired
position in the drawing. Here, it is possible to change the
dimensioning parameters (text properties and rotation) by
clicking Options.
The dimensioning consists of the measured distance inside a
box with a leader referring to the 3D point. The user is now
requested to create another dimensioning or quit the function. To
select another principal plane, click Cancel. To remove the last
created dimensioning, click Edit/Delete Last Entity.

1:192
12 Series

1. Dimension Text
system default (the measured distance prefixed by "H=" is
presented).
#DIM()
#/
New-line separator
The fields is normally not edited by user. However, arbitrary text
may be inserted at any position in between the intelligent
markers.
Default Keywords.
3. Parameters
Options:
None.
Result:

view as defined by the User.

1:193
12 Series

ANNOTATE
Purpose:
To enable the User to add various notes in the current drawing.
Instructions:
Click any type of notes in the Annotate menu to add note in the
drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
Chosen note is added to the drawing as is defined by the User.
GENERAL NOTE
Purpose:
To directly annotate components within a drawing.
Instructions:
In Annotate menu, click General Note.

The first step is defining of text. There are two cases. If the text
exists, it can be selected on the screen. If not, the User has to
click Operation complete and then key in new text. After OK the
system message is: 'Start of reference line: Indicate contour or
symbol'. When the reference line is defined, the function can be
finished by Operation complete. The system will align the note
with the last element of the reference line.
Options:
Some additional operations can be performed in this function by

Options.
Click Options immediately after invoking the function. The
system presents the next operations:
1. Suppress Note symbol - hides Note symbol
2. Change Note symbol - can be chosen from list of symbols
17. Change reference symbol - can be chosen from list of
symbols
4. Fetch Model information - After indicating of model
component the desired type of model information can be
selected from list.
5. Fetch Name - After indicating of model component the system
fetches the name of the model component.
Result:

An annotation note can be suitable positioned and connected via

a reference line to a geometric entity in the display and in the
drawing file.
1:194
12 Series

POSITION NUMBER
Purpose:
To enable a User to add position numbers, to represent, for

example, component numbers within an assembly, to geometric
components in drawings.
Instructions:
In the Dimension menu, click Position Number.

The process has five basic steps, namely to select a suitable
'position number' symbol, to select a suitable reference symbol,
to position the reference symbol on or over the geometric entity,
input the component number/text, and then to position the
attachment line. This sequence of selection and input must be
followed.
The system displays a multiple choice dialog box. If the default
position number symbol, that is a simple circle, is not suitable
then select option 2 in the dialog box. This opens a simple
'graphic' dialog box containing 8 alternative symbols and from
which the User can cursor select the required one and then click
the OK button, returning the display back to the 'multiple choice'
dialog box.
If the default reference symbol is not suitable then select option 3
in the dialog box. This opens a simple graphic dialog box
containing 7 alternative symbols and from which the User can
cursor select the required one and then click the OK button,
returning the display back to the multiple choice dialog box.

1:195
12 Series

Select option 0 and then the Operation Complete icon. This

opens a dialog box in which the User can enter a simple text
string that is the component position number and when complete
this is to be followed by clicking the OK button. The display then
returns to the geometry.
Position the cursor on or close to the relevant geometric entity, at
an appropriate location, and click the Left-hand button once.
This establishes the location of the 'reference' symbol. Move the
cursor to a required point on the screen, using the temporarily
displayed attachment line for reference, and again click the lefthand button. The cursor can be moved to a second or even third
location, using the temporarily displayed reference line for
guidance and again clicking the button at each locating point.
This establishes the location of the position number symbol.
Then cursor select the 'operation complete 'icon.
The system will then reopen the dialog in which a new position
number can be input, assuming that the same reference and
'position number' symbols are still valid. If there is no
requirement for another position number annotation simply click
OK, otherwise repeat the above actions. Then cursor select the
'operation complete' icon followed by the Repaint icon.
The position number enclosed in the select symbol will then
appear in the display connected by a line or set of straight lines
to the 'reference symbol.
It is to be noted that the User cannot return to the multiple choice
input dialog in order to change an established position number
annotation, for example to change a number or a symbol. The
User will need to first delete and then redefine the annotation.
Options:
There are no other options in addition to those that are described

above.
Result:
Position Number annotations, e.g. balloon references, are added

to the display and the drawing file.
CONFIG NOTE
Purpose:
To enable the User to add and move configured notes to model

parts in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Annotation menu, click Config note, followed by the

wanted subfunction.
Options:
None.
Result:
Configured notes are added or moved in the current drawing.

1:196
12 Series

CONFIG SET
Purpose:
This function allows the User to configure notes before adding to

the drawing. Here 'configure' means choice of note type
depending on the model part.
Instructions:
In the Annotation menu, click Config note, then Config set.

This invokes dialog window Customized Note with list of notes:
Plate note
Profile note
Bracket standard note
Bracket instance note
Bracket profile note.
Click the desired item from the list, then OK. The window closes
and you can select component within a model view. When the
system recognizes the component, you can position the note and
add to the drawing by Operation complete.
When the system prompts to indicate component, click
Operation complete. Configurable note window appears.
There are three alternatives:
1. Single item. Single items can be annotated one by one.
2. Automatic in subview. All items in the indicated subview will
be annotated automatically.
18. Automatic in view. All items in the indicated view will be
annotated automatically.
4. Reference line OFF (on). It can be used in combination with
the options Automatic in subview and Automatic in view. When
the user sets the options to Reference line OFF (on). the other 2
options add a note without any reference line. When the user
sets the options to Reference line ON (off), notes with reference
lines will be added to the drawing. The reference lines will
consist of 2 line segments.
The configured notes can be customized through Vitesse scripts.
Options:
None.
Result:
Configured notes are added to the current drawing.
CONFIG MOVE
Purpose:
To move a configured note.
Instructions:
Indicate the note to be moved. Move it to desired position.

1:197
12 Series

Options:
Selecting option when indicating note to be moved gives the

possibility to create a reference line. This is only possible if the
note does not already have a reference line. Indicate the note,
create the reference line by indicating points in drawing and
clicking OC.
Result:
The configured note is moved or a reference line is added to a

note.
HULL NOTE
Purpose:
To enable the User to add Position number, Assembly, Bevel,

Grinding or Hole Dimension note to hull model parts.
Instructions:
In Annotate menu, click Hull Note then one of the following: Pos
No, Assembly, Bevel, Grinding, Hole Dimension to add the
corresponding note.
Options:
None.
Result:
Chosen notes are added to the selected hull model parts.
Purpose:
To enable the User to add position numbers to hull parts in the

current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Pos No.
POS NO
In the first dialog window the User has to select hull model part:
1. Profile
2. Bracket
19. Clip
4. Plane plate
5. Intersect plate
6. Doubling plate
The next step indicates the model part that is selected in the
dialog window and positions the reference line on the screen.
Operation Complete finishes the function with presenting the
position number on the screen.
When the User chooses the hull part to annotate, a dialog for
tuning the appearance of the position numbers can be invoked
by Options. Here the User can select in simple table the
information that will be added and symbol for the position
number.

1:198
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
Position numbers are added to the selected model parts as

defined by the User.
ASSEMBLY
Purpose:
To enable the User to add assembly name to hull parts in the

current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Assembly.

In the first dialog window, the User has to select hull model part:
1. Profile
2. Bracket
20. Plane plate
4. Intersect plate
5. Any
The next step is indicating the model part that is selected in the
dialog window and positioning the reference line on the screen.
Operation complete finishes the function with presenting the
name of assembly that the hull model part belongs to.
Options:
When the User chooses the hull part to annotate, a dialog for
choosing the assembly level can be invoked by Options.
Result:
Notes with assembly names are added to the selected hull model
parts as defined by the User.

1:199
12 Series

BEVEL
Purpose:
To enable the User to add note with bevel information to the

selected hull model part.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Hull Note, then Bevel.

In the first dialog window, the User has to select edge of hull
model part:
1. Plate edge
2. Profile edge
21. Bracket edge
4. Clip
5. Doubling edge
The next step is indicating the seam and positioning the
reference line on the screen. Operation Complete finishes the
function with presenting bevel note on the screen.
Options:
None.
Result:
Notes with bevel information are added to the selected hull

model parts.
Purpose:
To enable the User to create symbols for grinding hull holes.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Hull note, then Grinding.
GRINDING
If grinding is defined, the system prompts for a hole indication

and placing the grinding symbol. If grinding is not defined, the
system gives message: 'No grinding defined'.
The colour and height of the symbol can be changed through
variables in Drafting default file.
Options:
None.
Result:
Symbol for grinding is added to the selected hole.

1:200
12 Series

HOLE DIMENSION
Purpose:
To enable the user to add hole dimensions to holes defined in

Panels. The notes are associative when used in Hull Views and
will be updated when a View is Recreated.
Instructions:
A hole is indicated and the corresponding hole designation and

dimension is automatically fetched from the model. Clicking
Operation Complete will add the note inside the hole. Adding a
reference line will add the note on the defined Line.
If placing the note with reference lines, the designation and
dimension will be presented. If placing the note inside the hole
and Hole is of type HO or HE, then only the dimension will be
presented.
Options:
The text height is controlled using the Option button. Default text
height is defined using the Drafting default POS_TXT_MINH.
A created note can be deleted by clicking Edit>Delete>Last
Entity.
Result:

The notes will be created as specified above.
1:201
12 Series

LABEL

1:202
12 Series

Purpose:
To create a Label annotation in the current drawing.

The Label is used to annotate information derived from a model
p-point in the current drawing. It consists of a text or symbol, with
a leader line connected to it and referring to the specific P-point.
The Label is structurally contained within a component of its own,
with a system-unique layer (-11).
Both the colour and the layer on geometry level of the Label are
controlled by the modal properties of the General Note, The Line
type is set to Solid.

1:203
12 Series

Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Label.

The Create Label form is displayed.
You can choose the type of label: General or Symbolic. General

Label presents the intelligent text. Symbolic Label is generated
from template (SYTM).
The intelligent text or template name is keyed in on the form.
Optionally there are two selection buttons:
Indicate already created label on drawing and copy text or
symbol template name from that label.
Select intelligent text or symbol from predefined list.
To include intelligent text, click the button, the Intelligent Text
form is displayed:

1:204
12 Series

When the Symbolic type of label is chosen, the Symbol Library

form is displayed.
The label is placed on the drawing in the following steps:
First the desired p-point in the drawing is indicated.
Next, the position where to place the label.
Optionally start point of the leader line can be selected, if it
should be different to the previously given P-point.
The Start of Leader Line form is displayed when placing the
label.
The options depend on what type of point was selected in the

first step. If this was a point on a p-line: you can either select any
geometrical point in the drawing (Another point) or give a relative
distance between the start and the end point of the p-line
(Relative distance along P-line). If the point given in the first step
is a p-point the only additional option is a geometrical point.
Please note that if the label starts in a geometrical point the
association to the model will be lost. That means that if the model
is moved the label will not follow.
When the label is positioned in the drawing by the user, clicking
the Options command lets the user change the properties of the
text.
To remove a previously created label, select Edit/Delete/Last
Entity.

1:205
12 Series

Options:
Options tab.
Leader line shape

The shape of the leader line.
Straight
Free bend point

A free point in the drawing is given by the user
Free angle/Horizontal
The angle of the first part of the line is defined by the user,
the second part is horizontal
Free angle/Vertical
The angle of the first part of the line is defined by the user,
the second part is vertical
Horizontal/ Free angle

The angle of the second part of the line is defined by the
user, the first part is horizontal
Vertical/ Free angle

The angle of the second part of the line is defined by the
user, the first part is vertical
Disabled (not shown)
The bend angle defines the slope (degrees) of the Free angle
part of the leader line. Valid when using leader line shape with
Free angle option.
Leader line terminator
The type of terminator attached to the leader line.

Disabled (none)
Open arrow
Narrow dart
Wide dart
Slash
Open dot
Arrow
Dot
1:206
12 Series

The size field defines size of selected terminator.

Frame
Displays rectangular frame around label text. The margin defines
distance between displayed text and surrounding box.
Blanking
Defines if label shape should blank out parts of the drawing
behind the label. The margin defines offset that increases area
blanked out by label shape.
Defaults:
Default values displayed in the dialog can be configured in the

Drafting Default file.
For a list of all keywords used in the Drafting Default file, see
Drafting Default File Keywords in Chapter Appendices.
The Intelligent Text definitions are read from text file assigned to
the logical variable SBD_LABEL_TEXT_DEFINITIONS.
Result:
Labels will be created in the current drawing, according to the

users actions.
AUTOTAGGING
Autotagging in Marine Drafting is available through the graphical user interface found in
Annotate > Autotagging. The functionality will build up the hierarchy needed for the
view and allows you to create local tagging or library tagging. For more information
about autotagging refer to User Guide / Outfitting Draft / Labelling / Autotagging.

1:207
12 Series

MARKUP
Purpose:
To create a Markup annotation in the current drawing.

The Markup is used to make the user pay specific attention to a
part of the drawing. It consists of a text enclosed by "cloud"-like
contour, together with a number of reference lines. Each
reference line starts from the edge of the cloud contour and aims
at certain position in the drawing.
The Markup is structurally contained within a component of it's
own, with a system-unique layer (-9).
The colour and line type of the markup is controlled by the
Default
Keyword
MARKUP_COLOUR
and
MARKUP_LINETYPE.
The reference symbol (arrow) at the end of each reference line is
fetched from the symbol font 21 with the symbol number
controlled by the default keyword MARKUP_REF_SYMB_NO.
The height of the reference symbol is controlled by the default
keyword MARKUP_REF_SYMB_HEIGHT.
Instructions:
In the Annotation menu, click Markup.

First, the text is keyed in, using a simple editor dialog.
Next, the text is dragged into desired position in the drawing. By
clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to change some
characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline space and
font) of the resulting text.
When the text has been positioned, a cloud like contour,
enclosing the text, is automatically created.
See documentation about the CLO component for more details.
Finally, a arbitrary number of reference lines can be attached to
the markup. The aiming position for each reference line is then
given by user. The definition of reference lines is completed by
Options:
None.
Result:
Markups will be created in the current drawing, according to

User's action.

1:208
12 Series

RULER
Purpose:
To create a ruler in the current drawing.

The ruler consists of a ruler line, ticks along the line and tick
labels every 5:th tick.
Instructions:
In the Insert menu, click Ruler.

The starting position of the ruler line is defined by user. By
clicking Options here, it is possible to change some
characteristics (height, aspect and slant) of the resulting tick
labels. To remove a previously created ruler, select
Edit>Delete>Last Entity at this stage.
Next, the minimum and maximum tick values are supplied by
user. Only integer values are accepted.
Finally, the tick unit (distance between two adjacent ticks) is
keyed in by user.
The resulting ruler will start in the given position, grow
horizontally to the right from the minimum to the maximum tick
value. The first and every 5:th tick will be labelled according to
it's value. The total length of the ruler will then be the tick
distance multiplied with the difference between the maximum
and the minimum tick values.
Options:
None.
Result:
A ruler will be created in the current drawing, according to User's

action.

1:209
12 Series

POSITION RULER

1:210
12 Series

Purpose:
This function creates different kinds of rulers in model views and

generates the complete dimensioning components automatically.
The following types of rulers can be created:
Base Line (BL)
Centre Line (CL)
Frame Ruler (FR)
Longitudinal Horizontal Ruler (LH)
Longitudinal Vertical Ruler (LV)
Note that BL and CL are simply the lines of intersection between

the Base/Centre plane and the view plane. Nevertheless, BL and
CL will be referred to as rulers in the following.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Position Ruler.

The model view, the type of ruler to create, the location of the
ruler (not BL/CL) and trimming of the ruler is defined by User, in
that order.
Indicating the Model View:
The model view in which to define the ruler is indicated by User.
Normally, the view plane has to be one of the principal planes,
i.e. perpendicular to any of the cardinal axis; otherwise no ruler
can be presented ambiguously. The exception is when the depth
of the view plane is defined, as in Hull Views; here any
orientation of the view plane will do.
To remove a previously
Edit>Delete>Last Entity.
created
dimensioning,
click
Selecting the type of Ruler:

Once the model view has been defined, the specific ruler to
create in this view is selected from a dialog box. Note that only
those rulers that can be presented ambiguously in the view are
selectable.
Location of the Ruler:
The system prompt is: Locate ruler (OC for positioning in BL/CL).
A skeleton of the ruler is dragged (in direction perpendicular to
the 'ruler' plane) into desired position by User. Note that BL/CL
by definition has a fixed position in the view.
The Frame Ruler is available also in a Body Plan View, however
location is defined differently to other view types. The User is
prompted to define a polyline that intersects the x-curves in the
view. A frame annotation will be added at each intersection.
Trimming the Ruler:
Once located, it is possible to adjust the length of the ruler. This
is done by shortening or extending the ends of the ruler. When
ready, click Operation Complete.

1:211
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
A 3D Position ruler will be created in the current drawing,

according to User's action.
COORDINATE AXIS
Purpose:
To create coordinate axis for a model view. The coordinate axis

is a sub-picture of its own and consists of the vectors along the
principal axis in positive direction with an arrow at the end and a
text string describing the axis.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Coordinate Axis. Indicate the

Model View for which the coordinate axis should be calculated.
After indication the axis is presented in refresh colour to be
placed by the user.
Options:
None.
Result:
The coordinate axis representation will be created in the current

drawing, according to the User's action.
PIPE RESTRICTION SYMBOL
Purpose:
The Pipe Restriction symbol is used to visualise a restriction in

the display of a pipe. Imagine a straight end cut of a pipe in the
drawing: the restriction symbol will then be placed between the
end points of the two lines.
Instructions:
In the Annotate menu, click Pipe Restriction Symbol.

First, the starting position of the symbol is defined by user (as a
node point). To remove a previously created symbol, select
Secondly, the ending position of the symbol is given (also as a
node point).
Options:
None.
Result:
Pipe restriction symbols will be created in the current drawing,


1:212
12 Series

GENERAL RESTRICION SYMBOL
Purpose:
The Restriction symbol is used to visualise a restriction in the

display of some general geometric entity. The restriction symbol
is created automatically as a contour between two user-defined
positions in the drawing.
Instructions:
First, the starting position of the contour is defined by user (as a

node point). To remove a previously created symbol, select
Secondly, the ending position of the contour is given (also as a
node point).
Now, the resulting contour, built up by a "random" polygon, is
proposed and the user is asked to confirm it. If not accepted, a
spline contour passing through the same nodes as the polygon is
proposed instead and the user is asked to confirm this one.
Options:
None.
Result:
A general restriction component will be created in the current

drawing, according to User's action.
Purpose:
The Cross symbol is used to visualise an area of information in

the drawing. It consists of two diagonal lines with a descriptive
text positioned in the diagonal intersection.
Instructions:
The start and end positions of first diagonal line is defined by

user. To remove a previously created symbol, select
CROSS
Next, the start and end positions of second diagonal line is

defined by user. Here, clicking Operation Complete means
automatic adjustment of the second diagonal line:
if clicked when defining the start position, the second

diagonal is automatically defined to make the resulting
cross rectangular.
if clicked when defining the end position, this position will

automatically be defined to make the resting cross semirectangular.
Finally, the descriptive text is keyed in by user. By clicking

Options here, it is possible to change some characteristics
(height, rotation, aspect, slant, interline space and font) of the
resulting text.

1:213
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
A cross component will be created in the current drawing,

Purpose:
The Cloud primitive is used to make the user pay attention to an

updated part of the drawing. It consists of a closed contour
making up a "cloud"-like shape.
Instructions:
The cloud contour is defined by a user-given closed control

polygon. Along this polygon, a number of consecutive bulges will
be derived, making up the resulting cloud contour. The number of
bulges along each side is controlled by the Default Keyword
CLOUD_BULGE_MAX. Furthermore, the colour and line type of
the cloud is controlled by the default keywords
CLOUD_COLOUR and CLOUD_LINETYPE.
CLOUD
The vertices of the control polygon is given by user, one by one,

and completed by clicking Operation Complete. The polygon
will then automatically be closed by the system. A special case of
the polygon is the axis-parallel rectangle, defined by two
opposite corners. Click Options before giving the first vertex/
corner to toggle between these two ways of defining the polygon.
To remove a previously created cloud, select Edit>Delete>Last
Entity at this stage.
Once the control polygon has been defined, the resulting cloud
contour is automatically created. The number of bulges along the
longest side of the polygon is controlled by the default keyword
CLOUD_BULGE_MAX. The number of bulges along any other
side of the polygon will then be relative to the length of that side,
compared to the length of the longest side.
Finally, 'corner' bulges (i.e. bulges between adjacent polygon
sides) will join 'side' bulge sections (i.e. bulges along a specific
polygon side) into a continuous and closed contour.
It should be mentioned here that the bulge points, i.e. the points
joining adjacent bulges, will be based on a uniform distribution
along each polygon side with a slight random deviation.
Options:
None.
Result:
A general cloud component will be created in the current

drawing, according to User's action.
remove a previously created cloud, select Edit>Delete>Last
Entity at this stage.

1:214
12 Series

MODIFY
MOVE
TEXT
Purpose:
To move a text in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Move, then Text.

First, the text to move is indicated by the user.
Next, the text is dragged into desired position in the drawing. By
clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
change some characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant

and font) of the text.
define a lock position in u- or v-direction, by indicating

another text as lock reference.
toggle the auto text positioning status, see Automatic

Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for details.
Once positioned, the system prompts for another text to move.

The interaction is interrupted by clicking Operation Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated texts are moved within the current drawing.
Purpose:
To move a symbol in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Move, then Symbol.
SYMBOL
First, the symbol to move is indicated by the user.

Next, the symbol is dragged into desired position in the drawing.
By clicking Options at this stage, it is possible to
change some characteristics (height and rotation) of the

symbol.
mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction
toggle the "auto symbol positioning" status, see Automatic

Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, the system prompts for another symbol to

move. The interaction is interrupted by clicking Operation
Complete.

1:215
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated symbols are moved within the current drawing.
REFERENCE
Purpose:
To move text within certain system components in the current

drawing.
Example of such system components are:
Instructions:
Notes,
Position numbers,
Radius measurements, both straight and knuckled,
Diameter measurements, both straight and knuckled,
3D coordinate measurements, and
3D weight and Centre of Gravity measurements.
In the Modify menu, click Move, then Reference.

First, the system component is indicated by the user.
Next, the text within the system component is dragged into
desired new position in the drawing. Once positioned, the
associated reference lines will be adjusted to match the new
position of the text.
Options:
None.
Result:
References within certain system components are moved in the

current drawing.

1:216
12 Series

COPY
TEXT
Purpose:
To produce copies of a text in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Copy, then Text.

First, the text to copy is indicated by the user.
Next, a copy of the text is dragged into desired position in the
change some characteristics (height, rotation, aspect, slant

and font) of the resulting text.
define a lock position in u- or v-direction, by indicating

another text as lock reference.
toggle the "auto text positioning" status, Automatic

Positioning of a Text in Chapter Model Viewing and General
Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the selected text can be

positioned repeatedly, until the user interrupts by clicking
Operation Complete. The system will then prompt for another
text to copy The interaction is finished by Operation Complete.
Options:
When the system prompts for the text to copy, click Options for
an alternative way to define the source text. It will then be
possible to fetch the text from some general model information or
from a subpicture name.
Result:
User-indicated texts are copied within the current drawing.

1:217
12 Series

SYMBOL
Purpose:
To produce copies of a symbol in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Copy, then Symbol.

First, the symbol to copy is indicated by the user.
Next, a copy of the symbol is dragged into desired position in the
change some characteristics (height and rotation) of the

symbol.
mirror the symbol in u- or v-direction
toggle the auto symbol positioning status, Automatic

Positioning of a Symbol in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details.
Once positioned, new copies of the selected symbol can be

positioned repeatedly, until the user interrupts by clicking
Operation Complete. The system will then prompt for another
symbol to copy. The interaction is finished by Operation
Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated symbols are copied within the current drawing.
GEOMETRY
Purpose:
To produce copies of a general geometric entity in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In Modify menu, click Copy, then Geometry.

The basic interaction and options are the same as in the Modify
/ Transform / GEO function, refer to the documentation of this
function. Perform Transformation in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details about how to transform.
Additionally, a simple dialog appears in which the user is
prompted to key in the number of copies to produce. OK without
any number given will be interpreted as one copy and the
transformation of the geometric entity is started in "dynamic
move". If a number is explicitly given, the transformation is
started by prompting the user to chose a transformation activity.
When the transformation is completed (by clicking Operation
Complete), the system responds by creating additional copies,
in case the User specified that more than one copy was required.
All additional copies are transformed according to the user-given
transformation, applied on a copy of the previous produced copy.

1:218
12 Series

Options:
It is possible to copy all geometric entities inside a user-defined

region, Capture in Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting
for details. To enter this option, click Options twice when the
system prompts for the geometry to copy.
Result:
User-indicated geometric entities are copied within the current

drawing.
SUBPICTURE
Purpose:
To enable a User to copy an existing sub-picture within a drawing

to other locations within the drawing.
Instructions:
The user can select a sub-picture either by identifying the

subpicture by a left click or selecting the Options button. In the
latter case the system responds with a dialog box in which the
user is required to enter the name of the sub-picture that is to be
copied. The named sub-picture must already exist within the
currently opened and displayed drawing.
The system responds by drawing a rectangular box around the
sub-picture having the name that was input and requests the
User to confirm that the selection is OK. The system then
presents a simple table in which the User is to enter the number
of equally spaced copies that are to be made.
With the cursor locate the position of the first copy by clicking the
left-hand button once to make the copy appear and then drag the
copy to the required position and then fix it there with a further
single click of the left-hand button.
Cursor-select the 'operation complete' icon. The system
responds by creating the additional copies, if the User has
specified that more than one copy was required. Any additional
copies are placed at equal distances apart, equal that is to the
distance from the original to the first copy, and along the line
projected between the original and the first copy. The User will
need to repeat the use of this overall function if non-uniform
spacing is required.
Options:
There are no other options within this process.
Result:
Copies of sub-pictures are created within the display at the

selected and controlled positions, in addition to the original subpicture, and stored within the associated drawing file.

1:219
12 Series

TRANSFORM
GEOMETRY
Purpose:
To transform geometric elements, including text and symbols, in

Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Transform, then Geometry.

First, the geometry to transform is indicated by the user
The process automatically starts in the free-hand translation
mode. For further details, Perform Transformation in Chapter
The Transformation tool bar offers several options, namely:
1. Scale
2. Move delta
3. Move two positions
4. Rotate delta
5. Rotate two positions
6. Rotate 45 degrees
9. Rotate - 90 degrees
10. Mirror about screen U
11. Mirror about screen V
12. Mirror line
13. Parallel
14. Four positions
15. 'Same as'
16. Along curve
17. Lock U
18. Lock V
19. Centre
20. Form detection
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated geometric entities are transformed within the

current drawing.

1:220
12 Series

SUBPICTURE
Purpose:
To transform subpictures in the current drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Transform, then Subpicture.

Initially, the user is prompted to indicate the subpicture to
transform. By clicking Options at this stage, the system offers
three alternatives of selecting the subpicture:
by cursor
by name
by envelope
When identified by name, the system will find all subpictures with
the given name at any level (it is supposed that a drawing does
not contain identical subpicture names at different levels). If there
are more that on matching subpicture, the system will proceed by
highlighting them one by one allowing the User accept (Yes) or
deny (No) the proposed subpicture.
The continuing interaction is the same as in the Modify /
Transform / GEO function, refer to the documentation of this
function. Perform Transformation in Chapter Model Viewing and
General Drafting for details about how to transform.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated subpictures are transformed within the current

drawing.
Purpose:
The scale way to transform provides two alternatives, namely:

absolute scale, and relative scale.
SCALE
For example selecting a relative scale of 0.5 doubles the

apparent size of the entity, and 0.25 increases the apparent size
by 4.0 factor. Conversely a relative scale of 5.0 reduces the
apparent size accordingly. Thus the relative scale is the 'original'
entity compared with the 'new'. The absolute scale works directly,
i.e., not the reciprocal.

1:221
12 Series

MOVE DELTA
Purpose:
The move delta way to transform asks the User to key-in the
offset value to be used for an orthogonal shift of the selected
level entities. Both positive and negative numeric dimensions
can be input for relative U, V coordinate. The orthogonal shift can
be specified by value (for distance) and followed by blank and
letter (for direction). The letter can be L(eft),R(ight), U(p), D(own)
or W(est), E(ast), N(orth), S(outh).
MOVE TWO POSITIONS
Purpose:
The move two positions way to transform is used in order to

define a translation by identifying two positions on the screen.
Select any point with the cursor and click the left-hand button.
Then select a second point, with the system creating a line
between the first position and the current position of the cursor,
then click again the left button. These two User-supplied
positions are used by the program to create a vector that controls
the amount and direction of the shift. The 'start position' for this
vector need not be on the graphic object to be moved. The
graphic object will be shown both shifted to the corresponding
new position as well as in the original position when the
Operation Complete icon is clicked. When the 'screen repaint'
icon is clicked then the graphic entity at the original position will
be removed from the display.
ROTATE DELTA
Purpose:

The rotate delta way to transform asks the User to key-in the
angle to be used for the rotation about the centre of the selected
graphic object. Both positive and negative angles can be input,
with positive being counter-clockwise.
1:222
12 Series

ROTATE TWO POSITIONS
Purpose:
The rotate two positions way to transform is used in order to

graphically indicate the angle through which the selected object
is to be rotated, again about its centre. As soon as this icon is
selected, the system assumes a starting point within the selected
object and the User then positions the cursor in order to create
an initial line. As the cursor is being positioned, the system
displays a straight line between the starting point and the current
position of the cursor and the end point is created as soon as the
User clicks the left button. This process is repeated in order to
enable the User establish a second line. The angle and direction
which the object is rotated through, is then determined by the
angle between these two User-established lines
ROTATE 45
Purpose:
The rotate 45 degrees way to transform simply rotates the

selected object in a counter-clockwise direction by 45 degrees
about its centre.
ROTATE 90
Purpose:

about its centre.
ROTATE 180
Purpose:

about its centre.
ROTATE -90
Purpose:

The rotate -90 degrees way to transform simply rotates the

selected object in a clockwise direction by 90 degrees about its
centre.
1:223
12 Series

MIRROR U
Purpose:
The mirror about screen U way to transform creates a reflection

of the selected graphic object about a horizontal line through the
current centre of the object, and removes the original from the
display
Purpose:
The mirror about screen V way to transform creates a reflection

of the selected graphic object about a vertical line through the
current centre of the object and removes the original from the
display.
MIRROR V
MIRROR LINE
Purpose:
The mirror any line way to transform creates a reflection of the

selected graphic object about a user-defined line.
PARALLEL
Purpose:

The parallel way to transform enables the User to both rotate

and translate a selected graphic entity in a single combined
action. The User selects first a segment of the graphic entity and
then another segment or line to which the selected segment of
the graphic entity is to be made parallel to. The offset distance, in
either positive or negative directions, from the second segment is
then input from the keyboard, in response to a table that the
system presents to the User. The graphic entity is then translated
to the new position and located so that the line between the two
pivot points will be perpendicular to the segments.
1:224
12 Series

TRANSFORM FOUR POSITIONS
Purpose:
The four positions way to transform also enables the User to

accomplish a combined translate and rotate operation, through
that effectively combine 'move two positions' and 'rotate two
positions' operations. Using the cursor the User establishes four
positions, or points, on the screen. The system creates a straight
line between the first two points established. Similarly, the
system creates a straight line between the third and forth points
established. The first and third points establish the direction and
magnitude of the translation. The angle the two lines rules the
direction and magnitude of the rotation.
Purpose:
The same as way to transform enables the User to signify that a

graphic entity is to be transformed in the same way that another
subpicture has been transformed. This means that two or more,
otherwise independent entities can be transformed in exactly the
same manner.
SAME AS
ALONG CURVE
Purpose:
The along curve way to transform enables the User to transform

subpicture along the path defined by curve. The User selects a
curve on the display, then selects the location of the object on the
curve; the object part that will be tangent to the curve and key in
distance along curve.
Purpose:
The lock U condition is used in order to ensure that any

translation can only take place in a vertical direction. Locking can
be concurrent with other transformation functions, namely move
dynamic, move two positions, move delta, parallel, same as, and
transform four positions. The locking command should be clicked
immediately before invoking any of these transformation
functions.
LOCK U

1:225
12 Series

LOCK V
Purpose:
The lock V condition is used in order to ensure that any

translation can only take place in a horizontal direction. Locking
can be concurrent with other transformation functions, namely
move dynamic, move two positions, move delta, parallel, same
as, and transform four positions. The locking command should
be clicked immediately before invoking any of these
transformation functions.
Purpose:
The Centre Sub function displays the current centre of a graphic

entity. This corresponds to the 'centre of gravity' or rather 'centre
of area', of the graphic element, assuming it to be either an area
or linear object. (This seems to be very questionable for several
graphic elements, particularly simple collections of line
segments, etc.) When the new centre is defined, Operation
complete is needed to confirm new position of the centre.
Subsequently the transformation can be continued.
CENTRE
FORM DETECTION
Purpose:

The Form detection option enables the User to obtain a show of

the drawing 'form' that is currently being used, on the graphics
display during transformation operations. This enables the User
to ensure that the results of the transformations remain sensible
within the boundaries of the drawing form.
1:226
12 Series

TRIM
TO ENTITY
Purpose:
This function facilitates the limitation of user-indicated contours

in the current drawing A contour can be limited to the intersection
with another contour or part of a contour (segment), or to the
intersection with a virtual line through a given point.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Trim, then To Entity.

The order of interaction is of type group trim, i.e. first the
trimming entity is defined, then the contours to trim are indicated,
one by one.
The trimming entity
The interaction starts by asking the user to define the trimming
entity. This entity can be defined in three ways, namely:
As a point
As a segment, i.e. a part of a contour
As a contour
If trim to point, the trimming entity is defined as a virtual line,

passing through a user-defined point and perpendicular to the
contour to trim.
If trim to segment, the trimming segment is indicated by user. It it
also possible to define a virtual segment. If the segment is a line,
it will be considered unrestricted.
If trim to contour, the trimming contour is indicated by user.
The way to define the trimming entity is modal. To change the
trimming entity definition, click Options and select the desired
alternative from a multiple choice dialog.
Once defined, the trimming entity will be highlighted and the
interaction continues by asking the user to indicate the contours
to trim, one by one.
The contours to trim
The contours to trim are indicated, one by one. Each contour will
be trimmed against the trimming entity if possible. Singlesegment contours will be trimmed without confirmation if there is
only one possible trimming alternative. Otherwise, the result of
the trimming operation must be confirmed by user.

1:227
12 Series

The trim operation may result in an extended contour. A multiplesegment contour will always be extended in the end segment,
closest to the user indication. If the segment is an arc, there are
two extension alternatives:
appending a tangent
extending the length
This arc extension strategy is modal. To change the strategy,

click Options and select desired alternative.
To define a new trimming entity, click Operation Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated contours will be shortened or extended according

to User's action
BY LENGTH
Purpose:
To enable a User to lengthen or shorten either a straight line or

an arc, currently in a 2-D drawing
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Trim, then By Length.

Cursor select the straight line or arc, locating the cursor at the
end of the line or arc that is to be modified. The system responds
with presenting the User from a multiple choice from which to
select.
1. For straight lines.
The options of new length and delta length can be selected.
If 'new length is selected' then the line is made equal to the
value that is input by the User, determined from the line end
point that was the nearest to the cursor when the line was
selected. The system will not accept negative numbers in
this function.
If 'delta length' is selected then this value is added to the
end of the line that is the furthest away from the end point
that is the closest to the cursor when the line was selected.
The system will accept both positive and negative numbers,
thus enabling the User to stretch/shorten the line relative to
this point.
2. For arcs.
The options of new length and delta length still apply and
have the same result as for the straight line condition, again
using the arc end point that was the closest to the cursor
when the arc was selected.
The option central angle can be selected. The User can
input the required new included angle and the system will
modify the arc accordingly, with the angle being determined
from the end point that was the closest to the cursor when
the arc was selected. The system will not accept negative
angles.

1:228
12 Series

Options:
None.
Result:
Straight lines and arcs will be modified, displayed on the screen

and stored in the drawing file.
Purpose:
To enable a User to make a gap in a geometric entity, (line, arc,

contour, spline, etc.) based on an intersecting geometric entity or
on two intersecting entities, with each entity being currently in a
2-D drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Gap.
GAP
With the cursor select the entity, (line, arc, or spline, etc.,) in
which the gap is to be created.
With the cursor select the first intersecting entity, (again a line,
arc, or spline, etc.), picking a segment on the entity that is a
close as possible to the intersection point. Repeat this for the
segment on the intersecting entity that is as close as possible to
the second intersection point. Note that the User can select two
different intersecting entities in order to create the gap definition.
The system highlights the gap that is created and enables the
User to accept or reject it.
If the entity, in which the gap is to be introduced, is of a closed
contour form, then the User generally needs to select which part
of the geometric entity to remove. The default is that the shortest
length segment between the two intersection points is removed
and this is what the User required to accept or reject. If he rejects
this then the system requires that he accepts or rejects the other
possible segment, again with the segment that is to be removed
being highlighted. If the User rejects this segment then no gap is
created.
Options:
The only options are to reject the gap that is created before it is
incorporated in the definition of the selected entity and to select
the required segment to be removed in order to create a gap in a
closed contour.
Result:
A gap is added to the selected entity, based on the User selected

intersecting entities, displayed on the screen and stored in the
drawing file.

1:229
12 Series

CUTOUT
Purpose:
To enable a User to incorporate a 'cut out' shape into a geometric

entity definition, (line, arc, contour, spline, etc.) based on an
intersecting geometric entity of the required shape, and with
each entity being currently defined and positioned in a 2-D
drawing
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Cutout.

With the cursor select the receiving entity, (line, arc, or spline,
etc.,) in which the 'cut out' geometry is to be incorporated. The
selected entity may have an open or closed definition.
With the cursor select the geometric entity that contains the
definition of the cut out. This geometric entity may also have an
open or closed form. This 'cut out' entity must intersect the
receiving entity at least two points, this being the typical case. If
the system determines that there are more than two intersection
points then the User is request to cursor select the required two
points.
The system will add the cut out geometry to the receiving entity,
automatically making a gap, and highlight the result for the User
to accept or reject. If part of the cut out geometry entity is not
added to the receiving entity then it is deleted, when shown in the
highlighted form.
Options:
When either or both the receiving and 'cut out' entities are of
closed contour form, then the User can control the selection of
the relevant portions of each of the entities by accepting or
rejecting the highlighted arrangement shown.
Result:
A 'cut out' contour definition is incorporated into the selected

contour entity definition, displayed on the screen and stored in
the drawing file.

1:230
12 Series

FILLET
Purpose:
To create fillets with corresponding trimming, between segments

in 2-D drawings.
(See also Insert / FIL for fillet only operations)
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Trim, then Fillet.

The system will assume the fillet type, in this mode of operation,
that was last used during the connect session and, via a simple
table on the screen, request from the User the relevant
dimension. If the fillet type, as displayed in the upper right-hand
corner of the screen, is not the required type, then by selecting
Options the system will then display in the upper left-hand side
of the screen the three basic fillet geometry options that are
available. With the aid of the cursor and clicking the left button on
the mouse, the required fillet geometry can be selected. The
system presents the User with the table in which to enter, via the
keyboard, the required dimension for the type of fillet selected.
The User should position the cursor very close to, and within, the
corner between the two segments lines where the fillet is to be
created. Following a single click of the left button the system will
create the required fillet between the two segments and
completely trim away the remaining segments of both contours
that are not connected to the fillet.
If the segments are two lines and stop short of one another and
do not actually intersect, then the system will still try to find the
one quadrant that would be bounded by the two lines if they were
to be extended towards the point of theoretical intersection,
however the process still requires the cursor to be positioned
close to the theoretical intersection point. The system will create
the fillet and automatically extend the lines until they connect to
the fillet. (Arc fillets are not yet implemented.)
The system will fail if there is another entity, particularly an arc,
which would be between the fillet and the corner point.
(See also Modify / Trim / FIL for combined fillet and trim
operations)
Options:
There are no options, except for the type of fillet, within this
process.
Result:
A fillet will be created, and the relevant segments trimmed or

straight lines extended if so required, displayed on the screen
and stored in the drawing file. The colour of the fillet will be black
and the line type will be solid.

1:231
12 Series

STRETCH
Purpose:
To enable a User to change the shape of geometric objects by

various 'stretching' operations.
Prerequisites:
The drawing must be open and currently viewed on the screen.

The display must contain the geometric elements that are to be
stretched. It is the responsibility of the User to determine if the
stretching of an object produces a meaningful shape and the
system does not contain any logic and/or limitations.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Stretch.

On entering this function the User is presented with a multiple
choice dialog box, containing six options, from which he must
make a selection before proceeding any further. The usage of
each option is described in some detail below. The first two
options relate to the local redefinition of a region of a contour,
and the last four relate to any geometric entity or collection of
entities.

1:232
12 Series

Options:
Option 0. Node
This option allows the User to move a contour node with the
automatic updating of the bounding/neighbour segments.
Option 1. Elbow
This option allows the User to replace a single contour segment
by two adjacent straight-line segments, meeting at a User
defined 'crack' point
Options 2 to 5
These four options require the same graphics screen input from
the User, however the methods whereby the system
accomplishes the 'stretching' operation itself, and then creates
the corresponding result, differ.
Basically the User moves a selected region, in an orthogonal
manner, to a new location on the screen and if required rotates it
in any direction and by any amount, either before or after
translation. Although these simple manipulations will suffice for
many design purposes the User can actually invoke all of the
Transformation functions that are available within the system,
as made available within the function Modify / Transform /
GEO. The system then stretches the connecting geometry,
outside of the selected region, in order to meet with the
transformed region.
The User positions the cursor at an appropriate point and clicks
the Left-hand button once. As he then moves the cursor the
system continuously draws an orthogonal rectangular box with
the previously selected point as one corner and the current
position of the cursor as the diagonally opposite corner. When a
box has been created that covers the region to be transformed
then the User clicks the left-hand button again.
It is most important to note that the lines and other geometric
entities that cross into, and out of, the box are the entities that
are to be eventually stretched by this function, in a manner that
also depends on the type of geometric entity. Hence the User
needs to ensure that geometric entities that are to be
transformed within the box are completely within the box. This
applies to, for example, arcs and circles that may pass out of and
then re-enter the box, as the parts that are outside of the box will
be held fixed and will not be moved as the other parts of the
same element are transformed within the box.
After the User has accepted the position and size of the box, and
has clicked the left-hand button the second time, then a vertical
tool bar appears, offering all of the transformation icons.
After the transformation activity has been completed, the
transformed contents of the box will remain on the screen,
together with the original position of the box and its original
contents. The User should then select the 'operation complete'
icon and the resulting fully-connected 'stretched' structure will
then appear on the screen.

1:233
12 Series

The stretching will be according to the option selected. However

while the stretching operation may be fairly predictable for
straight lines that cross the boundary of the User-defined box,
the stretching of curved members and other complex elements
requires some more detailed understanding.
Straight lines, whether single discrete lines or parts of a polyline,
have two end points. The stretching operation, subject to the
following options, is based on these two end points, one will be
within the box and one will be outside of the box. However
complex shapes such as arcs of circles and splines are treated
differently and the external end point for the stretching operation
is based on the initial intersection point between the curve and
the box. Thus, in some such cases the following options will not
be meaningful.
Smooth
Basically, straight lines will be created between the points at
each end of the original line. Thus the line outside of the box is
changed as well as the line inside of the box.
Smooth Inside
A straight line will be created between the line end point within
the box and the point that is the original intersection point
between the line and the non-transformed box. Thus the original
element of the line outside of the box will be unchanged.
Smooth Outside
A straight line is created between the line external end point and
the point on the transformed box that is created by the
intersection between the internal line element and the box. Thus
the element that is within the box is unchanged except for the
transformation itself.
Cracked
A straight line is created between the original intersection point
between the line and the non-transformed box and the
corresponding intersection point on the transformed box. Thus
the structure that is external to the box in its original position is
totally unchanged and the structure that is within the box is only
changed according to the transformation itself, and with straight
lines connecting the pairs of non-transformed and transformed
points at the box intersection points.
Result:

The geometry will be modified, both as displayed on the screen

and as stored in the drawing file.
1:234
12 Series

CHAIN
Purpose:
To enable a User to create a geometric chain of adjacent

elements, particularly line, arc, spline, polyline, and contour
elements, such that the resulting chain can be manipulated as a
single continuous element. This function will also enable the
User to create a chain formed from two or more chains.
Prerequisites:
The User must ensure that the geometric elements either

connect at their end points with the required adjacent elements in
the anticipated chain or that their respective adjacent ends are
within the established dimensional tolerance, (see Options
below). This function does not recognise elements that do not
either share end points or have end points that are separated by
a distance that exceeds the set tolerance. However gaps are
allowed between the extreme start and end points in the final
chain, i.e. the chain does not need to form a closed loop.

1:235
12 Series

Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Chain.

Cursor-select any geometric element that is to become part of
the chain. The system responds by drawing one, two or three
rectangular boxes around all the graphic entities in the region,
according to the previously established sub-picture levels. If the
User wishes to operate only on the information at a specific level
then he will need to use the Appropriate function in order to
display only the graphic information on that level. All items within
the box or boxes are high-lighted and the User must then click
the OK button if he wishes to continue with chaining operations.
Cursor-select a starting or ending element in the intended chain,
and which can be either a line, an arc, a spline, or a contour, etc.
The system needs directional information in order to build-up the
chain from the connecting elements and hence the User should
make the initial cursor selection close to one of the points that
will become either the start point or the end point of the chain.
The direction along the element, and resulting chain, is
determined from the nearest end point on the selected element
to the cursor position.
The system responds by high-lighting the selected element, the
connecting elements that it finds that will form the chain, and
displaying temporary small circles around the terminal end points
of the overall chain. If the selection and ensuing chaining is the
one that was intended, then the User must click the Yes button in
the displayed simple dialog box.
If the displayed end point is not the one that the User intended,
and, generally, it is at a location before the expected end, then
the User will need to examine the connection between the two
elements that otherwise appear to connect together. This can be
done by using the Zoom Up function. If the respective end points
of the two elements are not coincident within the pre-set
tolerance then the system cannot connect the two elements
together in order to continue with the chaining operation.
If more than two elements connect at an end point, or within the
tolerance level, within the length of the intended chain, then the
system will stop the chaining at the branch point and require
input from the User as to which one of the two, or more,
elements that it should then chain along. That is to say that the
system does not know which path to take when it reaches a
branch point. The system displays the optional elements leading
from the branch point and the User must cursor-select the
required one.

1:236
12 Series

Options:

However a User can allow for elements in a required chain that
do not actually connect, i.e. the chain does not need to be
continuous, by changing the tolerance setting. The tolerance can
be changed through the Format > Defaults function.
Result:
A chain of geometric elements is created within the graphic

display and the associated drawing file, and this can then be
treated by the User as a single entity in future operations and
manipulations. An element that is made part of a chain cannot be
individually manipulated nor deleted as long as it is defined as
part of a chain
Purpose:
To enable a User to convert a chain back into its original basic

geometric entities, e.g. back into individual lines and arcs, etc.
This will also apply where the chain to be 'dechained' is a copy of
another chain.
Instructions:
In the Tools menu, click Dechain.
DECHAIN
Cursor-select any region of the chain to be decomposed back

into its constituent elements. The system responds by highlighting the selected chain. If the correct chain is high-lighted
then click the Operation Complete icon.
Options:
Result:
The selected chain is broken back into the original geometric

entities, without changing their current position or orientation
within the display. Thus if the chain had been manipulated in any
manner after it had been first created, for example translated and
rotated into a new position, then the constituent geometric
components remain in their current position and can be
subsequently manipulated or deleted, if required, as individual
elements.

1:237
12 Series

PROPERTIES
TEXT
Purpose:
To change the properties of existing text.
Instructions:
First the kind of properties to change is defined. A multiple

choice dialog Change Text presents the following alternatives:
Properties
Rotation
Contents
The properties to change on subsequent texts are selected in the

dialog, for details see doc of INSERT/TEXT.
Rotation or Contents is supplied by the user.
Next, the texts to modify are indicated one by one.
When modifying Properties, clicking Options flips between
modifying on geometry and subpicture level (or whole drawing if
All is clicked).
Options:
None.
Result:
Text is changed according to User requirements.
Purpose:
To enable a User to change the properties on an existing symbol

within a display.
Instructions:
On selecting this function the User is presented with a multiple

choice Change Symbol box enabling him to change either the
height or the rotation angle of a symbol, or to, if so required, to
change an existing symbol to a wholly different one from within
the set of standard symbols that are available in the overall
project environment.
SYMBOL
Depending on the selection that the User makes, he is presented

with another dialog box in which to enter further data, etc., as
described below under Options.
When the input of the relevant change information has been
completed, the User then selects, on the screen and with the
cursor, the symbol that is to be changed and then followed by
clicking the left-hand button.

1:238
12 Series

Options:
The alternatives available to the User are Height, Rotation, and

Symbol.
Height
The system presents the User with a Change Symbol Height
dialog box. This provides the User with four means whereby the
height of a symbol can be changed, namely 'Standard', 'Key- in',
'Same-as' and 'Two positions'.
The selection of 'Standard' means that a subsequently selected
symbol is to be changed back to the originally programmed
standard size. If the User selects 'Key-in' the system presents
him with a simple box in which he is required to key-in the
numeric value of the dimension to be used for the height symbol.
The selection of 'Same as' requires that the User, with the cursor,
identifies the symbol that is to be used to redefine the height of
the symbol that is to be subsequently modified.
If the User selects the 'Two positions' option, then with the aid of
the cursor and at any convenient location on the screen, he is
required to graphically indicate the required height of the symbol.
Position the cursor and click the left-hand button. Drag the cursor
to a new position, with the system drawing a line from the first
position to the current position of the cursor as an aid to the User,
until a point is reached that is considered to be sufficient to
establish the height of the symbol and then again click the lefthand button.
It is to be noted that however the height is changed, using any of
the above actions, that the overall proportions of the symbol
remain unchanged.
Rotation
The system presents the User with a Change Symbol Rotation
dialog box. This provides the User with four means whereby the
height of a symbol can be changed, namely 'Standard', 'Key- in',
'Same-as' and 'Two positions'.
The inputs from the User for each of these actions are very
similar to the corresponding 'Change Symbol Height' actions.
Symbol
The system presents the User with a Symbol Selection dialog
box. By changing the Font number, using the simple drop-down
list, and horizontally scrolling through the range of alternative
symbols that are associated with each font number, the User can
interactively search for and find the symbol that he requires.
With the cursor select the required symbol and click the Lefthand button on the mouse. The system responds by drawing a
box around the selected symbol. If the required symbol has been
'seen' by the system, the User must then click the OK key in the
dialog box.

1:239
12 Series

Result:
Symbols are changed according to User requirements.
DIMENSION
Purpose:
To enable the User to modify the arrangement of existing

dimensioning.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Dimension.

The system displays a multiple choice dialog box containing
various options, as reviewed below, and from which the User can
make one or more selections that can be used until the required
dimensioning arrangement is achieved.
1. Move Dimension Line
Selecting this option returns the User to the graphic display and
he is able to drag, with the cursor, the basic dimension line to a
new position. The movement is constrained to be parallel to the
original line. Position the cursor over the line, click the left button
and then drag the displayed copy of the line to the required new
position. Click the left button again in order to fix it in position,
simultaneously deleting the old line. Note that the dimension
value text is moved to the new line position and the dimension
associating lines also modified accordingly.
Operation complete returns the User to the multiple choice
dialog box. This also applies to all of the following options.
2. Slant Witness Line
he is able to indicate point aside from the reference line. The
dimension will slant and the reference line will pass through this
point.
3. Presentation
he is able to indicate any element of a particular dimension
construct if he wishes to change the basic form of presentation.
The system responds by highlighting the selected dimension
construct and simultaneously displaying in four boxes the
alternative presentation forms available within the system.
Select the required presentation format. The system changes the
format immediately when the first or the second format is
chosen. For the rest two formats the User has to indicate a side
of dimension text. Select another dimension to format or click
Operation complete to finish the sub function.

1:240
12 Series

4. Text Properties
This sub-function lets the user change the text properties in a
dimensioning. It is also possible to change the properties of
individual texts in a linear multi-dimensioning (i.e. containing
several measure texts).
Initially, the system asks the user to indicate the dimension to
update. Click Options to modify individual texts in a linear multidimensioning. After indicating the dimensioning, or the specific
dimension text to modify, the system displays the Text Property
Dialogue showing the current properties of selected item.
After making the desired changes in the dialog, click OK to
update the selected dimensioning with the new properties.
Note: This function is applicable on linear, radius, diameter and
angular dimensionings.
5. Edit Dimension Text
This subfunction lets the user change the value of the dimension
text in a dimensioning component (corresponding to the
Dimension Text field in e.g. the Linear Dimensioning
dialogue). It is also possible to change the value of individual
texts in a linear multi-dimensioning (i.e. containing several
measure texts).
Initially, the system asks the user to indicate the dimension to
update. Click Options to modify individual texts in a linear multidimensioning. After indicating the dimensioning, or the specific
dimension text to modify, the system displays the current value in
the Text Edit dialog. After changing the value, click OK to update
the selected dimensioning.
When editing an individual dimension text in a linear
dimensioning, it is possible to flip between the intelligent
(original) text and the evaluated text as the predefined value in
the Edit Text dialog by clicking the Options button. Note that the
Options button will be enabled only if the evaluated text differs
from the intelligent text.
6. Move Dimension Text
This sub-function lets the user move an individual text in a linear
dimensioning of type "normal" or "chain" to an arbitrary position.
In case the user indicates a dimensioning other than above
mentioned the text can still be moved but the difference is that
the new position will not be persisted, implying that a subsequent re-evaluation from PADD will undo the modification.
The system asks the user to indicate the dimension text to move,
whereafter the selected text is dragged into desired new position.

1:241
12 Series

7. Flip Arrow
This simple option can be used to flip the direction of an
arrowhead and to position it on the opposite side of the
dimension associating lines.
Indicate the arrowhead and click the left-hand button. The
selected arrowhead is immediately reversed and re-positioned.
Options:
None.
Result:
The arrangement of dimensions within a display, and the

associated drawing file, can be modified in order to improve the
overall presentation and to avoid conflicts with other entities
within the drawing.
Note:

1:242
12 Series

LABEL

1:243
12 Series

Purpose:
To enable the User to modify the arrangement of existing

Labels.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Label.

The system displays a multiple choice dialog box containing
various options, as reviewed below, and from which the user
can make one or more selections that can be used until the
required label arrangement is achieved.
1. Move
Selecting this option returns the user to the graphic display
and he is able to indicate any element of a particular label
construct if he wishes to change the position of the label text
by dragging it into a new position. Position the cursor over
the text, click the left button and then drag the text to the
required new position. Click the left button again in order to
fix the text in position and update the Label.
Operation complete returns the user to the multiple choice
dialog box. This also applies to all of the following options.
2. Rotate
and then it is possible to indicate any element of a particular
label construct and to change the rotation of the label text.
The way to define the text rotation is then selected by the
user, where after the new rotation is given in interaction with
the system. Once given, the Label is updated with the new
text rotation.
3. Text Properties
construct if he wishes to change the properties of the label
text, such as font, height, aspect, colour etc. The system
responds by highlighting the selected label and displaying
the Text Property dialog showing the current properties of
the label text.
After making the desired changes in the dialogue, click OK
to update the selected label with the new properties.
4. Text Value
construct if he wishes to change the value of the label text.
The system responds by highlighting the selected label and
displaying the current value in the Text Edit dialogue.
After making the desired changes in the dialogue, click OK
to update the selected label with the new text value.

1:244
12 Series

5. Move Leader Line Start

Selecting this option allows to change the position of the
label leader line start by indicating a new position.
Options:
None.
Result:
The arrangement of Labels in the drawing are modified in

order to improve the overall presentation and to avoid
conflicts with other entities within the drawing.

1:245
12 Series

LABEL PLACEMENT
Purpose:
Intelligent label placement is used to minimize Label overlap and

leader-line crossing. As well as changing label positions the
functionality may also change: label orientations, text
justifications and alignments, the definition of leader-line shapes
and bend-points. The facility uses the SPREAD command, which
may arrange Labels locally or remotely.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Label placement.

The system displays the Intelligent Label Placement form.
The intelligent placement operation arranges sets of labels

belonging to the same view. The name of the currently selected
view is displayed on the form.
Operations to define a list of labels:

Identify labels by indicating them on drawing.
Identify model.
Indicate model sub-view and select labels attached to the
model.
Select region.
Indicate region on drawing and select all labels placed
within the region.
Select all view labels.

Add all labels belonging to selected view.
Clear selection.
1:246
12 Series

Options:
Placement options tab.
With local positioning, Labels will be positioned around their

significant design elements to minimize Label overlap and
leader-line crossing. Labels will not be moved from their initial
positions unless it is necessary. If they are moved then, as far as
possible, leader lines will be straight and at 45 to the VIEW
axis. The options allow defining offset between labels or diagonal
distance parameters.
With remote positioning, labels will be positioned around the
VIEW border. It is possible to define a margin outside the VIEW
frame that will define the positioning of the Labels. It is also
possible to define a side of the VIEW frame alongside of which
repositioned Labels will not be placed, and the minimum
permissible gap between any two Labels can also be specified.
Labels will be repositioned at the (allowed) VIEW side nearest to
their attachment points. Labels along the top and bottom sides
will be rotated unless otherwise specified. To avoid overlapping,
some leader lines will be doglegged at 45.
Result:

The arrangement of Labels in the drawing is modified in order to

improve the overall presentation and to avoid conflicts with other
entities within the drawing.
1:247
12 Series

CLOUD
Purpose:
To modify the shape of an existing Cloud primitive. For

terminology, refer to the documentation of cloud primitive
creation.
The shape of the cloud is modified by adjusting the underlying
control polygon in one of two ways:
Instructions:
by moving a node
by moving a side
In the Modify menu, click Cloud.

You are now prompted to indicate a cloud to modify. Once the
cloud primitive has been identified, it will be highlighted and the
user is prompted to indicate the node or side of the polygon to
move:
If a node is indicated, it is highlighted and the user is asked

to supply a new position for that node.
If a side is indicated, it is dragged into desired position by

the user, along a direction perpendicular to that side
Once the new position has been given, the shape of the cloud
contour is recreated according to the resulting polygon.
When satisfied with the shape, click Operation Complete.
Options:
None.
Result:
User-indicated cloud primitives will be modified according to

user's action.
Purpose:
To change the colour of existing geometric entities in the current

drawing.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Colour.
COLOUR
A dialog showing all available colours appears and the user is

requested to select the colour. It is also possible to collect the
colour from existing geometry in the drawing: just click Options
and indicate the geometry from where to collect the colour.
Next, the user is prompted to repeatedly indicate the geometric
elements to modify. Clicking Options here gives the user the
possibility to specify what kind of geometry to modify. Another
click on Options will give the user the possibility to modify a
whole subpicture, or the whole drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
The colour of user-selected elements is modified.

1:248
12 Series

LINE TYPE
Purpose:
To change the line type of existing geometric entities in the

current drawing.
See Line Types in Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting
for details.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Line Type.

A dialog showing all available line types appears and the user is
requested to select the line type. It is also possible to collect the
line type from existing geometry in the drawing: just click
Indicate and indicate the geometry from where to collect the line
type.
Next, the user is prompted to repeatedly indicate the geometric
elements to modify. Clicking Options here gives the user the
possibility to specify what kind of geometry to modify. Another
click on Options will give the user the possibility to modify a
whole subpicture, or the whole drawing.
Options:
None.
Result:
The line type of user-selected elements are modified.

1:249
12 Series

FILL STYLE

1:250
12 Series

Purpose:

Purpose: To add, modify or remove the fill style of contours in the

current drawing. Any combination of hatch patterns can be
added to contours in the drawing, using the PDMS Fill Style
concept. A Fill Style can be system-defined or user-defined, and
contains the definition of an arbitrary number of hatch patterns.
Refer to PDMS documentation for information about userdefined Fill Styles. The fill style can be applied to any contour in
the drawing, closed or possible to close. It is also possible to
apply the fill style on a general area defined by multiple contours.
1:251
12 Series

Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Fill Style.
A dialog showing all available fill styles appears and the user is
requested to select the desired fill style (including Solid Fill) and
also associated properties. Initially, the values in the dialog is
unset (i.e. the values will be fetched from the target contour/fill
style).
To remove a fill style, select No Fill. No selection means use
target value.
The associated properties (not applicable for Solid Fill) are:
Unit System - controls if length in hatch pattern definitions
should be interpreted in Drawing or World units (blank field
means use target value)
Layer - layer of contours in fill style evaluation (blank field means
use target value)
Colour - colour of fill style evaluation. If "Same As Border" is
checked, the colour will be the same as the contour (always the
case of Solid Fill is selected). An indeterminate check status
means use target definition.
It is also possible to collect the fill style and associated properties
from an existing contour in the drawing: just click Copy and
indicate the fill style.
Next, the user is prompted to repeatedly indicate the contours/fill
styles to modify. Clicking Options here gives the user the
possibility to define a general closed area to apply the fill style
on.

1:252
12 Series

Options:
The same functionality can be achieved by MB right-clicking on a

contour or fill style. Here, the dialog will be initiated with the
source values.
Result:
The fill style of user-selected contour are modified.
Purpose:
To enable a User to move information from one layer to another

layer.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click Layer.
LAYER
Before this function is initiated, open the graphic view to contain

the layer and the information on it that is to be eventually
transferred.
In the dialog box, key-in the layer identification into which the
information is to be transferred. Signify 'OK'. The system then
returns to the graphic view.
With the screen cursor indicate the graphic entity that is to be
transferred. The system responds by drawing a series of
concentric boxes around the region, with each box being
individually identified according to the following convention:
1. point
2. segment
3. contour
4. text
5. symbol
6. any
Thus the User can select any or all of the entities within this
region that are to be transferred to the designated layer.
Options:
None.
Result:
The information will be transferred from the old layer to the new
layer, and will be subsequently treated, both graphically and in
drawings, as if it was originally associated with that layer.

1:253
12 Series

GENERAL
Purpose:
To change a certain property (new property) on all geometry

elements in the current drawing that fulfils a given condition
(search property) Example: "Everything that is red should be
invisible". Any combination of search and new property is
allowed. However, the new property layer class requires that the
search property also is a layer class.
Instructions:
In the Modify menu, click General.

The subpicture to be treated is now indicated by the user. Click
All in order to treat the whole drawing.
The desired search property is now selected from a multiple
choice dialog with the following alternatives:
Visible
Invisible
Etc.
The new property is then selected from a multiple choice dialog

with the same alternatives as in the previous dialog, excluding
the Any choice.
Options:
None.
Result:
All geometry elements that matches the search property will be

modified according to the new property. The display will be
updated automatically.
PROJECT
CHANGE VIEW MODE
Purpose:
To allow the user to switch between design view mode and

production view mode.
Instructions:
In the Project menu, click Change View Mode

In the shown dialog select the wanted view mode. In a single
view project, it is not possible to switch view mode.
Options:
None.
Result:
The view mode is switched.

1:254
12 Series

AUTODP
ASSEMBLY DELIVERABLES
Purpose:
To show the form that allows the automatic creation of Assembly

Drawings and Parts Lists.
Instructions:
In the Auto DP menu, click Assembly Deliverables

The user will be presented with the Assembly Planning
Deliverables form. To learn about how this form functions then
refer to the manual entitled Assembly Drawing User Guide.
Options:
None.
Result:
The form Assembly Planning Deliverables is displayed.
HVAC SKETCHES
Purpose:
To show the form that allows the automatic creation of HVAC

Sketches.
Instructions:
In the Auto DP menu, click HVAC Sketches

The user will be presented with the 'HVAC Sketches' form.
Options:
None.
Result:
The form HVAC Sketches is displayed.
PIPE SKETCHES
Purpose:
To show the form that allows the automatic creation of Pipe

Sketches.
Instructions:
In the Auto DP menu, click Pipe Sketches

The user will be presented with the 'Pipe Sketches' form.
Options:
None.
Result:
The form Pipe Sketches is displayed.

1:255
12 Series

WINDOW
ARRANGE ICONS
Purpose:
To allow the user to arrange all window icons.
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Arrange Icons.
Options:
None.
Result:
All window icons will be arranged.
Purpose:
To allow the user to organize all windows starting from the top left
corner.
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Cascade.
Options:
None.
Result:
All windows will be organized starting from the top-left corner.
CASCADE
CLOSE ALL WINDOWS
Purpose:
To allow the user to close all windows (except the Main

Viewport).
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Close All Windows.
Options:
None.
Result:
All windows (except the Main Viewport) will be closed.
TILE HORIZONTALLY
Purpose:
To allow the user to arrange all windows horizontally.
Instructions:
In the Window menu click Tile Horizontally.
Options:
None.
Result:
All windows will be arranged horizontally (no window will be on

top of another window).

1:256
12 Series

TILE VERTICALLY
Purpose:
To allow the user to arrange all windows vertically.
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Tile Vertically.
Options:
None.
Result:
All windows will be arranged vertically (no window will be on top

of another window).
MINIMIZE ALL WINDOWS
Purpose:
To allow the user to minimize (iconize) all windows.
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Minimize All Windows.
Options:
None.
Result:
All windows will be minimized.
MAIN VIEWPORT
Purpose:
To allow the user to make the Main Viewport the current window.
Instructions:
In the Window menu, click Main Viewport.
Options:
None.
Result:
The Main Viewport will be the current window.
HELP
CONTENTS
Purpose:
To allow the user to show the contents page of the on-line

documentation.
Instructions:
In the Help menu, click Contents.
Options:
None.
Result:
The contents page of the on-line help will be shown.

1:257
12 Series

INDEX
Purpose:
To allow the user to show the index page of the on-line

documentation.
Instructions:
In the Help menu, click Index.
Options:
None.
Result:
The index page of the on-line help will be shown.
Purpose:
To show information about the current module.
Instructions:
In the Help menu, click About.
Options:
None.
Result:
The About dialog is shown.
ABOUT

1:258
12 Series


12 Series

User Guide

ii
12 Series

Introduction
Introduction
AVEVA Marine Drafting is part of the AVEVA Marine modelling software. It has two main
purposes:
1.1
To support the user with drafting tools (automatic, semi-automatic and manual) that
allows the user to create any type of drawing within the ship building process.
To act as an interface for the Hull modelling activities; drawings are created while the
model is defined.
General
The AVEVA Marine Drafting application is a comprehensive system for design and drafting
activities. The system covers the following major activities:
Retrieval and viewing of AVEVA Marine model information (hull model objects, pipes,
equipment, cableways, assemblies etc.). The model information can be projected and
intersected for creating 2D drawings, with hidden lines removed. Hull information can
be presented symbolically in a way suitable for ship building purposes.
General 2D drafting. Any kind of drawing can be created using the 2D drafting
functions. These functions are also often used to annotate the model information views,
e.g. adding measurements and labels.
Models viewed in drawings are connected to the model objects, meaning that drawings
can be recreated with latest version of model items and annotations can be updated
automatically.
AVEVA Marine Drafting is one of the drafting tools within the AVEVA Marine product. The
other one is AVEVA Outfitting Draft, which is specialized to efficiently create various
outfitting drawings. The functionality of Outfitting Draft is to a large extent available to the
Marine Drafting user through the automatic drawing functionality.
1.1.1
Automatic Drawing Production (ADP)

Marine Drafting supplies applications for General ADP and the automatic production of
Assembly Drawings, Pipe Sketches, HVAC Sketches and Steelwork Detailing drawings.
Each customisable application utilises the AVEVA PML programmable macro language and
is fully described in the following manuals;
Drawing Production User Guide
Assembly Drawing User Guide and Administrator Guide
Pipework Design User Guide
HVAC User Guide & Administrator Guide

1:1
12 Series

Introduction
1.1.2
Known Limitations using ADP in Marine Drafting

General ADP
One thing to notice in using General ADP in Marine Drafting is that the generated drawing
will not look exactly the same as when using the General ADP in Outfitting Draft. The intent
when implementing the General ADP in Marine Drafting is that the resulting drawing should
be compliant with the way a drawing is created manually in Marine Drafting. There are
differences especially for dimensions. The benefit of this is that it is possible to change/
update them with Marine Drafting functions to modify dimensions.
In addition to the above there are currently known limitations in Marine Drafting;
1.1.3
Leader line text in dimension is not supported.
Command Accelerators
Some single-key accelerators are available for quicker manipulation of Marine Drafting and
Hull Design. These single-key accelerators are:
Menu Command
Accelerator
View/Pan
W, w
View/Repaint
T, t
View/Zoom/Auto
S, s
View/Zoom/In
Z, z
View/Zoom/Out
D, d
Zap/Operation Complete
O, o
Zap/Quit
E, e, Q, q
Zap/Cancel
C, c, R, r
Zap/Options
P, p
Zap/All
A, a
Zap/Subpicture Level/View
Zap/Subpicture Level/Subview
Zap/Subpicture Level/Component
Zap/SubpictureLevel/Subcomponent
1.2
Workflow Recommendation
1.2.1
Persisted Data Base Information

A drawing in AVEVA Marine Drafting is represented by two parts, a data base part and a part
stored separately in a file. The user is interacting with the system via a 2D canvas and a set

1:2
12 Series

Introduction
of interactive functions that keeps drawings consistent and makes the information in the
drawing persisted in the data base. Only a persisted drawing will allow for model updates
that reflect latest status of the viewed model objects and their annotations. Any updates
done from the Command Window, available within the AVEVA Marine framework, are not
guaranteeing a persisted drawing. Command Window usages can only be used if a certain
command is specifically documented as available for the AVEVA Marine Drafting user.
1.2.2
Save Work
The normal function of the Save Work function within AVEVA Marine products is to save all
current work to the data base; however this is slightly modified in Marine Drafting and in
other modules based on Marine Drafting. Marine Drafting is working with a current drawing,
which is opened as new or existing in the beginning of session. The current drawing is
placed in an exclude list and will not be affected by a Save Work operation. The current
drawing is instead saved by the use of the functions Save Drawing or Save Drawing As.
1.2.3
Drawing Ownership
A Marine Drafting drawing can be created in a number of different ways:
By interactive methods starting from a blank sheet
By using ADP routines (as described above)
By opening a drawing generated in AVEVA Outfitting Draft
By importing drawings using functions designed for this purpose.
The general rule is that once a drawing is stored within Marine Drafting, it is considered as a
Marine Drafting drawing. It means that a drawing created in Outfitting Draft is "taken over"
by Marine Drafting and should not be updated further in Outfitting Draft.

1:3
12 Series

Introduction

1:4
12 Series

Model Viewing and General Drafting
2.1
Concepts
2.1.1
Drawings
General
A drawing can contain model views and 2D geometry like lines and arcs, texts and symbols.
The geometry of the model views is stored in the drawing together with a link to the original
model objects, so that model information can be obtained from views on a drawing. The
drawing can also be updated when a model change has been done.
Marine Drafting is used both as a drafting system and as a modelling interface for the hull
modelling functions. This can result in a session where model objects are to be saved but
not the current drawing. To handle this situation, the function Save Work is used to save
model objects, while the functions Save Drawing and Save Drawing As are used to save
When saving a drawing, two storing operations are made. One is to the PADD database and
one to an individual file (.SDB file).
Storing and Organization of Drawings in PADD Database

Drawings are organised in the Dabacon PADD database by Department (DEPT) and
Registry (REGI). See also Outfitting Draft -> Drawing the Design -> Creating a Drawing, a
Sheet, a View.
For drawings created in Marine Drafting the owning DEPT and REGI are set by customer
defined rules, based on the Drawing Type.
The name of the owning DEPT is found by
1. Through the PADDXP/RESSION attribute, which is a compiled PML expression to be
evaluated against the drawing type of the new drawing in order to find the appropriate
DEPT element.
Examples of how the PADDXP attribute value could be defined:
>set PADDXP (marpty eq 1)
>set PADDXP (marpty eq 1 or marpty eq 4)
2. If no appropriate DEPT can be found using the PADDXP attribute, the DEPT name is
picked up from the appropriate environment variable in the d065 file (e.g.
SB_PDB_PADD).
The REGI name is always fetched from this environment variable.
The syntax of the assigned value is; Department and Register separated by a
semicolon (;).

2:1
12 Series

Example: SB_PDB_PADD = General;MarDwg

3. If neither of these is set, then the built-in DEPT and REGI are used.
If the DEPT or REGI elements don't exist, they will be created automatically.
There is also a set of environment variables, one for each drawing type, where each
variable must be set to itself. Example SP_PDB should be set to SP_PDB.
A complete list of the system defined drawing types together with the names of the
corresponding environment variables can be found in Appendix Drawing Types.
Storing and Organization of Individual Drawing Files (.SDB files)

The individual files (.SDB files) with drawing information are stored in subfolders under the
folder named <project name>drg.
Every time you store the drawing a new version of the .SDB file will be saved. By default
previous versions will be deleted. This behaviour can be changed by setting the default
keyword KEEP_SESSION_FILES to YES. It should be noted that keeping all session files
will make it possible to do DABACON operations like, for example 'roll back', but can on the
other hand bloat your file system.
Removing obsolete SDB files can be done either as part of the Admin merge session
command (See Administration - Reference Manual - Command Details - MERGE
CHANGES) or via a PML macro (see Appendix Remove Obsolete .SDB files).
User-Defined Drawing Types

A set-up of user-defined drawing types can be made and used in Marine Drafting. For this
purpose a file with contents per row <Drawing type>,<Description> should be assigned to
the environment variable SB_DRAWINGTYPE_LIST. Drawing type should be a number
between 1001 and 1999. Description is the text that is shown in dialogues when creating,
saving or opening a drawing.
An example of a list defining user defined drawing types is given below:
1001,ClassDwg
1002,BlockPlan
1003,GenArr
The names of DEPT and REGI are controlled in the same way as for the system defined
drawing types, i.e. either with a PADDXP attribute on the DEPT elements or a value of the
appropriate environment variable in the d065 file. Drawing Type 1001 is controlled by
SB_PDB001_PADD and SB_PDB001, 1002 is controlled by SB_PDB002_PADD and
SB_PDB002 etc.. Example: SB_PDB001_PADD = EarlyDesign;ClassDwg.
Maximum Number of Drawings in a REGI

As described above drawings of a specific type will be stored in a given DEPT/REGI.
However, it is not recommended to have too many sub-elements in a DABACON database
hierarchy. A maximum of approximately 1000 is normally recommended. If you get more
elements than that the performance of the database explorers will be poor. At some point
(normally more than 1000 elements) you may also have problems with the DABACON
database itself.
This means that you should not store more than a 1000 drawings in a single REGI element.
Since you are very likely to have more than 1000 drawings of some types, Marine Drafting
will solve this by automatically creating new REGIs when one has become full. The new

2:2
12 Series

REGIs will have the same name as the original one but with a numbered suffix. Following
the example above where the REGI for General Drawings is MarDwg then new REGIs will
be named: MarDwg, MarDwg_001, MarDwg_002, MarDwg_003 etc.
There is a Drafting default keyword controlling the maximum number of drawings saved in a
REGI:
MAX_DWGS_IN_REGI
The recommended value is 1000, which is also the default value.
Please note that the Open Drawing function in Marine Drafting will still find all drawings of a
specific type since in looks in the entire MDB not only in a specific DEPT/REGI.
One issue with this approach is possible name conflicts. Assume this scenario;
1. User A creates a new drawing. Marine Drafting finds that the current REGI is full and
creates a new: MarDwg_002, for instance.
2. User B creates a new general drawing and also in this session Marine Drafting creates
a new REGI called MarDwg_002.
3. User A saves his drawing.
4. User B saves his drawing. He will now get a name conflict in DABACON. The dialogue
box in Marine Drafting will say something like Failed to save the drawing to the PADD
database. Possible reason: There is a name clash, please use Save as.... There will
also be an error message in the message window stating that there is a name conflict
regarding MarDwg_002.
This scenario obviously creates a problem. To avoid any name conflicts we recommend that
you create a number of versions of the REGI element in advance using the naming principle
described above. This will help avoiding the name conflict.
2.1.2
Link Documents
The Link Documents functionality offers the possibility to create a user defined hierarchy of
link worlds, link folders and link descriptors in a DESI database. A link world is a root
element in the DESI database. Under a link world you can place link folders in any number
of levels. A link descriptor is a place holder or a short cut for a drawing. The link descriptor
holds a reference to the drawing but does not store the drawing itself.
This Link Documents functionality can be used to organize drawings in an alternative user
defined structure that is independent of the standard storing structure.
In order to use Link Documents in Marine Drafting you must have access to a DESI
database. If you also want to write to Link Documents the DESI database must be writable.
You should also notice that any changes you make to Link Documents will not be saved until
you do a Save Work. The Save Drawing function will not save any Link Documents data
connected to the current drawing or any other drawing.
Link Documents are accessible from a number of places within Marine Drafting:
1. In the Open Drawing dialogue you will find an Open via Link button. This button will
open the Link Documents browser and let the user select and open a drawing from the
Link Documents hierarchy.
2. The Save As dialogue has an Add to Link button. This will let the user add a new
shortcut to the current drawing in the Link Documents hierarchy.
3. If you select a SHEE or a DRWG element in the Draft Explorer there is a choice Add to
Link Documents in the context menu. This will do the same as (2) but for any drawing
in the PADD database (not only the current one).

2:3
12 Series

2.1.3
Drawing Hierarchy (Subpictures)
A drawing is hierarchically structured in 3 sub-picture levels. These levels always exist for all
drawings, and all geometry is always located below the 3:rd sub-picture (Component) level.
The sub-picture structure can be created and re-arranged freely by the user, see the subpicture Create, Split and Regroup functions in the Operator's instructions. A sub-picture can
be used for group-wise manipulation of drawing elements, e.g. move, delete, change colour
etc.
Model projections are always added to a drawing in a predefined sub-picture hierarchy.
Each projection view (1:st level) contains sub-views (2:nd level) for each of:
Hull parts
Curved panels
Hull surfaces
Fairing curves
Outfitting
Assemblies
2D information that is added to a drawing is either placed into the currently selected subpicture, or the closest one (automatic). If the currently selected sub-picture is on the 1:st
level, a new 2:nd and 3:rd level is created for each new entity that is added. If the currently
selected sub-picture is on the 2:nd level, a new 3:rd level is created for each entity.
Some advice concerning efficient usage of sub-pictures is given in Usa.
2.1.4
Drawing Explorer
The purpose of the Drawing Explorer is to give an overview of the picture object structure
i.e. the drawing hierarchy, and make navigation in the picture object structure easier. The

2:4
12 Series

Drawing Explorer can be activated by the Drawing Explorer menu command in the View/
Explorers Menu. The Drawing Explorer component can be docked or floating similar to a
toolbar.
The root in the Drawing Explorer is the picture node, this node can be expanded when a
drawing has been opened in the application. Each expanded level will represent a level in
the picture object structure. These levels are: picture -> view -> subview -> component.
The generic names are replaced with the actual names whenever available. The Drawing
Explorer will react to changes made in the picture object structure and change accordingly.
If the Drawing Explorer is expanded with no nodes selected or the root 'picture' node
selected, hovering of the mouse pointer over the different Drawing Explorer nodes will
highlight their representation in the drawing. Selecting a node will highlight that specific
object in the drawing.
Selection of multiple objects can be done by clicking the Shift or Ctrl keys and using the left
mouse button. Commands in the Treeview popup menu will be available depending on the
selected object and/or whether multiple nodes has been selected.
If Model info function is used in the drawing, the component selected will be highlighted in
the Treeview. Should not the Treeview be expanded enough to display the component then
the parent node of the selected object will be highlighted.
Clicking the right mouse button in the Drawing Explorer will open the Treeview popup
menu.
Drawing Explorer Popup Menu Commands

Zoom In
Will change the viewed drawing picture so that the drawing window encompass the
representation of the selected node.
Clicking the Ctrl-E key will return the user to the previous picture zoom level. Can be used
on all picture objects.
Delete
Will delete any node and their representation on the drawing if they are possible to delete.
Can be used on all picture objects.
Exchange
Will perform a model exchange operation on the selected node and their representations on
the drawing. Can be used on all picture objects.
Model Info
Will show the model info of the component if available. The model info dialogue will be
updated with new info every time this command is selected. Works only for the Component
Treeview level.
Refresh
The Refresh command will search through the Treeview and make sure it is updated.

2:5
12 Series

2.1.5
Drawing References
The Drawing Reference concept offers the user the possibility to define references to other
drawings (referred drawings or Reference Drawings) from the current one (the referring
drawing). A reference drawing is an ordinary drawing and could for example serve as a
background in the referring drawing. It is possible to collapse the drawing reference, i.e.
remove all underlying geometric information in the drawing reference. The opposite way, to
return all underlying geometric information is called to expand the drawing reference. When
storing a drawing all expanded drawing references will automatically be collapsed. This
means that only the references will be stored on the data bank, thus avoiding double
storage of the same information. When the drawing later is retrieved from the data bank, all
such automatically collapsed drawing references will be expanded. Moreover, when printing
the drawing, all referred drawings will be printed even when collapsed.
Note: The only functions that are able to expand drawing references are File/Open, File/
Print and File/Drawing Reference/Expand. This means that for example the hidden
line facility will ignore collapsed drawing references.
The major benefits of drawing references are:
Multiple storage of drawing information will be reduced
The drawing reference is "live", i.e. modifications in the referred drawing will affect all
drawings referring to it (see above)
The geometric information in an expanded drawing reference is protected, i.e. cannot

be modified.
The limitation of the function is:
2.1.6
It is not possible to refer to a drawing already referring to other drawings or containing

sub-drawings.
Envelopes
An envelope is a simple way to temporarily hide any sub-picture on a drawing. This can
improve the response time when working with large drawings. The sub-picture will be
replaced by an envelope symbol of the same size as the sub-picture min-max-rectangle.
The size of the drawing will not change as all the information in the envelope is kept in the
drawing.
2.1.7
Layers
A layer is a grouping of entities on a drawing that can be used for hiding and showing
related items, performing layer-wise changes etc. Layers are identified by numbers, which
can be given a textual description through a Layer Alias File. See Example of a Layer Alias
File in Chapter Appendices.
System Layers
Model projections and objects viewed on drawings are always placed into system default
layers. System-defined geometry, e.g. measures, position numbers, hatching etc. are also
by default placed on system layers, but can be overridden by the user and placed on user
layers, see below. The system default layers have negative layer numbers. See System
Layers in Chapter Appendices for a list of system layer numbers and entities.

2:6
12 Series

User Layers
User-added information is grouped into the current user layer when it is created. By
changing the current layer, subsequent items are placed into that layer. User layers can be
given by the user as a single value or by giving a layer class. In both cases, the layers of the
following information will be affected:
Measures
Notes
Position numbers
Hatching
General geometry
General text
General symbols
User layers have positive layer numbers.
Layer Class
A layer class contains information about grouping of different types of items in a drawing in
layers. The user can define as many classes as needed in an external file. A layer class can
contain any of the layers for measures, notes, position numbers, hatch patterns, created 2D
geometry, general texts and general symbols. It is possible to add a name to the layer class.
If the system creates items of types not covered by the currently used layer class, their
layers will be undefined. An example of a layer class file may be found in Appendix 12,
Layer Class File.
2.1.8
Model Presentation
Model objects can be viewed in two modes, either using wireframe projections on drawings,
or as a colour shaded interactive 3D view. The appearance of a hull model in drawing
projections is controlled by settings. These settings are available through the function Tools>Preferences_>Model Draw code and by changing default parameters. See Drafting Default
File Keywords in Chapter Appendices.
A number of functions can be operating on the drawing projections, such as slicing, hidden
line etc.
In order to also get non-graphical information on a panel that is possible to pick, graphical
handles can be turned off by checking a check box in the Model Draw Code dialogue. The
picture below shows the panel components and their graphical appearance.

2:7
12 Series

2.1.9
Annotation and Drafting Geometry

The model views can be annotated using tools such as position number, note, dimensioning
etc. There is also a full set of line, curve and polygon drawing tools.
2.1.10
Symbols
In many applications a considerable part of the information on drawings and diagrams
consists of schematic pictures of different items. These are referred to as symbols. Symbols
can be created once and then easily placed on drawings. Related symbols are grouped
together in a symbol font. Each font is identified by a unique font number (1-999). Each
symbol within a certain font is identified by a unique symbol number (1-32767). There are a
number of symbol fonts delivered with the system that are used by the system. These can
be used in drawings but must not be modified. A list of system defined reserved symbol
fonts can be found in Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System in Chapter Appendices
2.1.11
Standard Details
Any subpicture can be stored as a standard detail in the standards data bank (SB_STD).
This can later be retrieved and re-used in other drawings. Other standard items are e.g.
user defined hatch patterns, which are also stored in the standards data bank.
2.1.12
Drawing Forms and Rules

There are two kinds of drawing forms used in Drafting:
Modelling drawing forms
"Normal" drawing forms
Modelling drawing forms are forms that include a layout of projections that can be used in
modelling applications, one example of these is the CV4 form that is included in the system
distribution.
Normal drawing forms are used as a background for a drawing and can contain e.g. a
frame, some fixed text and some dynamic test. The dynamic text is created by using rules,
where e.g. the rule $2000 will automatically be replaced by the drawing name.
There are two kinds of rules (dynamic texts):

2:8
12 Series

1. Single item rules are denoted as an integer preceded with a $ (dollar sign), e.g. $2000
meaning the drawing name. When the drawing is processed, the system will search for
all occurrences of text entities that contain an integer, preceded with a dollar sign. If
found, and if known to the particular system function, that text entity will then be
replaced for a new text entity, containing the actual data. In the case of $2000, the real
drawing name will replace $2000.
2. Table item rules are denoted as an integer preceded with a @ (commercial at sign),
e.g. @600 meaning the revision number. Table rules are used to build up tables, i.e. a
number of rows (maximum 20) with data. In the case of @600, a table with revision
data for a number of revisions may be built, including e.g. the date for each revision.
(The date as such would then have another rule associated - @603.)
In the replacement process, the position of the $ or @ text will be used for the new text, and
so will the text height and rotation angle.
The technique of using rules for dynamic texts is used for many types of drawings and lists
in the system. The rules are unique only within one form/list. (Consequently, $2000 may
mean something totally different in another list.) The rules are listed where the appropriate
functions are documented. Below is a list of links for the currently available rules:
Drafting drawing forms
see PROPERTIES in Operators Instructions.
Hull parts lists
see Miscellaneous Hull Functions / Parts List.
Hull WCOG lists
see Miscellaneous Hull Functions / Weight Calculations of

Steel Structure.
Nested plate sketches
see Plate Nesting / Initialisations for Nesting.
Nested Profile sketches
see Profile Manufacturing / Production, Output Profiles.
Curved plate drawings
see Automatic Generation of Curved Parts / Release of

Curved Parts for Production.
Automatic profile sketches
see Profile Manufacturing / Production, Output Profiles.
Symbol drawings
see SB029 - Create Drawings Presenting Symbols in

Specified Fonts.
User defined rules
see SY006 - Insert Text by Drawing Form Rule.
2.2
Geometric Entities
2.2.1
Lines, Arcs, Polylines

2D Geometry such as points, lines, arcs, polylines etc. can be created and manipulated.
2.2.2
Notes and Position Numbers

Notes, position numbers and other information derived from the model can be placed and
included in drawings.

2:9
12 Series

2.2.3
Config Note
Config Set
This function is used to insert user configurable notes into a drawing. The configuration
includes a set of note types each with its own set of characteristics both regarding the
contents and the appearance. The configuration is made via a Vitesse hook described
below.
The created notes can be handled by the delete note function.
The operator has to pick a model part and optionally create a reference string line for the
note. By giving Options on the prompt it is possible to invoke automatic setting of a certain
note type in a whole view or subview. In this case the notes are placed without or with
reference string line, according to the option Reference line OFF (on). The reference line
consists of 2 line segments.
Config Move
This function is used to move notes in a drawing inserted by the Set function above. To
move a note, just pick it and place it somewhere else.
Giving Options on the prompt will give the possibility to move a note and at the same time
create a reference string line from the original location. This option can only be used if the
note does not already have a reference line.
General
A number of special notes are used in drawings with different contents. The contents of the
notes are depending on both the type of the note and the component the note is made for.
The configurable note option in the system makes it possible to create notes with a high
degree of freedom regarding both the contents and the appearance. Each note type is given
an identifying string to appear in a selection list, and a set of characteristics described in
detail below.
The configuration is implemented as a Vitesse hook, meaning that a file with a specific
name is accessed from the functions. This file is written using the Vitesse syntax and
interfaces.
The Hook
The name of the configuration file must be _TBhook_ConfigNote.py and must be placed in
the directory indicated by the global variable PYTHONPATH.
The Hook Interface

A number of methods with predefined names and parameter lists must exist in the
configuration file. These methods are:
getNoteName (<NoteInd>)
getNoteChar (<NoteInd>)
getNoteFilter (<NoteInd>, <FilterInd>)
getNoteData (<ItemNo>)
setNoteData
(<NoteNo>,
<SubPartType>, <SubPart>)

<ModelType>,
2:10
<Model>,
<PartType>,
<Part>,
12 Series

They are all described in detail below. These methods should never be changed regarding
the input parameters and the result values.
getNoteName
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note name strings. The input parameter
<NoteInd> is an integer index and should return the list value as a string if the index is within
the bounds of the list. If the index is outside the list bounds the nil object should be returned.
The string is supposed to be unique among the strings in the list, and must not be longer
than 80 characters.
The storing of the note names is free as long as they can be accessed as an indexed list
through the method getNoteName. The note names are used to present a list of available
notes to select from in the function that set configurable notes.
getNoteChar
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note characteristic records. It also takes
an integer index as parameter and should return a list of note characteristics for the
corresponding note. This list of note characteristic records should have the same number of
elements as the corresponding name list described above, i.e. there should be one entry for
each note type.
The characteristics record returned should contain the following items:
(<reference>, <placement>, <colour>, <layer>, <flip_angle>)
<reference> is a string defining the location of the reference point. The allowed values are
described below:
Value
Description
cursor
Use the pick point defined by the user as reference point
nearest
Use the point closest to the identified geometry
midpoint
Use the midpoint of the longest geometry in the identified picture

element
COG
Use the centre of the circumscribed rectangle of the identified picture

element
infirst
Use the inpoint of first straight part, if the identified object is a pipe,
pipe spool, ventilation or cableway. If no straight parts exist, use the
inpoint of first part.
Use the inpoint of the part, if the identified object is a part in a pipe,
pipe spool, ventilation or cableway.
Inpoint means where routing started and outpoint, which is referred to
below, where it ended.
midfirst
Like infirst, but the midpoint if the part is used.
outfirst
Like infirst, but the outpoint if the part is used.
inlongest
Like infirst, but instead of inpoint of first straight part, inpoint of longest
straight part is used.

2:11
12 Series

Value
Description
midlongest
Like midfirst, but instead of midpoint of first straight part, midpoint of

longest straight part is used.
outlongest
Like outfirst, but instead of outpoint of first straight part, outpoint of

longest straight part is used.
<placement> is a string defining the location of the note body in case no reference lines
are used. The placement is related to the reference point and the values refer to the
circumscribed rectangle of the note body.
<placement> is built up by two values, one for horizontal placement and one for vertical
placement that are concatenated without delimiters to form one string. The allowed values
are described below:
Value (horizontal)
Description
Left
Use the left side
Mid
Use the midpoint
Right
Use the right side
Origin
Use the origin
Auto
Use the side opposite to route direction.

This value is valid only if infirst, midfirst outfirst, inlongest,
midlongest or outlongest were used as reference values.
Value (vertical)
Description
Lower
Use the lower side
Mid
Use the midpoint
Upper
Use the upper side
Origin
Use the origin
Auto
Use the lower side placed above the part, if the part is a pipe
part or a pipe spool part.
Use the lower side placed above the part, if the part is a
ventilation part. If it is a rectangular part, above means the
average distance from the centreline to all sides.
Use the lower side placed above the centreline of the part, if
the part is a cableway part.
This value is valid only if infirst, midfirst outfirst, inlongest,
midlongest or outlongest were used as reference values.

2:12
12 Series

Origin refers to the point (0,0) in the local coordinate system used when building up the note
body further explained below. All combinations of these values are valid, e.g. LeftLower or
MidOrigin.
<colour>
is a string giving the name of a colour selected from the

standard set.
<layer>
is either a string defining a named layer existing in the Layer

Alias File, or an integer number giving the layer. The created
note component will then get this layer.
<flip_angle>
is an integer number defining the angle in degrees where the

note text along a line changes from one side of the line to the
other. The angle must be between 0 and 180 degrees.
getNoteFilter
This method is supposed to have access to a list of pick filters for each note. These filters
define the valid models/parts/subparts to be picked for note setting. The method takes two
integer arguments, the first is the note type index and the second is a filter index within this
note type. This means that each note can have many filters. All components matching any
of the filters can be picked.
The return value should be a list of three strings defining the model type, the part type and
the subpart type. The valid string value combinations are described in the table below:
Model type
Part type
Subpart type
plane panel
stiffener
flange
pillar
plate
bracket
stiffener
flange
seam
hole
notch
cutout
hull curve
part
placed volume
"
longitudinal
transversal

2:13
12 Series

Model type
Part type
Subpart type
curved panel
stiffener
plate
Irrelevant values should be set to empty strings. Note that it is not necessary to define the
filter all the way down even if it is possible. E.g. if a bracket as a whole should be picked the
subpart type should be empty, or if the whole panel should be picked, also the part type is
set empty.
Giving indices outside the list bounds should result in a nil object return.
getNoteData
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note definition records set by the
method setNoteData described below. It takes an integer item index and returns a note
definition record if the index is within the bounds of the note data list.
The records have the same basic layout, starting with six integer values followed by five
floats and ended by a string. They are interpreted differently depending on the first value.
Four different types exist, the reference symbol, the free symbol, the text in symbol, and the
free text. Irrelevant values should be set to nil values (0, 0.0 and "").
In the example below classes have been defined to encapsulate the record contents only
using relevant values for each type.
Reference Symbol
The reference symbol is the symbol placed at the start point of the reference string-line
defined by the user, often an arrow. If the note is placed without a reference line, no
reference symbol will appear.
The reference symbol note definition record has the following contents
(<type>, , <number>, 0, 0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, <height>, "")
Description:
<type>
is an integer that is set to 1.

is the symbol font number used to make up the name of the symbol font
according to d012sy.sbs.
<number
>
is the symbol number within the given font.
<height
>
is the size of the symbol given as symbol space height.
Free Symbol
The free symbol is part of the note body. It can be placed freely and can be mixed with text
to form the note.

2:14
12 Series

The free symbol note definition record has the following contents
(<type>, , <number>, <conn>, <mirr>, <hori>,

<vert>, 0.0, rotation>, <height>, "")
Description:
<type>

<number>
<conn>
<mirr>
is the symbol number within the given font.
<hori>
<vert>
<rotation>
<height>
is the horizontal position in mm. If set to 0.0 the symbol is left padded.
is the symbol font number. For a description on symbol fonts see

Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System in Chapter Appendices .
is the number of the symbol connection point to use
is a mirror code where 1 means reflection in the u-axis and 2 means
reflection in the v-axis. 0 means no reflection.
is the vertical position in mm.
is the rotation angle of the symbol.
Text in Symbol
The text in symbol is placed using a predefined symbol text position with certain
characteristics. It is placed in the symbol preceding the text in symbol definition.
The text in symbol note definition record has the following contents
(<type>, , 0, <conn>, 0, 0.0, 0.0, <aspect>,

<slant>, <height>, <text>)
Description:
<type>

<conn>
<aspect>
<slant>
<height>
<text>
-

is the text font number. For a description of text fonts see Symbol Fonts
Reserved by the System in Chapter Appendices .
is the number of the text position in the symbol to use.
is the width/height ratio (normally 1.0)
is the slanting angle of the text (normally 90 degrees).
is the text string to insert
Free Text
The free text is freely placed and can be mixed with symbols to make up the note body.
The free text note definition record has the following contents

2:15
12 Series

(<type>, , 0, 0, 0, <hori>, <vert>, <aspect>,

<slant>, <height>, <text>)
Description:
<type>

<hori>
<vert>
<aspect>
<slant>
<height>
<text>

is the text font number.
is the horizontal position in mm. If set to 0.0 the text is left padded.
is the vertical position in mm.
is the width/height ratio (normally 1.0)
is the slanting angle of the text (normally 90 degrees).
is the text string to insert (maximum 80 characters).
setNoteData
The parameter list is:
setNoteData(<NoteNo>, <ModelType>, <Model>, <PartType>,

<Part>, <SubPartType>, <SubPart>)
This method takes an integer note number referring to the list of notes defined by
getNoteName. The first note has # 1 and so on. The following parameters are used to
specify a model object part that has been picked by the user. The method is called once for
each model part picked and is used to populate an internal list of note definition records to
be read by the method getNoteData.
The <ModelType>, <PartType> and <SubPartType> can have the values
described under getNoteFilter above. <Model> is the name of the model object while
<Part> is the component/part number and <SubPart> is the subordinate component/part
number. Empty strings for the types implies non-valid numbers.
The implementation of the setNoteData method is entirely up to the user. The suggestion is
to use Data Extraction to retrieve relevant data from the model and then transform it into
note definition records.
When adding note definition records certain rules about the order has to be fulfilled.
The first record must define a reference symbol.
Only one reference symbol record is allowed.
Before a record defining a text in a symbol, a symbol record must have been added
(containing the used text position).
Example
An example can be found in a file: Drafting_ex_1.txt

2:16
12 Series

2.2.4
Measurements
2D and 3D measurements based on model information can be created and placed in
drawings.
2.2.5
Texts
The Drafting application supports placing and formatting of texts on drawings.
A single line of text as well as multiple lines of text can be handled. The logical name
controls the TB_IGNORE_PSEUDO_MULTI_LINE_TEXT method for treating single text
rows in multi-line texts. If set to YES, such text rows will be treated individually. Otherwise,
such text rows will be treated as member of the multi-line text. Two kinds of text fonts are
supported, the system vector fonts and Windows TrueType fonts.
Truetype Fonts
Truetype give access to a wide variety of different fonts. The truetype fonts available in
Drafting are the fonts that are installed through the Windows Control Panel. Compared to
vector fonts, the TrueType font characters are made up of outlines that are filled with colour,
often making them appear thicker than the vector fonts.
2.2.6
Line Types
Geometric entities in drawings can be displayed in a total of 45 different built-in linetypes but
also user defined linetypes are available.
The built-in line types are grouped into two categories, basic and complex.
Basic Line Types

A basic line type is a combination of one of the following dash patterns
Solid
Dashed
Dashed and dotted
Dashed and double dotted
Short-dashed
Dotted
FineDotted
Chained
DoubleChained
TripleChained
and one of the following thicknesses:
Thin
Wide
Xwide

2:17
12 Series

Thus, a total of 15 basic line types are available:

Name
AVEVA Marine code
Solid
SolidWide
10
SolidXWide
17
Dashed
DashedWide
11
DashedXWide
18
DashedDotted
DashedDottedWide
12
DashedDottedXWide
19
DashedDoubleDotted
DashedDoubleDottedWide
13
DashedDoubleDottedXWide
20
ShortDashed
ShortDashedWide
14
ShortDashedXWide
21
Dotted
31
DottedWide
32
DottedXWide
33
Finedotted
34
FineDottedWide
35
FineDottedXWide
36
Chained
37
ChainedWide
38
ChainedXWide
39
DoubleChained
40
DoubleChainedWide
41
DoubleChainedXWide
42
TripleChained
43
TripleChainedWide
44
TripleChainedXWide
45

2:18
12 Series

Complex Line Types

A complex line type is by definition a line type that is not basic. Some complex line types
are a combination of basic line types.
A total of 15 complex line types are available:
Name
AVEVA Marine code
DashedAndSolid
98
Track
99
System5
System6
System7
System8
System9
System15
15
System16
16
System22
22
System23
23
System24
24
System25
25
System26
26
System27
27
Note: that these line types are not supported in the 2D DXF and IGES export. Lines having
these types will be drawn as solid lines.
User Defined Line Types

The definition of a user defined line type is stored in the database in the style world. It is built
up of pen down and pen up intervals and optionally a text, using true type fonts. This means
that a number of different line types can be created.
The creation of user defined line types is described in detail in the AVEVA Outfitting Draft
manual.

2:19
12 Series

Line Type Selector

Below a screenshot of the line type selection dialog, presenting all line types available in the
system. In the left column, the name of each line type is given. The names are given as
system-defined, but it is possible for the user to define his own name for any line type in a
"line type name alias" file, see below.
Figure 2:1.
Parameters controlling the Display of Line Types

There are a number of environment variables controlling the thicknesses of the basic Thin,
Wide and Xwide line types, the "overall" thicknesses of most of the complex line types, the
pattern interval definitions and the pattern interval lengths of some line types. Also, there is
an environment variable controlling if the interval length, and the "overall" thicknesses of the
complex line types, should depend on the zoom factor, and in this case multiplied by an
optional scale factor. These settings are interpreted when the program starts up and should

2:20
12 Series

be maintained centrally. Note that the line type settings will affect both screen display and
paper printing.
Below, all environment variables controlling line type display are listed, with the system
default value given (all linear measures in mm):
Width of basic line types:
SB_LINETYPE_THIN_WIDTH = 0.125
SB_LINETYPE_WIDE_WIDTH = 0.25
SB_LINETYPE_XWIDE_WIDTH = 0.5
Width of complex line types:
SB_LINETYPE_DASHEDANDSOLID_WIDTH = 0.75
SB_LINETYPE_TRACK_WIDTH = 0.75
SB_LINETYPE_SYSTEM5_WIDTH = 0.75
Pattern Interval definition:
SB_LINETYPE_DASH_PATTERN = 7.5, 2.5
SB_LINETYPE_DASHDOT_PATTERN = 24.0, 5.0, 1.0, 5.0
SB_LINETYPE_DASHDOUBLEDOT_PATTERN = 29.0, 4.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 4.0
SB_LINETYPE_SHORTDASH_PATTERN = 3.75, 1.25
SB_LINETYPE_TRACK_PATTERN = 10.0, 10.0
SB_LINETYPE_SYSTEM5_PATTERN = 5.0, 5.0
SB_LINETYPE_SYSTEM7_PATTERN = 20.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
The interval definition is a sequence of alternating "pen downs's" and "pen up's", starting
with "pen down". Note that the interval definition is in relative units. The absolute length if
the interval is controlled by the Pattern Interval Length environment variables below.
Pattern Interval length:
SB_LINETYPE_DASH_PATTERN_LEN = 10.0
SB_LINETYPE_DASHDOT_PATTERN_LEN = 35.0

2:21
12 Series

SB_LINETYPE_DASHDOUBLEDOT_PATTERN_LEN = 40.0
SB_LINETYPE_SHORTDASH_PATTERN_LEN = 5.0
SB_LINETYPE_TRACK_PATTERN_LEN = 20.0
SB_LINETYPE_SYSTEM5_PATTERN_LEN = 10.0
SB_LINETYPE_SYSTEM7_PATTERN_LEN = 23.0
Scaling of interval lengths and overall widths:
SB_LINETYPE_SCALE_FAC
If not set, the interval lengths and overall widths will NOT depend on the current zoom
factor
If set, the interval lengths and overall widths will depend on the current zoom factor and
also be multiplied with this scale
Note: Normally, symbols are drawn with solid lines only.

The environment variable TB_SHOW_SYMBOL_WITH_FULL_LINETYPE controls the
display of a symbol in the drawing:
If set to YES, the actual line type will be used
Otherwise, the symbol will be displayed as solid with same thickness as the actual line
type
The Line Type Name alias File

It is possible for the user to replace the system name of any line type with a name of his own
("alias" name). This name will then be used whenever the line type is presented or usersupplied. Such alias names should be defined in a simple "line type name translation" file
connected to the environment variable SB_LINETYPE_ALIAS.
The translation of a particular line type name is given by one line in the file. Such a line
should then consist of the system-name of the line type, followed by a separating colon (:)
and the user (alias) name. Comments starting with "//" will be ignored. The order of the lines
are irrelevant.
Below, an example of an alias file:
// comment 1
ShortDashedXwide : Short Dash XWide // comment 2
System5 : CIR
System6 : DECK
System7 : GIR-1
System8 : A0200-M
System9 : A60300-M
System15 : B15200-M
System16 : B15300-M
System22 : INSU-A0
System23 : INSU-A60
System24 : INSU-B15

2:22
12 Series

System25 : INSU-W2
System26 : INSU-B11
System27 : INSU-HEAT
2.2.7
Colours
The colours that are used by Drafting consist of a set of fixed standard colours. See Colour
Tables in Chapter Appendices, for a list of these colours. The colour values are for example
used when setting default values. See Drafting Default File Keywords in Chapter
Appendices.
2.3
Common Functions and Routines
2.3.1
Basic 2D Geometry Definition

Points, lines and arcs (up to full circles) are called basic geometry and can be defined by the
user in a various number of ways. Such an alternative is referred to as a point mode, line
mode or arc mode respectively. The different point, line and arc modes are described below.
In almost every situation where the user is requested to supply one of these basic entities,
the user has the opportunity to redefine the system-proposed mode. The system-proposed
mode depends on the circumstances and the kind of geometry to supply. Since some of the
point definitions require a line or an arc and some of the line and arc definitions, in turn,
require a point, the point definition is recursive. The same applies when defining lines and
arcs. This fact enables the user to define geometry in a true recursive fashion, without
having to explicitly create construction geometry in advance. The recursive depth is
unlimited. The geometry definition facilities will throughout this manual be referred to as
"GET POINT", "GET LINE", and "GET ARC", respectively, and should be interpreted as a
general way of defining basic geometry. Thus, when user-supplied basic geometry is
requested and the basic geometry definition is supported, the current invoked application
function will just refer to this facility without considering the way it was defined. In some
situations, the system requests an arbitrary segment which may be either a line or an arc.
The general way of defining segments is called "GET SEGMENT", and is merely a
combination of "GET LINE" and "GET ARC".
Point Definition
The different ways of defining a point, called point modes, are shown and selectable through
a toolbar that pops up when applicable.
ARC AT ANGLE
ARC CENTRE
AUTO POINT
CENTRE OF GRAVITY
NEAREST POINT ON SEGMENT
CURSOR POSITION (FREE)
DISTANCE ALONG
EVENT POINT
EXISTING POINT
INTERSECTION
KEY IN POINT

2:23
12 Series

MIDPOINT
NODE/END POINT
OFFSET FROM CURRENT
SYMBOL CONNECTION
Whenever the user is requested to supply a point, the user can redefine the systemproposed point mode just by selecting the desired point mode from the toolbar. The systemproposed point mode may be "cursor position", the last used point mode or some other
mode, depending mainly on the currently invoked function. The ADD OFFSET entry in the
pop-up toolbar is used in combination with an arbitrary point mode, in order to add a keyed
in offset to the point. When the system requests a point, the user may add an offset by
clicking this field prior to the definition and keying in the offset when the definition is
completed.
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode.

When in 2D point mode or 3D point mode, clicking the Right Mouse button will popup the
2D mode menu respectively the 3D point menu.
The 2D popup menu can also be used when capturing print areas for printing.
The functions in these menus correspond to the functions in the 2D point mode 3D point
mode toolbars.
Line Definition
The different ways of defining a line, called line modes, will after selecting Insert-Line
appear as a toolbar:
HORIZONTAL THROUGH A POINT
VERTICAL THROUGH A POINT
END POINTS
PARALLEL TO A LINE, AT DISTANCE
PERPENDICULAR TO A LINE, THROUGH A POINT
AT ANGLE TO A LINE, THROUGH A POINT
TANGENT TO ARC, THROUGH A POINT
TANGENT TO ARC, PERPENDICULAR TO A LINE
TANGENT TO ARC, PARALLEL TO A LINE
TANGENT TO TWO ARCS
Since the initial system-proposed line mode is always "EXISTING LINE", this mode will
appear in the toolbar. Whenever the user is requested to supply a line, the user can redefine
the system-proposed line mode just by selecting "LINE"and choose one of these alternative
from the toolbar.
Arc Definition
The different ways of defining an arc, called arc modes, will after selecting Insert-Arc appear
in a toolbar:
ARC THROUGH THREE POINTS
ARC, END POINTS + AMPLITUDE
ARC, END POINTS + RADIUS
ARC, POINT + RADIUS + TANGENT

2:24
12 Series

CIRCLE, CENTRE + RADIUS
CIRCLE, CENTRE + POINT ON EDGE
CIRCLE, TANGENT TO A LINE OR ARC + CENTRE
CIRCLE, TANGENT TO TWO LINES + RADIUS
CIRCLE, TANGENT TO THREE LINES
Since the initial system-proposed arc mode is always EXISTING ARC, this mode will not
be included in the toolbar. Whenever the user is requested to supply an arc, the user can
redefine the system-proposed arc mode just by selecting ARC and choose one of these
alternatives from the screen menu.
Segment Definition
The different ways of defining a segment equals the ways of defining lines and arcs.
Whenever the user is requested to supply an arbitrary segment, the user can redefine the
system-proposed mode just by selecting "LINE" or "ARC" and choosing one of the
alternatives from the toolbar. The initial system-proposed mode is always "EXISTING
SEGMENT".
2D Offset Input Format

When the user is prompted to key in an offset, three main input formats are accepted,
namely:
1. Delta values along the coordinate axes.
Format: du,dv (e.g. 100,50)
2. Length and angle.
Format: length, angle (e.g. 100,45D)
Angles must be followed by D (degrees) or R (radians).
3. Length and verbal direction.
Format: length, verbal direction (e.g. 100,N)
Verbal directions can be North, South, West, East, Right, Left, Up or Down.
Only the first letter is relevant. Surrounding and intervening spaces are accepted. The
comma can be replaced by space(s). The offset given as format (2) may be projected on the
u- or v-axis, by appending 'U' or 'V' as a third argument respectively.
Format: length, angle U (e.g. 100,45D U) length, angle V (e.g. 100,45D V)
The second and third arguments must be separated by at least one space.
The third argument is of course useful only in format (2) but will, nevertheless, be accepted
in any of the three formats.
2.3.2
3D Point Definition
The Drafting system offers a general way of defining 3D points. Tools like line/plane locking,
offset adding and verifying are
Implemented. Roughly, a 3D point is derived by:
1. Set line/plane lock, if desired, demand 3D offset adding, if desired (order unessential).
2. Define the basic point.
3. Apply lock, if set.
4. Add 3D offset, if demanded.

2:25
12 Series

Definitions
The "current" point refers to a specific 3D point in the drawing and is required by
most of the locking subfunctions and the 3D point definition mode "OFFSET FROM
CURRENT". In certain situations, the current point will initially be set by the system, in
others it will not. The user has always the opportunity to (re)define the current point for the
user's own purposes. A particular line or plane lock that initially has been set by the system
and for some reasons must not be reset by the user is called STATIC. An example of this is
when the systems requires a user-defined point that must lie on a predefined line; this line is
initially locked STATIC to meet this condition.
3D Request Toolbar
The tools available in the 3D point definition concept are listed in toolbar. By selecting ViewToolbars-3D Request, this toolbar will be visible. It is then possible to select a suitable
subfunction or switch to 2D mode (see below) by using the 2D point mode toolbar.
3 D Request modes
EVENT
INTERSECTION POINT OF CURVED HULL OBJECTS
KEYIN
OFFSET FROM CURRENT

(locking tools)
LOCK U
LOCK V
LOCK VIEW
LOCK YZ
LOCK XZ
LOCK XY
LOCK ANY LINE
LOCK EVENT LINE
LOCK EVENT PLANE
UNLOCK
(miscellaneous)
ADD (3D) OFFSET
VERIFY
SET CURRENT
The Usage of 2D Points

The 3D point definition may include user-supplied 2D points in arbitrary views supported by
the 2D point definition concept. By selecting one of the 2D point definition modes in the
toolbar, the system expects the user to define a 2D point in an arbitrary view. Note that the
(2D) OFFSET FROM CURRENT function means a 2D offset from the projection of the
current 3D point in a particular view. Since there may be several views in the drawing, the
user is here requested to indicate the view of interest before the (2D) offset can be given.
The proceeding action depends on the locking status prior to the 2D point definition as
follows:

2:26
12 Series

NO LOCK - This just means implicit line locking. The line will be perpendicular to the view
plane and passing through the 2D point in this view. Normally, a locking may be cancelled
only via the 'UNLOCK' subfunction, but here a subsequent Reject will also serve as unlock.
PLANE LOCK - This lock in combination with the 2D point and the identified view forms a
sufficient condition to derive a 3D point. The resulting 3D point will then be the intersection
between the locking plane and the line perpendicular to the view plane and passing through
the 2D point in this view.
LINE LOCK - This lock in combination with the 2D point and the identified view forms a
sufficient condition to derive a 3D point. The resulting 3D point will then be the point on the
locking line closest to the line perpendicular to the view plane and passing through the 2D
point in this view.
A natural way of defining a 3D point is to give two 2D points in different views: The first point
will then define the position of the 3D point projected in the first view and the second point
will define the depth. Note that the reversed order will not necessarily yield the same 3D
point.
Basic 3D Point Definition Modes

There are three basic ways of giving a 3D point, which are EVENT, KEYIN and OFFSET
FROM CURRENT. The EVENT mode requests the user to indicate an event point in an
arbitrary view (projection). To switch to 2D mode, just select one of the 2D point definition
modes in the toolbar.
The KEYIN mode prompts the user to key in the coordinates (x,y,z) of the point. To return to
the 3D request menu, just type <CR> or select cancel. The OFFSET FROM CURRENT
mode requires that the current point is set and produces the same result as
1. selecting the ADD OFFSET command and
2. defining a point equal to the current one. The offset command is added in the same
way as in the subfunction ADD OFFSET, see below.
Popup menu in 2D and 3D point mode.

When in 2D point mode or 3D point mode, clicking the Right Mouse button will popup the
2D mode menu respectively the 3D point menu.
The functions in these menus correspond to the functions in the 2D point mode 3D point
mode toolbars.
Locking Commands
Tools for plane and line locking are implemented. Most of the locking subfunctions require
that the current point is set. If not so, it can be set using the SET CURRENT subfunction
prior to the lock command. Note that these commands are ignored if the system has set an
initial STATIC lock. (plane lock)
Implies that the point to be defined will be projected on the plane. The resulting point will
then be the point on the locking plane closest to the given point (intersection between the
locking plane and a line through the given point and perpendicular to the locking plane).
LOCK VIEW: A plane through the current point. The desired plane (projection) is identified
by the user. LOCK EVENT PLANE: A plane through an event point and perpendicular to the
event vector. The desired event point is identified by the user. LOCKX, LOCKY, LOCKZ: The
current value of X, Y, Z respectively is locked. The locked plane will be highlighted in all
views by showing the normal vector of the plane starting at a point in the plane (line lock).

2:27
12 Series

Implies that the point to be defined will be projected on the line. The resulting point will then
be the point on the locking line closest to the given point (intersection between the locking
line and a plane through the given point and perpendicular to the locking line) LOCK U: A
line through the current point and parallel to the v-vector in a plane. The desired plane is
identified by the user.
LOCK V:
As LOCK U but parallel to the u-vector.
LOCK YZ:
A line through the current point and parallel to the X-cardinal

vector (1,0,0).
LOCK XZ:
A line through the current point and parallel to the Y-cardinal

vector (0,1,0).
LOCK XY:
A line through the current point and parallel to the Z-cardinal

vector (0,0,1).
LOCK EVENT LINE:
A line through an event point and parallel to the event vector.

The desired event point is identified by the user.
LOCK ANY LINE:
A line passing through the current point and a second point.

The second point is defined by the user (supported by the 3D
point concept). This lock tool in combination with OFFSET
FROM CURRENT enables the "hidden" subfunction
DISTANCE ALONG. The locked line will be highlighted in all
views.
UNLOCK:
This command cancels a previous lock, if any.
Add (3D) Offset

This facility allows the user to add an offset to the defined point, here called the basic point.
The offset subcommand shall be selected prior to the basic point definition and the offset is
supposed to be given after this definition. Depending on the lock status, three cases arise.
1. (no lock).
The basic point is highlighted.
The offset is requested in three dimensions (dx,dy,dz).
2. (plane lock)
The basic point is locked to the plane prior to the offset giving.
The u-v system with the locked point as origin and the coordinate axis parallel to the
plane will be highlighted.
A two-dimension offset (du,dv) is requested to secure that the resulting point

remains in the plane.
By typing <CR> the offset can be given in three dimensions, provided that the plane
lock is not static.
3. (line lock)
The basic point is locked to the line prior to the offset giving.
The locked point and a direction vector along the line is highlighted.
A one-dimension offset (dl) is requested to secure that the resulting point remains
on the line.
By typing <CR>, the offset can be given in three dimensions, provided that the line
lock is not static. Selecting OC means that no offset will be added.

2:28
12 Series

Set Current
This subfunction allows the user to (re)set the current point, e.g. prior to a lock setting. The
point is defined by the user (supported by the 3D point concept).
Verify
This tool allows the user to define a 3D point in an iterative way. The iteration continues until
the user accepts the resulting point. At each iteration step, the point so far is verified and
confirmed by the user. The verification works like this:
1. The user defines a 3D point.
2. The system verifies the point and asks the user if the point is accepted. If so, the user
answers YES and the definition is completed, otherwise the system will continue with
step (3).
3. The system makes the point the current one and lets the user define another 3D point.
Operation Complete, at this stage, means accept.
4. The system verifies the next point and asks the user to key in relevant coordinates
(XYZ), i.e. the satisfying coordinates of this point. Different answers result in different
actions exemplified below:
<CR>
<XYZ>
<YZ>
Keep all coordinates of the previous point. Go to step (3).
<X>
Keep X-coordinate of this point, keep Y- and Z-coordinate of the

previous point. Go to step (3).
Keep all coordinates of this point. Go to step (3).

Keep Y- and Z-coordinates of this point, keep X-coordinate of
previous point. Go to step (3).
Operation complete means that previous point is accepted.
2.3.3
Transformations
This facility is a tool used to transform subpictures or geometry items. It is also used when
modelling to describe a transformation in a certain view. The tool will normally be entered by
requesting the user to select an activity like scale, move etc. However, in some situations it
will be entered directly in dragging mode, i.e. the entity to transform will be connected to the
mouse for positioning in the drawing. Apart from this, the behaviour will be the same
independently of the invoking circumstances.
The transformation facility will throughout this manual be referred to as "PERFORM
TRANSFORMATION".
2.3.4
Capture
In some situations, e.g. in the restrict function, the user is allowed to identify drawing
information that lies inside (or outside) a rectangle, a polygon or a general area, built up by
contours. This facility will throughout this manual be referred to as "CAPTURE" and the
geometry identified in this fashion will be called "captured geometry". As default, any kind of
geometry will be captured but the user has the opportunity to specify exactly what kind of
geometry to capture (e.g. points, texts etc.)

2:29
12 Series

2.3.5
Multiple Selections
A number of functions are operating on a selection of geometry elements or structural
elements within a drawing, typically a transformation in one operation of many elements not
belonging to the same hierarchical picture element.
The functions that can work on a multiple selection are Trim, Extend, Transform, Delete
and Change Properties.
A multiple selection is created by selecting elements using a Ctrl+Left click or by using
filtering options in capture operations.
2.3.6
Projection
When projecting model information, a number of standard projections are used. These
values are included in the default information. It is also possible to define projections
interactively. The defining of projections will throughout the manual be referred to as
SELECT PROJECTION.
2.3.7
Automatic Positioning of a Text

A text can be positioned at a line at a default distance or in a symbol. The following criteria
has to be fulfilled for positioning at a line:
Automatic positioning must be on.
The distance between the closest line and the given position must be less than a
default value.
The difference in angle between the line and the text must be less than a default value.
The following criteria has to be fulfilled for positioning in a symbol:
The distance between the closest symbol and the given position must be less than a
default value.
The symbol must have been defined with text position no. 1.
The presentation of the text in the symbol is completely given by the text code in the symbol
definition. It is interpreted by the system in order to give the following results:
1. Flushed left.
2. Centred.
3. Centred in the u-direction.
2.3.8
Automatic Positioning of a Symbol

A symbol can be positioned on any geometry (line, arc or contour). The following
criteria has to be fulfilled in this case:
The symbol must have been defined with connection point no. 1. The connection code
is interpreted by the system to give the following results:
No adjust
Parallel and at a default distance from the geometry

2:30
12 Series

Parallel to the geometry.
At the geometry.
At the closest end point of the geometry.
Parallel and at the closest end point of the geometry.
Parallel to and at the geometry.
2.3.9
The distance between the closest geometry and the given position (connection point no
1) must be less than the default value (SYMB_AUT_DIST in the default file).
Perform Transformation
When using this tool, a various number of activities are available. These activities are
invoked from the Transformation toolbar. Furthermore, two kinds of dynamic
transformations are supported, namely dynamic move (often referred to as dragging) and
dynamic rotate. These are invoked by first toggling the desired dynamic mode via OPTION
and then just picking the item. At entrance, the dynamic mode is initiated to move. The
system prompt will inform you about the current dynamic mode. Entities containing much
graphic information will probably result in bad performance during a dynamic
transformation. For this reason, it is possible just to show the envelope of the entity during
the dynamic transformation. If a permanent envelope display is desired, this can be set by
the ENVELOPE function before invoking the transform function. The transform session is
normally terminated by OPERATION COMPLETE meaning "I'm ready, accept the
transformation". It can also be interrupted by means of CANCEL or QUIT, requesting the
transformation to be cancelled.
The Transform Activities
Below, the different activities are listed.
The purpose and interaction of each activity is documented in Operator's Instructions.
Basic Transformations
Scale
Move Delta
Move 2 Positions
Rotate Delta
Rotate 2 Positions
Rotate Predefined
Mirror U
Mirror V
Combined Transformations
Parallel
Transform 4 positions
Same As
Along Curve
Snap

2:31
12 Series

2.3.10
Miscellaneous
Lock U
Lock V
Centre
Form Detection
Select Projection
Purpose
The projection selection is used in all cases when 3D models are to be presented in a
drawing. It defines the view that the observer will get when he looks at the model.
Operation
There are several possibilities when defining the projection:
2.3.11
SAME AS VIEW:
Indicate an existing view in the drawing, and the

projection will be the same as in the indicated view.
POINT VECTOR:
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and a vector

defining the normal to that plane.
THREE POINTS:
Indicate a point in the projection plane, and two vectors

defining the U-axis and the V-axis of the projection
plane.
TWO CURSOR POSITIONS:
Two cursor indications in an existing view defines the

U-axis of the new projection, the V-vector is the same
as the normal to the projection indicated. A third cursor
indication defines the normal, and thereby the observer
side, of the new projection plane.
3D ROTATE:
Starting from an existing view the user defines the new

projection by rotating around the co-ordinate axes. This
can be done either in predefined steps, or in arbitrary
steps via keyboard input. The resulting projection is
shown with a small co-ordinate system in the drawing.
PREDEFINED PROJECTION:
There is a possibility to define 5 standard projections in

the default handling, and each of these is displayed
and is accessible as a direct choice.
Model attributes obtained by Tools-Inquiry-Model

It is possible to configure which attributes will be shown in the Tools-Inquiry-Model function.
This is performed by Object Properties tab in the Setup program, see Basic Users Guide.
2.3.12
Selection of Model Name and Name Info

In certain contexts when the system expects the user to supply some text information, there
is a possibility to extract this information from the drawing (either directly stored or derivable
from) instead of keying it in. In these situations, there are buttons available for this purpose

2:32
12 Series

(specific dialog buttons, Multiple Choice buttons or the Options button). The type of
information that can be extracted is:
General Model information
Subpicture (e.g. model) name
Model information is extracted from a user-indicated model in the drawing. Once selected,
the model is highlighted and the general model information is presented in a dialog box. The
row of interest is then selected (and possibly edited) to be passed over to the invoking
function. Normally, such a row of information is made up of a "header" and a "body",
separated by a colon. Click Options to toggle the exclusion of the "header" in the resulting
row of information.
Subpicture name is extracted from a user-indicated subpicture in the drawing. Once
selected, the name is passed over to the invoking function.
Examples of functions accepting extracted information is:
2.3.13
Annotate/General Note
Annotate/Position Number
Modify/Copy/Text
Insert Text
Creating Drawing Forms

Normally, each separate company has a unique layout of its drawing forms and normally
several different sizes exist. Standard drawing forms can be established by the system and
stored in the standards data bank of the system. This section describes how the system can
be used to establish standard forms. When using a form, the name of the current drawing
can automatically be added to the form. Just add text $2000 anywhere on the drawing form,
this will be exchanged by the name of the current drawing. A created picture can be
converted into a drawing form by using the function Tools-Drawing form-Save.
Creating a New Drawing Form

First, create a new drawing with the function File-New. Give the drawing an arbitrary name.
This name must not be equal to the final name of the drawing form. By using the 2D Drafting
functions (Insert-Line, Insert-Text etc.) it is possible to create the layout of the drawing form.
So far, the system will consider it as an ordinary drawing, even if it is stored. Before being
used as a form the picture must be converted into a drawing form. This is done with the
function Tools-Drawing form-Save.
Changing an Old Drawing Form

By using the function Tools-Drawing form-Open, an old drawing form can be fetched from
the Form data bank and converted into an ordinary drawing. The drawing will be given the
name F_<drawing form name>. The created drawing can now be handled in the same way
as when creating a new drawing form.
2.3.14
Creating Note and Position Number Symbols

The functions Annotate/General Note, Annotate/Position Number and Annotate/
AutoNote/Pipe normally expects that note and position number symbols are available in
the standard symbol font #21 (see Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System in Chapter
Appendices). These symbols are defined in the same way as any symbol. The symbol
number must be in the interval 31 - 60 (default 31) for note symbols and in the interval 61 -

2:33
12 Series

80 (default 61) for position number symbols. For note symbols consisting of a start symbol
and an end symbol with connecting lines in between, the intervals are 81 -90 and 91 - 100
respectively. There is no default number for start/end symbols. It is however possible to
change these symbols in the default handling of the system (see Drafting Default File
Keywords in Chapter Appendices) or when activating the functions.
It is possible to extend the intervals for the different symbols mentioned above. For this
purpose, an alternative symbol font for Note and/or Position Number symbols should be
used. The number of this alternative font is #41 and the use of it is dictated by the Drafting
default
keywords
NOTE_SYMB_EXTENDED_RANGE
and
POSNO_SYMB_EXTENDED_RANGE respectively. The alternative symbol font for Note
and Position Number symbols is organized as follows:
Interval
Designation
1-400
Note symbols
401-500
Note "start" symbols
501-600
Note "end" symbols
601-999
Position number symbols
For further details, see Drafting Default File Keywords in Chapter Appendices.
Note Symbol Characteristics

The size of the symbol is determined by the size of the text. A height tolerance factor (>1)
expressed in text height units is used to determine the space above and below the text. A
factor of 1.5 means that the space below and above the text is equal to 0.25 * (text height).
A width tolerance factor expressed in text height units is used to determine the space before
and after the text. A factor of 0.5 means that the space before and after the text is 0.5 * (text
height). Both these factors can be changed. The definition of a note symbol consists of:
Symbol number
Symbol layout
2 connection points (may be identical) where to connect the symbol to the reference
line (connection code irrelevant)
2 text positions where the beginning of the text is to be positioned.

(textcode = 2 means uniform scaling of the symbol)
1 text position defining the size of the symbol
TEXT_NO = 3
MAX_HEIGHT = maximum height of symbol in symbol space units
MAX_WIDTH = maximum width of symbol in symbol space units
The definition of a start/end symbol of a note consists of:
Symbol number
Symbol layout
1 connection point where to connect the reference line (connection code irrelevant)
2 connection points where to attach the lines connecting the start and the end symbols
of the note.
1 text position where the beginning of the text is to be positioned.
1 text position defining the size of the symbol
TEXT_NO = 2

2:34
12 Series

MAX_HEIGHT = maximum height of symbol in symbol space units

MAX_WIDTH = maximum width of symbol in symbol space units
Position Number Symbol Characteristics

The height of the symbol and the minimum text height are given by default values which
both can be changed. The definition of a position number symbol consists of:
Symbol number
Symbol layout
One or four connection points (may be identical) where to connect the symbol to the
reference line (connection code irrelevant). If only one connection point, then the
symbol is placed left justified at a default distance above the last reference line
otherwise at the connection point.
One text position where the beginning of the text is to be positioned (Text code: see Aut).
2.3.15
Creating Hatch Patterns

Normally, a hatch pattern consists of lines at certain angles and distances. These patterns
are supported by the system and angles and distances can be changed in the default file.
User-defined hatch patterns can, however also be created and used. This is done by the 2D
Drafting functions in the system. Before it is saved, it must belong to the same level 3
subpicture. The function "Tools-Subpicture-Store as std hatch pattern" is used for saving a
pattern. A standard book is used for this purpose (standard book No. 2). When a pattern
shall be updated, the pattern is added to the current drawing as a level 3 subpicture with the
function "Tools-Insert Std hatch pattern".
2.3.16
Default Settings
The activities of the system, in a number of respects, are controlled by default settings
initialized at the start-up of the system. The user has the possibility to adapt the system to
different working conditions in two ways: either changing default values one by one or using
a default file. Apart from this, most of the defaults can be changed inside the function(s) that
utilizes this particular default.
The default settings for Drafting is stored in a default file. The name of this file is chosen by
the user. The file can be created or modified either by using a text editor or by storing the
current defaults when running the system. If a default file name is assigned to the
environment variable SBD_DEF1, the settings in this file will be read when the program
starts. A default file can also be read into the program session at the user's command.
The file consists of an arbitrary number default statements, one per line. The order of the
statements is irrelevant. A default statement consists of a keyword and a value, separated
by a colon (:) or an equal sign (=). The keyword denotes a specific system default that will
receive the given value.
For a list of all keywords used in the Drafting Default file, see Drafting Default File Keywords
in Chapter Appendices.
2.3.17
Geometry Linetype Change When Printing

While printing it is now possible to change linetypes of geometries in the printout without
changing the drawing itself.
This is accomplished by creating a file with the below SELECTION syntax and setting the
SBD_LSFILE variable to the path of this file.

2:35
12 Series

Selection
Purpose
Change the linetype on certain model geometries depending on layer, type and/or colour
when printing.
Syntax:
SELECTION < LAYER> < COLOUR > < TYPE> </LINESTYLE>
Description
The Selection command allows users to change linetypes of geometries at the printing
moment. The changes will be visible on the printed papers but the actual drawing will not be
changed. To change the linetype of geometries a user has to select them by using colour,
type and layer of the lines that are to change. Any one or all of these criteria can be set as
wildcards by giving an empty string as input ( ). Which linetype to change to is then
defined by Linetype.
Command Qualifiers
COLOUR
TYPE
LAYER
/LINESTYLE
Which colour to search for.

Which type of model to search for.
On which layer the geometries should be located.
The linetype the selected geometries should change into.
Example:
SELECTION, -1330, Blue, Equipment /LINESTYLE SolidXWide;
SELECTION ,, Equipment /LINESTYLE SolidXWide;
2.3.18
MouseWheelZoom
Turning the mouse wheel will produce a zooming effect into or out from the drawing canvas
depending on the direction of the mouse wheel turn. Turning the mouse wheel in the
direction from the user will produce a zoom in and turning it towards the user will produce a
zoom out. The zoom will vary depending on the position of the mouse pointer over the
drawing canvas and the increment setting in Tools > Preferences > Miscellaneous.
In Tools > Preferences > Miscellaneous, the mouse wheel zoom can be turned off or on.
The increment setting can also be changed between 1 and 20. This setting will effect the
zoom level of the mouse wheel zoom. The higher the setting, the bigger the zoom effect will
be.
The zooming centre is the cursor position.
Zoom Performance
Holding down the Ctrl key at the same time as rolling the mouse wheel will speed up the
operation by only drawing a subset of the line primitives. The quality level can be controlled

2:36
12 Series

in Tools > Preferences > Miscellaneous form; a greater value will draw fewer lines and
thereby increase performance. The Delay is the amount of time after the user stopped
rolling the mouse until a normal repaint with full quality is made. This also applies to Middle
Button Drag (panning).
2.3.19
Dimensioning
Measurements are divided into the following main categories:
Linear
Angle
Radius
Diameter
Coordinate
Curve Length
Area
The dimensioning functions make use of a variety of parameters that control the layout of
the resulting measurements. When starting up a session, all these parameters are initialized
from the default file of Drafting. Keywords and system values of these parameters are listed
in Appendix G, Drafting Default File Keywords.
The layout parameter settings of the Linear, Angle, Radius and Diameter measurements do
not normally influence each other. However, the Coordinate, Curve Length and Area
measurements share relevant layout parameters with the Linear set.
During a session, all parameters can be accessed and modally redefined
inside the dimensioning function(s) that utilizes the particular parameter
by invoking the function 'Format-Defaults'
Below, the different dimensioning categories will be illustrated. All layout parameters
together with their purpose are listed and exemplified. A particular parameter is denoted by
its corresponding keyword in the default file, where the prefix LIN_, ANG_, RAD_ and DIA_
denote Linear, Angle, Radius and Diameter dimension respectively.
Common Layout Parameters

The layout parameters below are valid for most of the dimensioning categories.
Number of Decimals to Present in Calculated Measures

Keywords:
DIM_LIN_DEC
DIM_ANG_DEC
DIM_RAD_DEC
DIM_DIA_DEC
Arrow Type
(1) Small
(2) Medium
(3) Wide
(4) Slash
(5) Dot
Keywords:
DIM_LIN_ARROW
DIM_ANG_ARROW

2:37
12 Series

DIM_RAD_ARROW
DIM_DIA_ARROW
Arrow Size (mm symbol space)

Keywords:
DIM_LIN_SYMBH
DIM_ANG_SYMBH
DIM_RAD_SYMBH
DIM_DIA_SYMBH
Height of the Measure Text (mm)

Keywords:
DIM_LIN_TEXTH
DIM_ANG_TEXTH
DIM_RAD_TEXTH
DIM_DIA_TEXTH
2D Linear Measurement
2D Linear measurements are divided into three types, namely
Normal
Chain
Staircase
Each type may be presented either horizontally, vertically or parallel to an arbitrary line.
Normal
Presents the distances between successive measure points, along a common dimension
line. If the normal measurement contains only two measure points (i.e. a single measured
distance) it is called single, otherwise combined. A single measurement may be presented
in four different ways.
Chain
Presents the distances between a base point and a number of successive measure points,
along a common dimension line. The base point equals the first supplied point.
Staircase
Presents the distances between a base point and a number of successive measure points.
The distances are presented along a common direction, but along separate dimension lines.
The base point equals the first supplied point.
-
Layout Parameters
All layout parameters are described below under separate headings:
Distance Between the Dimension Line and the Measure Text

Keyword: DIM_LIN_DLT
Reference Line Gap

The gap between a measure point and start of the witness line.
Keyword: DIM_LIN_GAP
Reference Line Excess

The excess at the end of the witness line.

2:38
12 Series

Keyword: DIM_LIN_EXC
-
Way of Placing Texts in Normal Measurements

(1) Parallel to dimension line, above
(2) Parallel to dimension line, "splitting" this line into two equal halves
(3) Perpendicular to dimension line, above Perpendicular to dimension line, above Perpendicular to
dimension line, above
Keyword: DIM_LIN_NORM_PLT
-
Way of Placing Texts in Chained Measurements

(1) Along dimension line, centred.
(2) Along dimension line, at arrow.
(3) Perpendicular to dimension line, at arrow.
(4) Perpendicular to dimension line, in front of witness line.
Keyword: DIM_LIN_CHAIN_PLT
-
Type of Action when Space for Measure Text is Insufficient

(1) Shrink text
(2) Place text perpendicular to the dimension line
(3) No adjust
Keyword: DIM_LIN_FIT
-
Minimum Height allowed when Shrinking the Measure Text

Keyword: DIM_TXT_MINH
Way of Presenting Single Measurements
(1)
(2)
Text inside, both arrows outside
(3)
Text outside, one arrow inside and the other outside
(4)
Text outside, both arrows outside
(5)
Mould line dimensioning. This presentation is specific for symbolic hull views. The
presentation is similar to (1) above, but considering the mould line of hull
components. The measurements are calculated from the actual mould line of the
cross section of a hull component instead of from one of the edge contours. The
dimensioning arrows are then placed at the mould line on the opposite side of the
material. If the mould line does not coincide with any of the sides two dimensioning
arrows are set in opposite directions, both located at the mould line.
Keyword: DIM_LIN_PRES
-
Chain Gap
The gap between a witness line and the succeeding dimension line in a chain
measurement. The gap can, however, not be greater than half the length of the dimension
line.
Keyword: DIM_LIN_CLEAR

2:39
12 Series

Staircase Factor
This factor multiplied with the text height gives the distance between the dimension lines in
a staircase measurement.
Keyword: DIM_LIN_STEP
Miscellaneous Factors
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the distance between the arrow and the
measure text in a single measurement when this text is placed outside (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC1
This factor multiplied with the height of the measure text gives the gap between the
measure text and the split dimension line in a normal measurement.
Keyword: DIM_FAC2
This factor multiplied with the height of the measure text gives the distance between the
rotated text and the end of the witness line in a chained measurement (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC3
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the minimum distance between the arrow
and the measure text when placed inside.
Keyword: DIM_FAC4
start of the diameter symbol and the text (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC5
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the excess of the dimension line in a single
measurement with the arrow placed outside (flipped) and the measure text placed either
inside or at the opposite end (see Keyword: DIM_LIN_PRES).
Keyword: DIM_FAC8
3D Linear Measurement
A 3D Linear measurement presents the distance between successive 3D measure points in
an arbitrary view. The measurement is always of type normal with direction parallel to the
first two measure points given. See above for more information about normal linear
measurements.
3D Axis Parallel Measurement

An Axis-parallel measurement presents the distance between two 3D measure points, in an
arbitrary view, along one of the cardinal axis and is therefore of type (normal) single.
Distance to Plane Measurement

Presents the distance from an arbitrary 3D point to a principal plane, i.e. a plane
perpendicular to any of the cardinal axis. The measurement is of type chain with two
measure points, where one is implicit. Hence there is only one witness line.
Angle Measurements
This section describes Angle measurements generated from the 2D and 3D Angle
dimensioning function. The angle may be presented in the range [0,180] degrees or in the

2:40
12 Series

range [180,360] degrees. Concerning small angles, the arrows may be flipped and the
measure arc somewhat extended. Reference lines are included if needed.
-
Layout Parameters
All the layout parameters are described below under separat headings:
Reference Line Gap

The gap between a leg of the angle and start of the reference line.
Keyword: DIM_ANG_GAP
Reference Line Excess

The excess at the end of the reference line.
Keyword: DIM_ANG_EXC
Radius Measurements
This section describes Radius measurements generated from the Radius dimensioning
function. Radius measurements are divided into three types, straight, knuckled and cross.
Straight
A straight reference line, pointing at the edge of the arc. The measure text is placed parallel
to this line.
Knuckled
A knuckled reference line. The first line part points at the edge of the arc, the second part is
a horizontal line with the measure text placed parallel to this line.
Cross
A cross-reference line between the centre of the arc and a point on the edge. The measure
text is placed parallel to this line. The text and the arrows may be presented in four different
ways.
Layout Parameters
All the layout parameters are described below under separate headings:
Distance Between Reference Line and Measure Text

Keyword: DIM_RAD_DLT
- Way of Presenting a Cross Radius Measure

1. Text inside, both arrows inside
2. Text inside, both arrows outside
3. Text outside, one arrow inside and the other outside
4. Text outside, both arrows outside
Keyword: DIM_RAD_PRES
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the distance between the measure text and

2:41
12 Series

1. the arrow in a straight radius measurement

2. the knuckle in a knuckled radius measurement.
3. the arrow in a cross radius measurement when this text is placed outside (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC1
and the measure text when placed inside in a cross radius measurement.
Keyword: DIM_FAC4
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the excess of the reference line in a cross
radius measurement with the arrow placed outside (flipped) and the measure text placed
either inside or at the opposite end (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC8
Diameter Measurements
This section describes Diameter measurements generated from the Diameter dimensioning
function. Diameter measurements are divided into three types, straight, knuckled and cross.
Straight
A straight reference line, pointing at the edge of the circle. The measure text is placed
parallel to this line.
Knuckled
A knuckled reference line. The first line part points at the edge of the circle, the second part
is a horizontal line with the measure text placed parallel to this line.
Cross
A cross-reference line between two edge points of the circle and through the centre. The
measure text is placed parallel to this line. The text and the arrows may be presented in four
different ways.
Layout parameters
The layout parameters are listed below under separate headings:
Distance between Reference Line and Measure Text

Keyword: DIM_DIA_DLT
Way of Presenting a Cross Diameter Measure

(1) Text inside, both arrows inside
(2) Text inside, both arrows outside
(3) Text outside, one arrow inside and the other outside
(4) Text outside, both arrows outside
Keyword: DIM_DIA_PRES
-
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the distance between the measure text and
1. the arrow in a straight diameter measurement

2:42
12 Series

2. the knuckle in a knuckled diameter measurement

3. the arrow in a cross diameter measurement when this text is placed outside (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC1
and the measure text when placed inside in a cross diameter measurement.
Keyword: DIM_FAC4
start of the diameter symbol and the text.
Keyword: DIM_FAC5
This factor multiplied with the arrow length gives the excess of the reference line in a cross
diameter measurement with the arrow placed outside (flipped) and the measure text placed
either inside or at the opposite end (see DIM).
Keyword: DIM_FAC8
Coordinates Measurements
This section describes Coordinate measurements generated from the 3D Coordinate and
Weight & COG dimensioning functions.
3D Coordinate Measurement
A 3D Coordinate measurement presents a 3D point in an arbitrary view by means of a
reference line and the x-, y- and z-coordinates of the point inside a box.
Weight & COG Measurement

A Weight & COG measurement presents a centre of gravity in an arbitrary view by means of
a box containing the corresponding coordinates plus the weight, a reference line and a COG
mark.
Layout Parameters
The Unit in which the Coordinates shall be Presented

See Coordinate Translation in Chapter Appendices
Keyword:s
DIM_COORDX_TRANSLATION
DIM_COORDY_TRANSLATION
DIM_COORDZ_TRANSLATION
The Unit in which the Weight shall be Presented

0 = kg
3 = ton
-1 = hg
-3 = g
Keyword: UNIT_WEIGHT_FAC

2:43
12 Series

Parameters, Shared with the Linear Measurement Set

Keywords: DIM_LIN_DEC
DIM_LIN_SYMBH
DIM_LIN_ARROW (only for 3D Coordinate measurement)
Layout of Curve Length Measurements

This section describes Curve length measurements generated from the 2D Curve length
and 3D Curve length dimensioning functions. A Curve length measurement presents the
distance along a curve or a part of a curve, in an arbitrary view.
Layout Parameters, Shared with the Linear Measurement Set

Keywords: DIM_LIN_DEC
DIM_LIN_SYMBH
DIM_LIN_ARROW
DIM_LIN_GAP
DIM_LIN_EXC
Layout of Area Measurements

This section describes Area measurements generated from the Area dimensioning
functions. The Area measurement presents the area of a given plane figure.
Layout Parameters
The Unit in which the Area Shall Be Presented

0 = mm2
1 = cm2
2 = dm2
3 = m2
6 = km2
Keyword: UNIT_AREA_FAC
-
Parameters Shared with the Linear Measurement Set

Keyword: DIM_LIN_DEC
Adding Tolerances
A tolerance may be appended to the measure text in the following categories:
Linear
Angle
Diameter
Radius
There are two types of tolerances, symmetric and unsymmetric.

2:44
12 Series

Symmetric
The symmetric tolerance consists of a single value, denoting the uniform deviation from the
measured value. The height of the tolerance text will be the same as the height of the
measure text.
Unsymmetric
The unsymmetric tolerance consists of two values, denoting the upper and lower deviation
from the measured value. The height of the tolerance text will be half the height of the
measure text.
Layout Parameters
This factor multiplied with the height of the measure text gives the space between the
measure text and the tolerance text in a symmetric tolerance.
Keyword: DIM_FAC6
This factor multiplied with the height of the measure text gives the space between the
measure text and the tolerance text in an unsymmetric tolerance.
Keyword: DIM_FAC7
This factor multiplied with the height of the tolerance text gives the interline space between
the upper and lower tolerance limits in an unsymmetric tolerance.
Keyword: DIM_FAC9
2.3.20
Hull Mould Line Dimensioning

This function will measure the distances from the mould line of hull sections. The arrow
symbol is placed so that it indicates the material side. In cases where no material side is
determined, two arrow symbols are placed. The Mould Line Dimensioning is only to be used
in symbolic hull views. If selected and dimensioning is made in another type of view, the
default layout for normal linear measures is used.
The layout is activated by clicking the Mould Line button,

box of Linear Dimension.

2:45
, selected in the dialog
12 Series

When used the Dimension layout can look as example below. The starting or ending arrow
line
length
can
be
controlled
by
changing
the
Hull
Default
Value
MOULD_LINE_ARROW_LENGTH.
2.3.21
Import/export using 2D DXF

Import and export of 2D DXF format can be done on drawings. During export, the system
entities are converted in the following way:
AVEVA Marine entity
DXF entity.
Point segment
Point.
Line segment
Line.
Arc segment
Arc.
Contour
Polyline.
Text
Text (standard font is used).
Hatch pattern
Block of lines etc.

2:46
12 Series

Symbols, notes
Linear, Radius
dimensions
Exploded into single entities.

and
Angle
Linear, Radius and Angle dimensions
Chain and Staircase
Divided into single dimensions.
Other dimensions or edited

dimensions
Exploded into single entities.
Colour
Translated by colour code.
Line types
Translated by a line table and name (line thickness not

implemented).
Layer
Layer according to control file (see below).
The resulting entities will belong to layer 0. The DXF postprocessor converts a DXF file to a
General drawing. The link is based on R12. There is also partial support of R13 if a drawing
is saved with the command SaveAsR12 in Autocad before exported to the system.
For import, the DXF file is converted in the following way:
DXF entity
AVEVA Marine entity.
Point
Point.
Line
Line segment.
Arc
Arc segment.
Circle
Contour.
Text
Text (standard text font is used).
Polyline
Contour.
Linear, Radius
dimensions
and
Angle
Linear, Radius and Angle dimensions.
Solid
Approximated to the boundary contour.
Block
Results in a component.
Colour code
Colours 1-7 are translated, 8-255 results in default

colours.
Line type
The most common line types are recognised.
Layer
Integer number layers are translated.
The following remarks can also be made:

1. It is not distinguished between the different kind of states for a layer.
2. Only 2D information is handled.
3. It is possible to scale the text. However, the height and length are proportional.
4. DXF does not use line thickness. This is normally realized by different colours.
5. Attributes are not handled since they normally only has a meaning in the originating
system.

2:47
12 Series

6. Note that lines having a complex line type will be drawn only as solid lines. See COM.
Environment Variables
The following variable affects the way the DXF file is created on export:
DXFOUT_TEXT_WIDTH
Scaling factor, e.g. 1.5, which scales the text width.
DXFOUT_EXPLODE_DIM
The dimensions will be output as plain geometry if the

variable is set to any value.
DXFOUT_HIDDLAY
Hull specific layers, which are hidden by default, will be

output if the variable is set to any value.
DXF_LTSCALE
It is possible to override the DXF file value of

$LTSCALE with this setting.
The following variable affects the way the drawing is created on import:
DXFIN_TEXT_HEIGHT
Scaling factor, e.g. 1.5, which scales the text height.

Since the text font is proportional, the text width is also
scaled.
Layer Control in DXF Export

The objective of this function is to create a user defined layer handling for the DXF export.
The functionality is applicable if the user has established the layer control file as described.
Without this function all entities are put in layer 0. The main idea behind the function is to
have specific layers for dimensions, texts, stiffeners, etc. The user is able to control that
each model type is assigned to one or several layer names. It is also possible to specify that
a model type with a certain combination of colour, line thickness and line type should be put
on a specific DXF layer. Each entry in the layer control file should have five columns with the
following content:
1. Keyword for the model type; e.g. PLATES, STIFFENER, DIMENSION
2. The name of the layer to be assigned to all entities of the specified type, line type,
thickness and colour.
3. A colour code or the keyword "ALL"
4. A keyword for the line type or the keyword "ALL".
5. A line thickness or the keyword "ALL".
How to Set Up the Layer Control File

A layer control file is created by the user which will establish a correspondence between a
model entity (including line type, colour and thickness) and a user layer name. The name of
the control file can be arbitrarily chosen. The file name (plus optional directory path) should
be assigned to the environment or logical variable DXF_LAYER_CTRL. (The format of the
layer control handling from previous versions are still available. In order to use the old
functionality, the layer control file should be assigned to DXF_LAYER_CTRL_OLD.)
The different type of model types or annotation types that are handled are the following:
PLATES
STIFFENERS
FLANGES

2:48
12 Series

PILLARS
HOLES
BRACKETS
NOTCHES
CUTOUTS
MEASURES
SEAMS
PROFILES
PIPES
EQUIPMENT
STRUCTURES
VENTIATION
CABLEWAY
ROOM
MEASURES
NOTES
SYMBOLS
TEXTS
DEFAULT
Those different types are also the valid keywords that could be used in the control file. The
DEFAULT type maps those entities that are not handled by the other types. It will take the
remaining entities and map it to a default layer. This default type can also have several
entries allowing for different linetypes and colours. It is possible to specify up to 20 different
layers of each model type. An example of a layer control file with a specification of the valid
key words can be found in Section System Layers, see Example of a DXF Layer Control File
in Chapter Appendices.
Mapping Line Types in DXF Export

It is possible to map AVEVA Marine line types into any of Autodesk line types. There are
some predefined Autodesk line types patterns hard coded in the Marine system. It is also
possible to load any of Autodesk line type patterns stored in line type definition files (.lin
extension).
Predefined Patterns
AVEVA Marine implements 11 Autodesk patterns. The table below shows how the marine
line types are mapped into Autodesk patterns by default.
Marine ltype
Adesk ltype
Dashed
AvevaDashed
DashedWide
AvevaDashed
DashedXWide
AvevaDashed
DashedDotted
AvevaDashedDotted
DashedDottedWide
AvevaDashedDotted

2:49
12 Series

Marine ltype
Adesk ltype
DashedDottedXWide
AvevaDashedDotted
DashedDoubleDotted
AvevaDashedDoubleDotted
DashedDoubleDottedWide
DashedDoubleDottedXWide
ShortDashed
AvevaShortDashed
ShortDashedWide
AvevaShortDashed
ShortDashedXWide
AvevaShortDashed
DashedAndSolid
AvevaDashedAndSolid
System15
AvevaSystem15
System22
AvevaSystem22
System25
AvevaSystem25
System16
AvevaSystem16
System17
AvevaSystem17
System5
ByLayer
System6
ByLayer
System7
ByLayer
System8
ByLayer
System9
ByLayer
System16
ByLayer
System23
ByLayer
System24
ByLayer
Dotted
ByLayer
DottedWide
ByLayer
DottedXWide
ByLayer
FineDotted
ByLayer
FineDottedWide
ByLayer
FineDottedXWide
ByLayer
Chained
ByLayer
ChainedWide
ByLayer

2:50
12 Series

Marine ltype
Adesk ltype
ChainedXWide
ByLayer
DoubleChained
ByLayer
DoubleChainedWide
ByLayer
DoubleChainedXWide
ByLayer
TripleChained
ByLayer
TripleChainedWide
ByLayer
TripleChainedXWide
ByLayer
LineStyle-201
ByLayer
Solid
ByLayer
SolidWide
ByLayer
SolidXWide
ByLayer
Modifying Line Types Mapping

The default mapping can be modified in the DXF Export dialogue box. The section
Mapping options contains a button named Linetypes. Click this button to display the
current linetypes mapping table:

2:51
12 Series

In this dialogue box the user can select an appropriate AVEVA linetype and assign one of
the predefined dxf patterns.
-
Importing Autodesk Patterns

By clicking Import dxf linetypes we can import any of the Autodesk patterns stored in .lin
files. Autodesk patterns can be divided into 3 sets:
All of these kinds of patterns are supported by AVEVA Marine Dxf export functionality. The
Complex Shape Patterns contain a reference to a symbol stored in the shape definition files
(.shp). In a normal case the required .shp files are stored by Autodesk together with line

2:52
12 Series

type definition files. However, it is possible to select a different location for a given .shp file
during the line type import process. If the system failed to find a required .shp file in the line
type file directory then the user is asked to browse to that file manually:
If the .shp file could not be found it is possible to skip this particular line type definition or
skip all Complex Shape Patterns definitions.
-
Restoring Defaults
Sometimes it is necessary to restore the default linetype mapping table. It can be done by
clicking the Restore defaults button. The system will restore the default mapping table
(only predefined linetype patterns used) and can also delete all loaded pattern definitions
(option).
Saving Settings for Future Use

The line types mapping data can be stored for future use. To enable this option you need to
set DXF_LTYPE_CTRL environment variable. The variable should point to the disk file
where the setting will be stored.
Example:
DXF_LTYPE_CTRL = c:\aveva\dxfexport\ltypes.xml
The data is loaded by the system at first dxf export startup and stored whenever user click
OK in the Mapping data dialogue box.
The data is stored in native xml format so it gives an option to modify the file manually.
However it is not recommended by AVEVA to modify that file manually as it contains loaded
patterns definitions. Changes in that area could result in wrong export of dxf file.
2.3.22
Import / Export using IGES

General
Import and export of IGES format files can be done on drawings. Only 2D data is handled.
IGES Entities Handled

The following 2D IGES entities are presently handled:
100
Circular arc.
102
Composite curve.

2:53
12 Series

104
Conic arc.
106
Hatching (form 31-32).
106
Centre line (form 20-21).
106
Witness line (form 40).
110
Line.
124
Transformation.
202
Angular dimensioning.
206
Diameter dim.
212
General note.
214
Leader.
216
Linear dimension.
218
Ordinate dimension.
222
Radius dimensioning.
308
Subfigure definition.
402
Associative group 7 (unordered without backpointers).
408
Subfigure instance.
Note: That lines having a complex line type will be drawn only as solid lines. See COM
2.3.23
Export of 3D DXF
This function can export data in a DXF file with faceted objects. The program creates two
different type of DXF entities, namely 3DFACE or POLYLINE mesh. The box and general
cylinder primitive are generated with 3DFACE and spherical segment, cone, torus and
rotational primitive are generated as POLYLINE mesh.
BLOCKS at two levels are used to create a hierarchical data structure. Block names are
equal to the model names. Some attribute info are also transferred for the blocks; Object
type, Posno, Assembly name. Also different layers are used for different types of objects.
The DXF files become very big even for a moderate drawing size and it is a good idea to
limit the size. The level of detail determines how the faceting of primitives are made (all data
in DXF are plane sides). E.g. a pipe is drawn with 8 sides for detail = 2, and detail = 4
(highest level) gives 14 sides. For the lowest level = 1 the pipe is drawn with 6 sides. If a
higher detail is used, the file gets bigger for the same number of models. A level of detail
equal to 2 is appropriate when many models should be transferred. A factor which also is
very essential for the drawing size is which input model representation was used when the
drawing was created. A panel with cutouts generates a DXF file which is three times as big
than without cutouts. Also it is possible to choose if the stiffeners or brackets should be
drawn with or without endcuts, which are also "expensive". Panel representation parts
should be used, since then holes which are outside the outer contour is intersected into the
outer contour.

2:54
12 Series

2.3.24
Drag and Drop to the 2D Canvas

It is possible to drag and drop model items into the 2D Canvas. The result of a successful
drag-drop operation matches that of an Insert Model using the Insert Model dialogue.
It is possible to drag items to create new views, insert into a specific view or insert into all
views.
Standard Left Mouse Button Drag Drop

Before beginning a drag and drop operation, a drawing must be open for read/write on the
canvas. To start a drag and drop operation, select an item in the Design Explorer by leftclicking and holding it. Drag it across to the 2D Canvas and drop it. If no views exists, you
will be prompted to select projection of the view.
If one ore more views exists on the drawing, a left-mouse button drag/drop into a specific
view will update the indicated view, and a drag/drop operation outside any view will always
update/insert into all views.

2:55
12 Series

Right Mouse Button Drag Drop

The effect of using a right-mouse button drag/drop is that the user will get prompted on what
action to take with the items dragged. The available options are, New view, Selected
view and All views. The action then performed is equal to what happens after a standard
drag/drop.
Other Sources
It is possible to drag items from other gadgets than the explorer, e.g. the Search Result and
My Data.

2:56
12 Series

2.4
Usage Tips
2.4.1
The Benefits of Layers

Layer information can be given on all subpicture levels and on single geometry items. This
is a great advantage when layers are used. Consider the following example: All measures
are given the system layer -1 on the level 3 subpictures. Now, suppose there are three users
from different departments that work on the same drawings. Each user has used a unique
layer number or layer class where the layer for measures has been specified. The user will
now have the possibility to handle (e.g. skip or select) all measures, to handle only his own
measures or to handle other users' measures. Conventions, for the use of layers, should be
defined before the work is started.
Example of Layers and Subpictures

The user should be familiar with the possibilities this Drafting subsystem provides to create
a structured drawing. Information can be grouped together either using
SUBPICTURES or LAYERS. Consider the following example: Suppose a map of the world
is created in the system and that the user wants the possibility to change the colours of
different parts of the world. The continents would be accessible groups. All countries would
also be accessible groups, but belonging to a continent. The continent or a single country
can then change colour by a single command. Using subpictures, this is a simple task. The
user that created this map also wants to have the same colour on all English-spoken
countries. This need can be supported by using layers. If all these countries are on the
same layer, also this task is performed by a single command. Furthermore, layers can be

2:57
12 Series

given in levels (levels are explained below). This makes it possible to have e.g. a country
both on the English-spoken layer and on the NATO layer.
Subpictures
The possibility to place information in different groups in a drawing and to perform activities
on such groups is an important aid when making the drafting work efficient. In Drafting, it is
possible to have these groups in three different levels. These groups of information are
referred to as subpictures on level 1, 2 and 3 in all Drafting documentation. In other contexts
the names view, subview and component may also be used. By splitting up a drawing in
subpictures, the user has the possibility to let the structure of the drawing reflect the reality.
Furthermore, during the creation of the drawing, it could be convenient to form subpictures
before operations such as transforming, duplicating, etc. Most operations that can be done
on geometry can also be done on subpictures.
Levels of Subpictures
Level 1 is the top-level subpicture, which is a combination of level 2 subpictures. The level 1
subpicture is the owner of the level 2 subpictures below. Equally, the level 2 subpicture
owns a number of level 3 subpictures. It is an important fact, that all information added to a
drawing will end-up in a level 3 subpicture (which is a part of a level 2 subpicture, which is a
part of a level 1 subpicture, which is a part of the drawing).
Subpictures Created by the System
Default Subpicture
If no other action is taken from the user, apart from creating geometry, then all information
will be placed in a level 3 subpicture created by the system. This is quite sufficient on small
drawings, where no natural division in subpictures can be found.
When model information created by Drafting or other systems is added to a drawing, the
subpicture structure is created automatically by the system. Below, the types of subpicture
structure that can be created are listed.
A new level 1 subpicture is created every time a projection is created from the InsertModel menu.
A new level 2 subpicture is added to a projection subpicture every time a model object
(pipe, equipment, etc.) is restored.
Model components (e.g. stiffeners on hull panels) are always represented as new level
3 subpictures.
Drawing Components
The Drafting contains functions that, when used, result in a number of geometries that can
be treated as a unit. These units of information are referred to as drawing components and
they are subpictures on level 3. When created, information from other subpictures is used in
all these functions except in the function Insert-Text File. The first level 2 subpicture that
information has been fetched from will be the owner of the drawing component. A text file
will however belong to the current subpicture on level 2. The current handling of Drafting will
be explained below. The following functions or groups of functions in the Drafting create
drawing components:
DIMENSIONING
NOTE
POSITION NUMBER

2:58
12 Series

2D PRIMITIVES
Subpictures Created by the User

There are two possibilities when a drawing shall be given a suitable subpicture structure; By
defining the current subpictures while creating the drawing and by regrouping information
after it has been created. Normally, a combination of those two possibilities is the most
efficient way to work.
Handling of Current Subpictures

The current handling in Drafting keeps track of current subpictures in a drawing. If no action
is taken, the current subpicture will be the created default subpicture as explained above. All
created geometry will belong to the current subpicture structure. With the function
CURRENT it is possible to make a selected subpicture current and possibly order the
system to create new ones. The following activities can be performed: An existing level 3
subpicture in the drawing can be made current. Note, however, that geometry added to a
subpicture with an model data will be lost after a hidden line removal. In this case, a new
level 3 subpicture should always be created (see below). A new subpicture can be made
current although it is not created until the first geometry is added. The level of the new
subpicture can be defined in two ways: by user or by the system. When user choice, the
superior owner is indicated and the level of the new subpicture will then be one below this
owner. By selecting OPERATION COMPLETE, the level of the new subpicture will be 1.
Thus, new subpictures of level 1-3 can be created explicit. When system choice, the owner
is also indicated but the system decides the appropriate level of the new subpicture. This
level can be 2 or 3 depending on the contents of indicated owner. When the current drawing
scale is changed, a new level-1 subpicture (view) will always be made current. There is yet
another way to define the current structure: by selecting the Automatic choice. This means
that subsequent geometry added to the drawing will structurally belong to the "closest"
level-3 subpicture, in a geometric sense.
Regrouping
There are two functions that perform reorganization of the subpicture structure in a drawing,
REGROUP and SPLIT. SPLIT should be used when parts of the information in a subpicture
should be moved to a new subpicture, with the same subpicture properties (e.g. attributes,
colour, layer, etc.). REGROUP should be used when some information from one subpicture
shall be moved to another one. A level 1 subpicture will be created if OPERATION
COMPLETE on the menu is selected instead of an existing subpicture in the drawing. The
information to be moved can be selected in a number of ways. In an already well-structured
drawing, the most frequent ways to select information will probably be by using the activities
subordinate (subpictures on next lower level), neighbours (subpictures on the same level,
only when REGROUPing) and by picking geometry. In non-structured drawings, on the
other hand, information is probably selected most efficiently by capturing all data inside a
polygon or an area. Note, that the capturing process is always a lot quicker if the user
captures information that is completely inside a polygon or an area. This is done by
selecting the "NOCUT" alternative in the submenu of the SPLIT/REGROUP function. The
user must be aware that subpictures with the model information should normally not be
reorganized. This could result in the fact that the hidden line process fails, that model
information can not be fetched to the drawing, etc.
Recommended Subpicture Structure

The subpicture structure to be used, depends very much on the type of drawing that is
produced.

2:59
12 Series

Arrangement Drawings, etc.

A Drawing in this category is probably created by using model data from AVEVA Marine.
The functions to insert and project the model data is creating a drawing with the following
structure. Each projection is a subpicture on level 1. All members of such a projection
(pipes, etc.) are level 2 subpictures. Finally, subpictures on level 3 are used for components
that together form a member (e.g. valves on a pipe etc.).
Mechanical Drawings, Construction Drawings, etc.

Each projection of the object that is constructed (e.g. a pump or a house) can be handled as
a subpicture on level 1. If any standard parts are added (e.g. a nozzle or a window) to the
object, then they probably should form level 2 subpictures. All new created information
should then belong to a subpicture of its own on level 2. Subpictures on level 3 can be used
freely during the creation of the drawing, when e.g. duplicating information. By keeping the
subpicture structure in good order, operations like "exchange all windows in the house" can
be done easily by one command.
Diagrams
In purely schematic diagrams, there is no real need for a subpicture structure in good order.
Subpictures could be created (by regrouping) when there is any need for it (e.g. duplicating).
The subpicture structure for geographical diagrams should probably look very much the
same as the structure used in arrangement drawings.
2.4.2
Replacing Dialogue String Input with Commands

When keying in simple text in the String "Input" dialog, it is possible to keyin certain
commands.
A legal command begins with an exclamation mark (!), followed by one of the following
commands:
"CANCEL", "REJECT"
"QUIT, EF", "EXIT FUNCTION"
"OPERATION COMPLETE", "OC"
"OPTIONS"
"STATUS"
"GRAPHIC"
The command can be abbreviated as long as it stays unique.

Two of these commands deserve further explanation:
STATUS lists some modal status concerning drawing creation
GRAPHIC gives the user the possibility to perform a graphic command (e.g. Zoom In)
without interrupting the current sequence of input. Once such a command has been
performed, or interrupted by Cancel or Quit. The system returns to the String Input
dialog.
Note: A leading double exclamation mark is interpreted as a non-command string. In this

case the double exclamation mark substituted with a single exclamation mark.

2:60
12 Series

2.5
Context Sensitive Right Click Menus
2.5.1
Texts
Purpose
Enabling the user to change text contents, text properties, move or rotate the selected texts
(single-line or multi-line).
Instructions
4 text specific options for editing texts will be displayed when right-clicking on a text in the
drawing. These are Edit, Properties, Rotate and Move.
When the Edit menu choice is selected, the selected text is presented in the Edit Text
dialog and the user can change the contents of the text. By clicking Options, it is also
possible to change the properties of the text.
By selecting the Rotate menu choice, the selected text can be rotated to a desired position
by moving the mouse clockwise or counter clockwise, the position is then fixed by clicking
the left mouse button. By clicking Options, it is also possible to give an absolute rotation
angle.
When the Move menu choice is selected, it is possible to drag the text to a desired position
and fix it there by clicking the left mouse button. By clicking Options, it is also possible to
change rotation, properties etc
If the Properties menu choice is selected, a dialog box will be presented that allows
modification of the current text properties. The properties are font, effects, size, colour,
aspect ratio, slant, interline space factor and layer. Click the Ok button in the Text
Properties dialog to modify the text.
Font type
Select font type from table of alternatives.
Font style
Select font style.
Font size
Select font size in millimeters (mm).
Effects
Strike-out & Underline.
Colour
Select colour of the text.
Aspect
Width/Height ratio of a text, default equals 1.0 for

normal text.
Slant
Key-in slant angle, default equals 90 degrees.
Interline Space
Key-in interline space factor.
Layer
Key-in layer number valid between 0 and 32000.
Note: In case the text belongs to a system component that is persisted, it is possible to
apply the modification on this component as a whole. This can be achieved if and
only if
the text belongs to a persisted system component (like dimensioning, label, etc)
the modification makes sense on component level

2:61
12 Series

the default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERSISTED_GEOM is set to YES
Example:
The user right-clicks a text belonging to a (persisted) linear dimension component and
selects the Move option.
2.5.2
If the default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERSISTED_GEOM is set to Yes,

the text is moved, the new position is persisted in PADD and the dimensioning is reevaluated.
If the default keyword DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERSISTED_GEOM is set to No,

only the text is moved. The modification will be lost after a subsequent re-evaluation of
the dimensioning.
Symbols
Purpose
Enabling a User to move, rotate or change the selected symbol.
Instructions
The user will be presented with 3 symbol specific options for manipulating symbols if a right
click occurs over a symbol in the drawing. These are Change, Height and Move.
If the user selects the Change menu choice he is presented with the select symbol dialog.
The symbol is then exchanged with the selected symbol from the dialog.
If the user selects the Height menu choice, a new height of the symbol can be entered. This
will then change the symbol size.
If the user selects the Move menu choice, the user will be able to 'drag' the selected symbol
to a desired position and 'fix' it there by clicking the Left Mouse button.
2.5.3
Navigate To - functions
The Navigate To- functions are available in the context menu in the Marine Drafting 2Dcanvas. The functions will identify the closest entity in the drawing and navigate to the
corresponding element in one of the explorers: Draft Explorer, Design Explorer or the
Marine Drawing Explorer.
Move the mouse to the element of interest in the drawing and right click to activate the
context menu:

2:62
12 Series

Please note the Navigate in Design Explorer is not always available. This option is
removed when the element does not represent a design element.
Navigate in Draft Explorer and Navigate in Design Explorer will change the current
element (CE) in dabacon and the explorers will react on the change of CE. You will only see
the effect of the function if the selected explorer is opened.
Navigate in Drawing Explorer will set the current element in the Marine Drawing explorer
but not change the CE. Again, you will only see any effect in the Marine Drawing Explorer
is opened.
The function will identify the element in the "lowest" possible level starting from the
component level in the drawing object.

2:63
12 Series

Examples:
Examples 1
Right click on the stiffener (component) in the drawing and select in Design Explorer:
The selected stiffener be highlighted in the Design Explorer:
Example 2
Right click on the dimension in the drawing and select Navigate in Draft Explorer:

2:64
12 Series

The function will navigate to the LDIM element in the Draft Explorer:
Example 3
Hold the mouse over the stiffener and choose Navigate in Draft Explorer:

2:65
12 Series

The function cannot identify any PADD element on component or subview level but will
navigate to the VIEW element:

2:66
12 Series

2.6
Multiple Select in Drafting
2.6.1
How to Activate
AVEVA Marine Drafting has a new functionality, Multiple Select in Drafting, which allows
the user to select multiple entities in a drawing.
The multiple select is available when the application is in Choose function mode.
Ctrl+Left click will add element by element to the selection list. Ctrl+Left click on an already
selected element will remove it from the selection list. The selected entities will be
highlighted.
2.6.2
Multiple Select Options

The multiple select option menu will be activated by Ctrl key and right clicking will activate
the popup menu that looks like below:
The Box functions will allow you to select elements within a given box and the Polygon
function will let you select all elements within a polygon. Inside and Crossing are options to
the area selection. If Inside is checked, elements completely inside the area will be
selected. If Inside is NOT checked, elements completely outside the area will be selected. If
Crossed is checked also elements crossing the area boundary will qualify for selection, i.e.
in addition the ones inside or outside.
Among the selection options there are also two types of filters. The first filter is represented
by the Comp, Subview, View, Contour, Text and Symbol options. With Comp, Subview
and View you decide on what level you want to indicate subpictures. With Contour, Text,
Symbol you select what type of geometry you want to identify. Ticking these will only have
effect when you have no subpicture level selected at all, i.e. you select geometric entities
directly.
The second filter is available as the popup menu choice Advanced filter.
This is an additional filter that will be applied to the selected elements. The filter is one or
several properties like colour, line type, font, text height, layer etc. When you set the

2:67
12 Series

Advanced filter... it means that you have two lists of elements, the selected elements and
the filtered elements. The filtered elements are the result you get when scanning the
selected elements to find the ones that match the advanced filter. Selecting Advanced
filter leads to the below dialogue.
If you select more than one property it means that an element must match all the selected
properties to be targeted.
Examples:
1.
You have selected two subviews and you have set the advanced filter to
colour Red and line type Dashed. The filtered elements will be all contours
in these two subviews that are both red and dashed.
2.
You have selected one view and the advanced filter is Layer=200.
Assuming that the view has the elements seen in the figure below.

2:68
12 Series

The list of filtered elements will be subview B1 and component C1.

Note: That the search will stop on the highest level, i.e. once a matching element is found
the subordinate elements will not be searched.
There are two menu choices on the Multiple Select popup menu that are related to the
selected/filtered elements. Show selected elements and Show filtered elements. These
two options let you select which list of elements you want to be highlighted on the canvas.
The selected elements or the filtered elements. By default the selected elements are
highlighted.
Note: That if you have an Advanced filter... set, all operations you apply to your selected
elements will affect the filtered elements and not the selected ones.
2.6.3
How to Cancel Multiple Select

All multiple select will be reset by left clicking anywhere in the canvas. The Comp, Subview,
View, Contour, Text and Symbol filter will remain in its current state but the advanced filter
will be reset. The list of the selected/filtered elements will be emptied.

2:69
12 Series

2.6.4
Work with Selections

Now to the most important part. Once you have made your selection what can you do with
it?
Currently these functions are multiple select enabled, Trim, Extend, Transform, Delete
and Change Properties. They are available in a popup menu that will be visible if you right
click in the canvas. To make the Trim/Extend choices appear on the menu you have to right
click close to a contour element.
The Trim/Extend functions in this menu will allow you to trim/extend many contours to the
same entity. Delete/Transform will of course delete/transform all currently selected
elements. For a detailed instruction on how to use the new trim and extend function please
see the following sections below. The Change Properties function will allow you to change
properties like line type, colour, text height etc. Please note that if you have an advanced
filter set, the functions will operate on the list of filtered elements, not the selected elements.
Also note that what appears in this right click menu depends on:
Which the closest picture element is. If it is a text the Edit Text Properties menu
choices will be available. If it is a contour then Extend and Trim is also in the menu.
Note: Please note that the Text Properties menu is NOT multi select enabled, it only
operates on the indicated text.
2.6.5
If multi select is active or not. If active then you will always have Transform, Delete
and Change Properties.
Which application you are running. Running Hull Design for instance may result in
additional menu choices for specific model types identified as closest entity in the
drawing.
Trim Function
This functionality is new in AVEVA Marine. Trim works on a single element as well as for
multiple elements. For a single element you do not have to select it first, simply right click
close to the contour you want to trim. This trim function will automatically search for
trimming contours searching in both directions along the contour(s) to be trimmed. If two
intersection points are found then a gap is created otherwise the contour(s) will be trimmed.
If multiple contours are selected you will be asked to cross over the contours you want to
trim with a line or polyline. The polyline has two purposes:
Only selected contours intersected by the cross-over polyline will be trimmed, the other
ones are ignored.
If the contours are trimmed, i.e. only one intersecting contour is found, then it is the
crossed-over end that will be removed.
If you right click on a single contour and if the system finds that it will be trimmed, i.e. only
one intersecting contour is found, then it is the position of your right click that will define the
end to be removed.
Example:
Three contours are selected, the vertical ones. Cross over the middle part, between the
horizontal lines, and a gap will be created.

2:70
12 Series


2:71
12 Series

2.6.6
Extend Function
The Extend function operates on a single or multiple contours. You will be asked to indicate
which contour to trim to. Using the options button will give you the possibility to define a
point which all contours will be extended to. If you repeat to click the Option button the
system will toggle between contour and point indication.
Example:
Three contours are selected to be extended.

2:72
12 Series

They are trimmed to the same point:

2:73
12 Series

2.6.7
Other Remarks
Please note that the selection in the canvas is not related to the currently selected elements
in th Drawing Explorer. The currently selected elements in the tree view and the currently
selected elements in the canvas are two separate selection lists. The selected elements in
the tree viewer will only be affected by functions available in the tree viewer popup menu
(activated by a right click in the tree viewer).
2.7
Change Highlighting
2.7.1
Change Highlighting Commands

The Change Highlighting commands operate on marine elements as well when running
Marine Drafting. However, there are some limitations:
Hull items can only be highlighted in views of view type Global Hidden Line or Universal
Hidden Line. Due to that these view types are of hidden line type, there is a risk that

2:74
12 Series

some items are completely hidden by others and not displayed even if they are
changed.
Only Label annotations (GLABEL) are checked. Other annotations created in Marine
Drafting are not checked for changes.
Refer to User Guide Outfitting Draft / Change Highlighting for more information.

2:75
12 Series


2:76
12 Series

Utilities
Utilities
3.1
SB021 - Symbol Font Utility Program

The program is used to maintain symbol fonts and performs the following tasks:
Viewing and updating of font header characteristics
Creation of new symbol fonts
Copying of symbol fonts
Deletion of symbol fonts
The program interacts with the user via the Main Activity form and a number of sub forms
which are:
the Font Head Viewer form
the Font Copy Utility form
the Font Delete Utility form
Individual symbols within a symbol font are maintained by the Marine Drafting System.
Font Identification and Residence
A symbol font is identified by a number between 1 and 999.The corresponding font file is
named d012sy<xxx>.port where xxx stands for the identification, left padded with
zeros. The directory where the font files reside is initially project dependant
(SBB_SYMBDIR) but can be changed to whatever desired inside the program.
The Main Activity Form
When starting up the program this form is entered. From here the following sub tasks can be
selected:
View
Copy
Delete
The tasks are handled by suitable sub forms, each one described in separate sections
below. You will always return to this form when selecting 'Cancel' from any of the subforms.
To quit the session, select 'Quit'.
The Font Head Viewer Form
This form is used to view, update or create symbol fonts. The source symbol font is specified
in the 'Directory' and 'Identification' fields respectively. The font header characteristics are
shown in the section labelled 'Characteristics' and contains the following:
1. The total number of slots
2. The size of a slot, in words

3:1
12 Series

Utilities
3. The symbol origin (reference point)

4. The text code (not in use at present)
5. The highest slot number in use
6. The used slot size, in words
7. The revision number of the font Characteristics here while (5) to (7) are for viewing
purposes only. Each slot corresponds to a symbol, identified by the slot number.
Viewing Fonts
To View the characteristics of a font, select 'Read'. The font header characteristics will be
shown.
Updating Fonts
To Update the characteristics of a font, select 'Update'. The font header characteristics (1) to
(4) will be updated according to the current values in the form. For example, the total size of
a symbol font depends on (1) and (2) and can be optimised for performance reasons. Note
that the contents of the symbol font will not be changed.
Creating Fonts
To Create a new symbol font, select 'Create'. A new (empty) font with the header
characteristics (1) to (4) given in the form will be created. Individual symbols can now be
defined within the Marine Drafting System.
Default Characteristics
The current font header characteristics (1) to (4), used when creating or updating a font, can
be set to default values by selecting 'Default'.
The Font Copy Utility Form
This form is used to copy a symbol font. The source and target fonts are specified in the
'Directory' and 'Identification' fields respectively. The source font must of course exist while
the target font must not. To overwrite an existing font You first have to delete this font
explicitly.
The Font Delete Utility Form
This form handles the deletion of symbol fonts and should be used with extreme care
because the fonts are deleted WITHOUT ANY CONFIRMATION. The source font is
specified in the 'Directory' and 'Identification' fields respectively.
Note: Normally, symbols are drawn with solid lines only.
The environment variable TB_SHOW_SYMBOL_WITH_FULL_LINETYPE controls the
display of a symbol in the drawing:
3.2
If set to YES, the actual line type will be used
Otherwise, the symbol will be displayed as solid with same thickness as the actual line
type
SY006 - Insert Text by Drawing Form Rule

The program SY006 is used to insert text data in a number of drawings. The insertion is
directed by placing rules belonging to the form connected to the drawing. A rule is identified

3:2
12 Series

Utilities
by a specific number and contains information that directs the size and positioning of the
text. Some applications use this technique to insert texts in drawings.
For general information on rules and dynamic texts, see Drawing Forms and Rules in
The rules used for this purpose are system-defined and should normally not be used in this
program. To be sure not to interfere with the system-defined rules, it is recommended to use
rule numbers starting from 10000 and upwards. These are called user-defined rules.
However, there are no restrictions on the usage of rules in this program. The rules of any
form can be defined and updated interactively in Marine Drafting, using the Tools-Drawing
form-Save function. Hence, to insert a text into a drawing, this text must be associated with
a specific rule, a form must be connected to the drawing and this form must contain the
description of this specific rule. The program is controlled by an input file, directing what
drawings to handle and what text to insert.
Assignments
SY006_DATA
- input file
SY006_LIST
- output list file
Input File
The input file is an ordinary ASCII stream file containing an arbitrary number of statements
defining what drawings to treat and what texts to insert. The file may look like:
DRAWING, 'MYDRAWING';
DRAWING, 'PROJ-%%%-MY*';
TEXT/RULE=12001,
Nagoya Takamitu';
TEXT, 'Hakamoto',
'Sukiyaki',
'and friends'
/RULE=12004;
Thus, first the drawings to treat are stated, followed by the texts to insert. However, the
order of the statements are irrelevant.
The DRAWING Statement
DRAWING,'<dwg_name>';
This statement denotes what drawing(s) to treat. The drawing name <dwg_name> can be
generic, i.e. contain wild cards like'*' and '%'. The surrounding apostrophes can be omitted if
there are no special characters in the drawing name.
The TEXT Statement
TEXT/RULE=<rule_no>,
'textrow_1',
'textrow_2',
...
'textrow_n';

3:3
12 Series

Utilities
This statement denotes what text to insert. The rule number <rule_no> is given by the
attribute RULE and is compulsory. The text to insert is given row by row. At least one row
and a maximum of 25 rows are expected. The surrounding apostrophes can be omitted if
there are no special characters in the row.
Result
Drawings will be updated with text data as defined by the input file. In each drawing, each
text will be inserted according to the specified rule. The text will structurally belong to the
form view of the drawing. If a text denoted by this rule already exist, it will be replaced. Note
that the rule dictates the maximum length of a row and also the maximum number of rows in
a text. This means that the inserted text may be truncated to satisfy the rule description.
Drawings that cannot be found in the Drawing data bank will be ignored. The same goes for
drawings without a drawing form or if the form object cannot be found in the Standard data
bank. Texts denoted by a rule that cannot be retrieved (i.e. cannot be identified in the form
definition) will be ignored. A list file on the standard list directory containing the result of the
interpretation and the text insertion will be produced. The name of the list file will be instext
<jobno>.lst where <job_no> stands for the job number.
3.3
SY007 - Validate Drawing

Drawings incorporate a version number, indicating which version of the programs that
created the drawing. The version indicates the internal format and is used by the system to
interpret the drawing correctly. Drawings of version less than the latest one can of course be
handled by the system. Such a drawing will automatically be converted to the latest version
when brought into the system. However, it will not be updated in the data bank until it is
stored explicitly by user. The conversion process could be quite time-consuming for big
drawings, e.g. arrangement drawings etc. To avoid this conversion each time such a
drawing is brought into the system, the drawing should be stored back in the data bank after
conversion. Another way is to use this stand-alone program to convert all drawings once
and for all. In the following, the conversion to latest version will be called validation. The
program will validate all (or selected) drawing objects in the Drawing data bank, connected
to SB_PDB.
Note: The current picture version is 8. Conversion of versions less than 8 is not supported.
This means that until the next picture version (9) is introduced, invoking sy007 will
have no effect.To read a picture object of version less than 8, it must first be
converted to version 8 by using tbm3sp5 or older conversion software.
Operation
The user is prompted to key in the name of the picture(s) to validate. Wildcards are allowed
in the picture name. To exit the program, click <CR>. For each picture matching the given
name, the program will validate it and store it back on the data bank. Pictures already of
latest version will of course not be treated.
3.4
SY013 - Store Drawings in the PADD Database

The main purpose of SY013 is to migrate drawings from Tribon M3 into AVEVA Marine. In
the first step in the migration the drawings will be output on a number of .SDB files. SY013
can read these files and store the drawings and their contents in the PADD database.

3:4
12 Series

Utilities
However, SY013 can also be run on drawings that already exist in the PADD database. In
that case SY013will then check if there are some parts of the drawing object that are not in
the PADD database and update the database if needed.
Operation
The program can be started from the command line with the following syntax:
sy013 <project login> -name <object name> -dwgtype <type> [list] [-onlyfromfiles]
<project login>
The login information for the project, for example:

-proj=MAR
-user=SYSTEM
ALL_NO_MDS
-pass=<*******>
-mdb=/
<object name>
The object name. Wild cards can be given: * and/or %.
<type>
The drawing type:

1 = General drawing
3 = General subpicture
4 = Assembly drawing
6 = Assembly instruction drawing
7 = Pipe sketch
8 = Hull weight & centre of gravity drawing
9 = Hull part list drawing
10 = Hull profile sketch
11 = Hull nested profile sketch
12 = Hull plate jigs drawing
13 = Hull pin jigs drawing
14 = Hull bending template drawing
15 = Hull planar part drawing
16 = Hull curved part drawing
17 = Hull nesting sketch
18 = Hull panel line sketch
19 = Hull 3-axis nesting sketch
20 = Hull receipt drawing
23 = Standard subpicture
24 = Component projection subpicture
25 = Volume comment subpicture
26 = Hull panel line individual sketch
27 = Hull mark texts
28 = Assembly ADP drawing
>1000= User defined drawings
-list
gives a list of objects for given drawing type with information

whether they exist in the PADD database or not. The
drawings will not be updated, i.e. there will be no changes to
the PADD database.
-onlyfromfiles
Handle only drawings that does no yet exist in the PADD

database. Can be useful when you are migrating a large
collection of drawing and some of them fail. If you want to
repeat the command, this option will avoid spending time on
the already migrated ones.

3:5
12 Series

Utilities
TBSSystemFonts
When migrating drawings with SY013 there is an special issue with the legacy
TBSystemFonts. These fonts are:
TBSystemFont0
TBSystemFont1
TBSystemFont2
TBSystemFont3
TBSystemFont4
TBSystemFont5
TBSystemFont6
TBSystemFont7
TBISOFont101
TBISOFont105
These fonts are not supported for text elements stored in the PADD database. The fonts
above will be replaced by the default TrueType font unless the environment variable
TB_SYSTEMFONT_MAP is assigned to a text file where each legacy font is mapped to a
TrueType font available within the project. Please note that there is a new TrueType font
called MarineSystem that looks like the legacy fonts mentioned above. The format of this
text file should be as follows:
TBISOFont101
3.5
MarineSystem
SB028 - Handle Standard Objects

The program sb028 is used to administrate the standard books in the system:
Standard Details
Standard Hatch Patterns
The following tasks can be performed:
Listing all page descriptions
Creating pictures of all or specific pages
Moving pages or standards
Changing descriptions of pages or standards
SB028_LIST
When listing standard page descriptions, the name of resulting list file is controlled by
this logical variable.
If not assigned, "sb028.lst" will be used
SB028_DWGNAME
When creating pictures for standard page illustration, the first part of the name of the
resulting drawing(s) should be assigned to this logical name.
If not assigned, 'SB028_DWG' will be used.
Each drawing created will then be stored under the name given by this logical, suffixed
by the type of book and the corresponding page number within that book.
The full name of the drawing will then be:
<translation of SB028_DWGNAME> _STD

<page number>, where <type of book> is

3:6
<type
of
book>
_P
12 Series

Utilities
1 for standard details,
2 for standard hatch patterns
SB028_AUTOSC
When creating pictures for standard page illustration, each standard object will be
autoscaled (i.e. maximized within available area) if this logical name is assigned.
Required Drawing Form

When creating pictures for standard page illustration, the drawing form named STDFORM is
required. See below for details.
Description of the Different Tasks
The book to handle is selected from the main menu. To quit, select Exit program. Once the
book is selected, the specific task to perform is selected from the task menu. To return to the
main menu, select Return to main menu. Below, the different tasks are described. If not
otherwise stated, <CR> means go back one step in the sequence of user input.
List All Page Descriptions
This function will add to the list file all page descriptions defined in the current book. The
same information will also be displayed on the screen.
Create Pictures of all or Specified Pages
This function creates drawings that illustrate standard pages. The drawings can, after
storing them, be printed like any other drawing.
Move Whole Page
This function moves a whole page within the current book. The source page, followed by the
target page is supplied by user.
Move Standard
This function moves a standard from one page to another within the current book.
First, the source page and standard within the page are supplied (the numbers of existing
standards within the page are listed). Secondly, the target page and standard within that
page are supplied. Overwriting is not allowed, so the target standard must not exist (the
numbers of non-existing standards within the page are listed).
Change Page Description
This function allows the user to change the description of a certain page. By giving the page
number, the old description is displayed, where after the new description is supplied by user.
Note: <CR> means step back, while one or more spaces makes the description empty.
Change Standard Description
This function allows the user to change the description of a certain standard. By giving the
page number, the existing standards within that page are listed. By giving the desired
standard number, the old description is displayed, where after the new description is
supplied by user.
Note: <CR> means step back, while one or more spaces makes the description empty.

3:7
12 Series

Utilities
Creation of a Drawing Form for SB028

When creating pictures for standard page illustration, the drawing form named STDFORM is
required. This form is part of the delivery but can be modified using appropriate functionality
in Marine Drafting if desired.
The drawing form has some rules that controls the position of each standard, page number
& description. standard description etc. The form must contain exactly 8 positions for
standards.
Chapter Model Viewing and General Drafting. The following rules controls the layout of the
form:
3.6
$200
Page Description
$400
Head line (STANDARD

PATTERNS)
$401
Page number
$300, $301
Position of first standard (lower left and upper right corner)
$302, $303
Position of 2:nd standard (lower left and upper right corner)
$304, $305
Position of 3:rd standard (lower left and upper right corner)
$306, $307
Position of 4:th standard (lower left and upper right corner)
$308, $309
$310, $311
$312, $313
$314, $315
$1 - $8
Description of each standard
$100 - $107
Scale of each standard
DETAILS
or
STD
HATCH
SB029 - Create Drawings Presenting Symbols in

Specified Fonts
The program sb029 is used to create drawings of symbols. The symbols must have been
defined in symbol fonts.
SB029_DWGNAME
When creating drawings for symbol illustration, the first part of the name of the resulting
drawing(s) should be assigned to this logical name.
If not assigned, 'SB029_DWG' will be used.
Each drawing created will then be stored under the name given by this logical, suffixed
be a running number.

3:8
12 Series

Utilities
Required Drawing Form

When presenting symbols, the drawing form named SB029_FORM is required. Se below for
details about this drawing form.
Description of the Tasks
The program will create a drawing consisting of given symbols in a given symbol font. The
drawing can then be printed. Several drawings can be made to constitute a paper copy of an
entire symbol font. An example of a drawing can be found below:
Figure 3:1.
Example of plot from symbol font.
Creation of a Drawing Form for SB029

This form is part of the delivery but can be modified using appropriate functionality in Marine
Drafting if desired.
A symbol form has some rules that controls the positions of the symbols, the symbol
numbers and the font numbers. A symbol form must contain exactly 12 positions for
symbols.
The symbols are positioned by rules that starts at $300. The first symbol that should be
placed is positioned at $300, the second at $301 and so on.
The font numbers is positioned with start at rule $200 and then every fourth rule. The
second symbol number will be placed at rule $204.
The symbol numbers is positioned with start at rule $202 and then every fourth rule. The
second symbol number will be placed at rule $206.
This is an example of a symbol form with the rules visible (before storing as a form).

3:9
12 Series

Utilities
Figure 3:2.
3.7
Example of a symbol form.
TBGENPREVIEW - Generate Drawing Previews

The program tbgenpreview is used to generate previews of drawings. These previews are
used in the Open Drawing dialog.
3.8
SZ024 - Export to Neutral Files
3.8.1
Purpose of the Link

This guide describes an optional link for transfer of model objects from the system to a
foreign CAD system. The result of the link is an ASCII file in neutral format. This format may
be read by a foreign CAD system, which have implemented software for reading such
format.
The link will handle the transfer of:
planar hull
hull curves
The resulting ASCII file contains solid volume descriptions with some additional attribute
information.
3.8.2
Components of the Link

A convenient way of exporting models is to create a drawing with SZ004 and then let the
export program interpret this drawing, in order to derive what model objects to export.
The link consists of programs and documentation. The names of the programs are:
SZ004(Create model picture)
SZ024(Export models to neutral file format)
The guide consists of user documentation, describing how to operate the link, and a
description of the format of the resulting ASCII file.

3:10
12 Series

Utilities
Input Data to the Link

The Export link will work on data created by the program SZ004. This means that the format
of input data to the link is the same as for SZ004, i.e. a syntax file. The name of the syntax
file is given by the environment variable SB_DATA. This input data will specify which objects
shall be converted. The specification of this format is included in SZ004 - Creation of
Pictures by Extracting Model Data.
Resulting Data from the Link

The following data will be produced by the link:
A check list with interpretation messages of the input file. This message file will be
named according to the environment variable PRINTER0.
The neutral file containing the volume descriptions. This file is placed in the directory by
the environment variable SB_SHIPPRINT. The name will be the same as the drawing,
in lowercase letters, with the extension ".VOL".
Operator Action for Conversion

The conversion is invoked by:
assigning the environment variable SB_DATA to the name of the given syntax file
assigning the environment variable PRINTER0 to the name of the resulting syntax
interpretation list
assigning the environment variable SB_SHIPPRINT to the directory for the resulting
neutral file
running SZ004
running SZ024
This sequence of operations may be put in a script file for easier invocation.
Alternative way of invoking the conversion

Optionally, the input to the link may the name of a drawing, containing a model view from
which the model objects to be exported is collected. This drawing can be created with
interactive Drafting tools, or by the program SZ004. For this purpose, the operator action for
conversion is as follows:
3.8.3
assigning the environment variable WZ984_INPUT_DWG to "YES"
assigning the environment variable SB_DATA to the name of the given drawing (in data
bank SB_PDB)
assigning the environment variable SB_SHIPPRINT to the directory for the resulting
neutral file
running sz024
Format for Information Transfer

Each time the export link is invoked, one neutral file will be created. Thus,
each one can contain information about one or several model objects.
Each model object consists of one or several primitives. These primitives must not intersect.
If they do, it will cause unnecessary interference, erroneous visualization and unnecessarily
increased process time.

3:11
12 Series

Utilities
Each neutral file contains a number of lines with a variable number of characters,
maximized to 80. Each line starts with a keyword. Some of the keywords are followed by a
comma and a parameter, belonging to the keyword.
There must be a semicolon at the end of each line. The order of keywords are highly
relevant.
Parameters can be of four types: keywords, strings of characters, integers or reals.
Strings must be surrounded by apostrophes. Reals can be with or without exponent but
must be readable by FORTRAN and C programs.
Blanks are allowed between terms, parameters and separators but irrelevant, except within
string parameters.
The use of keywords for solid primitives are exactly the same as for the link which converts
a neutral file into objects.
Object Types
The following different object types will be represented:
Application
Object type
hull
plate
hull
stiffener
hull
pillar
hull
flange
hull
bracket
hull
curve
hull
long
hull
trans
For some object types there may be simplifications and adjustments to fit into the various
object primitives. This is valid e.g. for twisted profiles and some profile types (bulb bars and
round bars) with end cuts.
Keywords and Parameters

The following list contains all keywords and parameters (in addition to the primitive
keywords, see Primitive Data):
Keyword
Parameter
Parameter typ
TYPE_OF_GENERIC_FILE
<type of file>
string
VERSION
<version>
string
TRIBON_OBJECT
none
GENERAL_DATA
none
TYPE

<type of object>
3:12
keyword
12 Series

Utilities
NAME
<name>
string
PRODUCT_NAME
<product name>
string
SUPERIOR_NAME
<superior name>
string
MODULE_NAME
<mod name>
string
COMMENT
<comment>
string
END_OF_GENERAL_DATA
none
HOLE_DATA
none
EN_OF_HOLE_DATA
none
END_OF_TRIBON_OBJECT
none
<type of file> must have the value 'VOLUME_OBJECTS'.

<version> is a code for the version of the Object File and Conversion Program. The
version will be used to enable modifications and additions in the future.
<type of object> is a keyword identifying the type of object.

<name> is the system name of the object or other type of identification, see below.
<product name> is the assembly names, from high to low, plus position number
and P or S, if relevant.
<superior name> is the name of the immediately superior structure to which the
object belongs.
<mod name> is the name of the superior block or module to which the object
belongs.
<comment> is a comment reserved for later use. It will not be used in the first version
of this link.
Separate keywords, those without parameters, denote the start and end of data groups of
different kinds.
The validity of keywords for different types of objects is explained in the table
below:
Hull Plate
<type of object>
HULL_PLATE
<name>
Stiffener number within panel
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Panel name
<mod name>
Block name
Hull Stiffener
<type of object>

HULL_STIFFENER
3:13
12 Series

Utilities
<name>
Stiffener number within panel
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Panel name
>mod name>
Block name
Hull Pillar
<type of object>
HULL_PILLAR
<name>
Pillar number within panel
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Panel name
<mod name>
Block name
Hull Flange
<type of object>
HULL_FLANGE
<name>
Flange number within panel
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Panel name
<mod name>
Block name
Hull Bracket
<type of object>
HULL_BRACKET
<name>
Bracket number within panel
<product name>
Valid
<superior name
Panel name
<mod name>
Block name
Hull Curve
<type of object>
HULL_CURVE
<name>
Name of curve
<product name>
Not valid
<superior name>
Not valid

3:14
12 Series

Utilities
<mod name>
Not valid
Hull Long
<type of object>
HULL_LONG
<name>
Longitudinal part name
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Longitudinal name
<mod name>
Valid
Hull Trans
<type of object>
HULL_TRANS
<name>
Transversal part name
<product name>
Valid
<superior name>
Transversal name
<mod name
Valid
Overall Format
The overall format of a file is as follows:
indicating the start of a file
VERSION
TRIBON_OBJECT
indicating the start of an object
general data
primitive one
primitive two
....
any number of primitives
....
indicating the end of the first object
TRIBON_OBJECT
Indicating the start of a second object
....
indicating the end of the second object
TRIBON_OBJECT
indicating the start of third object

3:15
12 Series

Utilities
....
indicating the end of the third object
....
....
any number of objects
General Data
A general data group must always exist for each object. It contains information of general
administrative kind and has the following layout:
GENERAL_DATA
indicating the start of general data
TYPE
NAME
PRODUCT_NAME
SUPERIOR_NAME
MODULE_NAME
COMMENT
....
END_OF_GENERAL_DATA
indicating the end of general data
Curve
The contour primitive is used to describe a plane 3D curve, available in the system, e.g.a.
frame contour:
CURVE_DATA
contour data
END_OF_CURVE_DATA
Primitive Data
Primitives available in the system, can be described in a primitive group. Such a group
always starts and ends with keywords, specific for the primitive. In between these keywords,
additional keywords describe the geometric data of the primitive.
The primitives available are:
cylinder
cap (spherical segment)
parallel epiped
cone
torus
rotational cylinder
general cylinder (extrusion primitive)

3:16
12 Series

Utilities
contour (a 3D curve, e.g. a frame curve)
Holes, e.g. on hull plates, are described as 3D contour primitives with the initial keyword
HOLE_DATA and the ending keyword END_OF_HOLE_DATA. Holes can only occur within
general cylinders and must not intersect or touch the outer contour of the surrounding
general cylinder. Thus, the primitives describing a general cylinder with two holes may have
the layout described below.
Note: Imported VRML or SAT primitives cannot be exported with this link.
GENCYL_DATA
START_OF3D_CONTOUR
outer contour of general cylinder
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
HOLE_DATA
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR
contour of first hole
END OF_3D_CONTOUR
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR
contour of second hole
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR
END_OF_HOLE_DATA
END_OF_GENCYL_DATA
Example of Object File

The following is a simple example of an Object File, containing one panel plate with a hole
and a cableway, passing through the hole:
TYPE_OF_GENERIC_FILE,'VOLUME_OBJECTS';
VERSION,'v1.0';
TRIBON_OBJECT;
GENERAL_DATA;
TYPE,HULL_PLATE;
NAME,1;
PRODUCT_NAME,'TT41/TT4/912';
SUPERIOR_NAME,'798-A32-510';
MODULE_NAME,'A32';

3:17
12 Series

Utilities
END_OF_GENERAL_DATA;
GENCYL_DATA;
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR;
NO_OF_SEG,4;
START_X,0.0;
START_Y,0.0;
START_Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,0.0;
AZ,0.0;
X,1000.0;
Y,0.0;
Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,200.0;
AZ,0.0;
X,1000.0;
Y,1000.0;
Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,0.0;
AZ,0.0;
X,0.0;
Y,1000.0;
Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,0.0;
AZ,0.0;
X,0.0;
Y,0.0;
Z,0.0;
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR;
V1X,0.0;
V1Y,0.0;
V1Z,15.0;
HOLE_DATA;
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR;
NO_OF_SEG,2;
START_X,400.0;
START_Y,500.0;
START_Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,-100.0;

3:18
12 Series

Utilities
AZ,0.0;
X,600.0;
Y,500.0;
Z,0.0;
AX,0.0;
AY,100.0;
AZ,0.0;
X,400.0;
Y,500.0;
Z,0.0;
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR;
END_OF_HOLE_DATA;
END_OF_GENCYL_DATA;
END_OF_TRIBON_OBJECT;
3.8.4
Restrictions for SZ004

SZ004 is an existing program, designed for a specific task. To fulfil that task,specific input
data has to be given to the program, see SZ004 - Creation of Pictures by Extracting Model
Data.
In context with the link, defined in this specification, a second use of the program is defined.
For this second use, some of the input lacks a meaning and does not have any impact on
the link. Naturally, the program still accepts the full syntax, defined in the documentation.
Restrictions of SZ004
For the conversion of data in this link, some statement types of SZ004 does not have any
effect. The statements are of course still valid for SZ004 as such:
Statement CREATE_VIEW:
The attributes /HIDD and /PROJ are irrelevant.
The attributes /SLICE1 and /SLICE2 can be used to capture objects within the slice
planes, but the objects themselves will not be sliced.
Statement PANEL:
The attributes /PAN, /STI, /BRA, /ENDCUT, and /CUTOUT are valid, but full material
will always be presented.
Statement CURVE:
Valid.
Statement FAIR:
Not valid
Statement LONG:
Valid
Statement TRANS:
Valid
Statement SURF:
Not valid

3:19
12 Series

Utilities
Statement ASSEMBLY:
3.8.5
Valid.
Format for Information Transfer

Each object consist of one or several primitives. These primitives must not intersect. If they
do, it will cause unnecessary interference, erroneous visualization and unnecessarily
increased process time.
Each Object File will contain a number of lines with a variable number of characters,
maximized to 80. Each line starts with a keyword. Some of the keywords are followed by a
comma and a parameter, belonging to the keyword. The line ends with a semicolon. The
order of keywords are highly relevant.
Blanks are allowed between terms, parameters and separators but irrelevant, except within
string parameters.
Parameters can be of three types: strings of characters, integers or reals. Strings must be
surrounded by apostrophes. Reals can be with or without exponent but must be readable by
FORTRAN and C programs.
Keywords and Parameters

The following list contains all keywords and parameters:
Keyword
Parameter
Parameter type
<type of file>
string
VERSION
<version>
string
OBJECT_DATA
none
GENERAL_DATA
none
NAME
<name>
string
PRODUCT_NAME
<product name>
string
DENSITY
<density>
real
COMMENT
<comment>
string
END_OF_GENERAL_DATA
none
CYLINDER_DATA
none
END_OF_CYLINDER_DATA
none
CAP_DATA
none
END_OF_CAP_DATA
none
PEPIPED_DATA
none
END_OF_PEPIPED_DATA
none
CONE_DATA
none
END_OF_CONE_DATA
none

3:20
12 Series

Utilities
Keyword
Parameter
Parameter type
TORUS_DATA
none
END_OF_TORUS_DATA
none
ROTATIONAL_DATA
none
END_OF_ROTATIONAL_DATA
none
GENCYL_DATA
none
END_OF_GENCYL_DATA
none
POLYGON_DATA
none
END_OF_POLYGON_DATA
none
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR
none
NO_OF_SEG
<segments>
real
START_X
<start x>
real
START_Y
<start y>
real
START_Z
<start z>
real
AX
<ax>
real
AY
<ay>
real
AZ
<az>
real
<x>
real
<y>
real
<z>
real
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR
none
ORIGIN_X
<origin x>
real
ORIGIN_Y
<origin y>
real
ORIGIN_Z
<origin z>
real
V1X
<v1 x>
real
V1Y
<v1 y>
real
V1Z
<v1 z>
real
V2X
<v2 x>
real
V2Y
<v2 y>
real
V2Z
<v2 z>
real
RADIUS
<radius>
real
RADIUS2
<radius 2>
real

3:21
12 Series

Utilities
Keyword
Parameter
Parameter type
HEIGHT
<height>
real
END_OF_OBJECT_DATA
COLOUR
none
<colour>
integer
<type of file> shall have the value VOLUME_OBJECTS.

<version> is a code for the version of the Object File and Conversion Program. The
version will be used to enable modifications and additions in the future.
The root assembly has to be created by AGT or ATT !
<name> is the system name of the Placed Volume.

name> is the assembly names, and the position number, separated by
slashes. The assembly name specify which assembly the volume will belong to. When the
program starts storing the volume, the assemblies will be created if they are not already
present.The root assembly must be created by the AGT or ATT.
<product
<density> is the density of the object in kg/mm3. It should be the mean density, so that
the sum of the volume of all primitives times the density gives the correct weight. (Density
has no meaning for the polygon primitive but the keyword should nevertheless exist.)
<comment> is a comment of any kind.The user has the possibility to organise these
comments in a suitable way so that they represent valuable information for the user. The
Comment information is stored as an object on the Unplaced Volume Databank with the
name #VT# <name>.
<segments> is the number of segments in a contour, to be further described after this
keyword.
<start x>, <start y> and <start z> are the coordinates of the starting point
of a contour or polygon.
<ax>, <ay> and <az> are the coordinates of an amplitude vector, describing one
segment. A segment goes from the previously described point to the following point. (If an
amplitude vector is zero, i.e. if a segment is a line, then the amplitude vector may be omitted
altogether.)
<x>, <y> and <z> are the coordinates of a node point of a contour or polygon, i.e. the
ending point of one segment and possibly the starting point of a subsequent segment.
<origin x>, <origin y> and <origin z> are the coordinates of an origin point
of a primitive.
<v1 x>, <v1 y> and <v1 z> are the coordinates of a vector, characteristic for
some primitives. The length of the vector is essential for the primitive.
<v2 x>, <v2 y> and <v2 z> are the coordinates of a second vector, characteristic
for some primitives. The length of the vector is essential for the primitive.
<radius> is a radius, characteristic for some primitives.

<radius 2> is a second radius, characteristic for some primitives.
<height> is a height, characteristic for some primitives.
<colour> is a colour code.

3:22
12 Series

Utilities
Separate keywords, those without parameters, denote the start and end of data groups of
different kinds.
Overall Format
The overall format of a file is as follows :
indicating the start of a file
VERSION
OBJECT_DATA
indicating the start of one object
general data
primitive one
primitive two
....
any number of primitives
.....
END_OF_OBJECT_DATA
OBJECT_DATA
indicating the start of the second object
....
END_OF_OBJECT_DATA
indicating the end of the second object
OBJECT_DATA
indicating the start of the third object
.....
END_OF_OBJECT_DATA
indicating the end of the third object
OBJECT_DATA
.....
any number of objects in the file
END_OF_OBJECT_DATA
General Data
A general data group must always exist for each object. It contains information of
general administrative kind and has the following layout:
GENERAL_DATA
NAME
PRODUCT_NAME
DENSITY
COMMENT
COMMENT

3:23
12 Series

Utilities
COMMENT
....
a number of consecutive comments
END_OF_GENERAL_DATA
The comments can contain any type of ASCII data. The data information will be shown in
the Info Model function of most applications.
Primitive Data
Each primitive, available in the system, can be described in a primitive group. Such a group
always starts and ends with keywords, specific for the primitive. In between these keywords,
additional keywords describe the geometric data of the primitive.
Immediately after the start keyword, a colour keyword may follow with information about the
appropriate colour for the primitive. The following colour codes are used:
green
cyan
12
blue
18
magenta
24
red
30
yellow
35
white
More colour codes will be added as a part of the ongoing system additions.
The primitives available are:
cylinder
cap (spherical segment)
parallel epiped
cone
torus
rotational cylinder
general cylinder (extrusion primitive)
polygon
All the primitives will be described in detail below. The following figures details the primitives
and the geometric parameters, describing them:

3:24
12 Series

Utilities

3:25
12 Series

Utilities

3:26
12 Series

Utilities
Contour Data
Some of the primitives contain a contour group. The Layout of such a group is the following:
START_OF_3D_CONTOUR
indicating the start of a contour
NO_OF_SEG
START_X
START_Y
START_Z
AX
AY
AZ
X
Y
Z
AX
AY
AZ
X
Y
Z
implicit zero amplitude vector
X
Y
Z
.....
.....
any number of segments
.....
END_OF_3D_CONTOUR
indicating the end of a contour
A contour must be planar. If not, serious tolerance problems may occur when the data are
used in the system, e.g. for interference check.
There is no limit for the number of segments in a contour, but for performance reasons, the
number should be as low as possible.

3:27
12 Series

Utilities
Cylinder
The cylinder primitive describes a cylinder, e.g. a straight pipe:
CYLINDER_DATA
ORIGIN_X
ORIGIN_Y
ORIGIN_Z
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
RADIUS
END_OF_CYLINDER_DATA
Cap
The cap primitive describes a spherical segments, i.e. a part of a sphere, cut off with plane.
CAP_DATA
ORIGIN_X
ORIGIN_Y
ORIGIN_Z
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
RADIUS
END_OF_CAP_DATA
The maximum size of a cap is half a sphere. Consequently, a whole sphere must be
described as two cap primitives.
Parallel Epiped
The parallel epiped primitive describes a parallel epiped, including the cube.
PEPIPED_DATA
ORIGIN_X
ORIGIN_Y
ORIGIN_Z
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
V2X
V2Y

3:28
12 Series

Utilities
V2Z
HEIGHT
END_OF_PEPIPED_DATA
The two vectors v1 and v2 correspond to the x and the y axis respectively in a right hand
coordinate system.
Cone
The cone primitive describes a cone. At least one of the radii must be greater then zero.
CONE_DATA
ORIGIN_X
ORIGIN_Y
ORIGIN_Z
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
RADIUS
RADIUS2
END_OF_CONE_DATA
Torus
The torus primitive describes a torus less than or equal to 180 degrees.
TORUS_DATA
START_X
START_Y
START_Z
AX
AY
AZ
X
Y
Z
RADIUS
END_OF_TORUS_DATA

3:29
12 Series

Utilities
Rotational Cylinder
The rotational cylinder primitive describes a rotational solid.
ROTATIONA_DATA
contour
ORIGIN_X
a closed contour which, rotated around an axis

describes the rotational primitive
a point on the rotation axis
ORIGIN_Y
ORIGIN_Z
V1X
direction vector of the rotation axis
V1Y
V1Z
END_OF_ROTATIONAL_DATA
The contour may be (but need not be) tangential to the rotation axis but must not intersect
the axis. The rotation angle is always 360 degrees.
General Cylinder
The general cylinder primitive describes a general cylinder, also called an extrusion solid.
GENCYL_DATA
contour
a closed contour which, extruded in the direction of

the following vector, describes the primitive
V1X
V1Y
V1Z
.....
possibly optional holes
END_OF_GENCYL_DATA
Polygon
The polygon primitive describes a polygon.
POLYGON_DATA
START_X
START_Y
START_Z
X

3:30
12 Series

Utilities
Y
Z
X
Y
Z
X
Y
Z
.....
.....
any number of node points
END_OF_POLYGON_DATA
There is no limit to the number of node points in the polygon but for performance reasons it
should be as low as possible.
The polygon primitive does not have any mass.
3.9
SZ004 - Creation of Pictures by Extracting Model

Data
3.9.1
General
This document describes optional software.
SZ004 is a stand-alone program used to create pictures (views) by extracting model data
from data banks. This task is an alternative to the Insert/Model functionality in Draftingbased graphic applications.
To create pictures, an input file to SZ004 must be created, using the ordinary editor. A
special language is used to order what model data to be extracted, to define projection data
and to choose the mode of representation. The resulting pictures, optionally with hidden
lines removed, are stored by the program the subpicture data bank given by SBD_PICT, and
can later be used as plane pictures or as an environment in an interactive modelling
programs.
3.9.2
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures

Purpose
SZ004 is a stand-alone program used to create model pictures.
Files
The following picture illustrates the files involved when the interpreter is run:

3:31
12 Series

Utilities
SZ004 is a program for creation of model pictures.

STX is a syntax file describing what model parts to be collected and how they shall be
presented in a picture. It can have an arbitrary name given interactively to the program or in
the logical name SB_DATA. A special language is used. For the syntax, see the following
pages.
DB1 is the data bank containing the objects from where to extract attribute information. The
data banks have to be given as logical names:
SB_HULL
Hull structure data bank
SB_CGDB
Hull form data bank
SB_ASSDB
Assembly data bank
DB2 is the resulting output stored on a data bank. The following logical name has to be
assigned:
SBD_PICT
Data bank where the resulting pictures are stored.
LOG is a log file containing a list of the syntax file together with possible error messages. It
can have an arbitrary name given interactively to the program or in the logical name
PRINTER0.
DEF is a default file where e.g. the projection data can be defined by the operator. If the
name is not given in the logical name SBD_DEF1, the variables are set to existing default
values.
How to Run the Program for Creation of Model Pictures

The creation of model pictures is accomplished by:
creating the syntax file, describing what model parts to be collected and how they shall
be presented in a picture
assigning the environment variable SB_DATA to the name of the given syntax file
assigning the environment variable PRINTER0 to the name of the resulting syntax
interpretation list
running SZ004
This sequence of operations may be put in a script file for easier invocation.

3:32
12 Series

Utilities
3.9.3
Interpreter for Creation of Model Pictures in Batch - Syntax

General
The default representation for each model type is fetched from the default file with the
logical name SBD_DEF1. This default representation can be overridden via the syntax for
SZ004.
Conventions Used in this Document

(Cf the document Users Guide Basic / Getting Started / Interpretative Language (TIL)).
[ ]
Optional.
{ }
Choice (one must be chosen from the vertically listed choices or at least one from
the repeated expressions).
<>
Term,
...
Preceding expression mya be repeated.
Statement Types
The input language contains the following different statement types:
CREATE_VIEW
The CREATE_VIEW statement is used to specify how information

shall created in the view.
PANEL
The PANEL statement specifies the panels to be presented and

how.
CURVE
The CURVE statement specifies which and how the curves are to
be presented.
FAIR
The FAIR statement specifies which fairing curves to present.
LONG
The LONG statement specifies which longitudinals to present.
TRANS
The TRANS statement specifies which transversals to present.
SURF
The SURF statement specifies which surfaces to present.
ASSEMBLY
The ASSEMBLY statement specifies which assembly to present.
Scheme Syntax
The different statement types may occur in the following way in an input file.
{ CREATE_VIEW { [ PANEL CURVE VOLUME FAIR LONG TRANS SURF]

ASSEMBLY }... } ...
Statement Syntax
Below, the complete syntax of each statement type is described.

3:33
12 Series

Utilities
The CREATE_VIEW Statement
CREATE_VIEW
,
<name of view to create>

[/BOX=(XMIN=<xmin>,YMIN=<ymin>,ZMIN=<zmin>,
XMAX=<xmax>,YMAX=<ymax>,ZMAX=<zmax>]
[/HIDD=<hidden lines>]
/PROJ=<type of projection>
[/SLICE1=(<x>,<y>,<z>)]
[/SLICE2=(<x>,<y>,<z>)] ;
<name of view to create>

The term <name of view to create> specifies the name of the
new picture object to be created
/HIDD
The resulting view will be created with the hidden lines removed if the
term has the value YES. Else if the value is set to NO no lines will be
hidden. NO is default.
/PROJ
Contains a projection type. The projection is given with a number (1-7).

The projection data is collected from default values.
/SLICE1
For /Proje=7 see ASSEMBLY statement and /BAS_PLAN Keyword
/SLICE2
Contains 3D points. These points together with the normal vector of the
projection plane defines the slicing planes. The resulting model picture
will always be the slice between those planes. If only one point is given
(SLICE1 or SLICE2), then all information behind this plane will be
removed.
/BOX
Only those objects which are in the defined box will be included.
The PANEL Statement
PANEL ,
<panel name>
[/PAN=<panel pres>
/STI=<stiffener pres>
/BRA=<bracket pres>
/ENDCUT=<endcut pres>
/CUTOUT=<cutout pres>
/SIDE1=<side pres>] ;

3:34
12 Series

Utilities
<panel name>
To create a model picture from the panel data bank,

name>, must be
the panel name, <panel
specified. The name can be specified with a wild
card (*) at the end. The name must be less than 64
characters.
/PAN=<panel pres>
If the panel is to be presented with material then

<panel pres> must contain then value MTRL,
else if it is to be presented thin then the value shall
be THIN.
/STI=<stiffener pres>
The stiffeners and flanges can be presented in

three ways:
as line, the value shall be 'LINE'
as thin, the value shall be 'THIN'
with material, the value shall be 'MTRL'
The fourth possible value is 'NO' and will result in

the fact that no stiffeners are presented.
/BRA=<bracket pres>
If the bracket is to be presented with material then

<bracket
pres> must contain the value
MTRL, else if it is to be presented thin then the
value shall be THIN. The value NO indicates that
no brackets are to be presented.
/ENDCUT=<endcut pres>
If stiffeners shall be presented with endcuts then

<endcut pres> shall be YES, else the value shall
be NO.
/CUTOUT=<cutout pres>
If the panel shall be presented with cutouts the

value of <cutout pres> shall be YES, else the
value shall be NO.
/SIDE1=<side pres>]
If the panel is generated so that both starboard and

portside exist, it is possible to choose side. SB,
PS and BOTH are the valid values.
The CURVE Statement
CURVE ,
<curve name>
/SIDE2=<side pres>] ;

3:35
12 Series

Utilities
<curve name>
To create a model picture from the curve data bank,

the curve name, <curve name>, must be specified.
The name can be specified with a wild card (*) at the
end. Neither of the names can be more than 63
characters long.
/SIDE2=<side pres>
If the panel is generated so that both starboard and

portside exist, it is possible to choose side. SB, PS
and BOTH are the valid values.
The FAIR Statement
FAIR ,
<fairing curve name> ;
<fairing curve name>
To create a model picture from the fairing curve

data bank, the fairing curve name, <fairing
curve name>, must be specified. The name
can be specified with a wild card (*) at the end.
Max length of name is 63 characters.
The LONG Statement
LONG ,
<longitudinal name>
/SIDE3=<side pres>;
<longitudinal
name>
To create a model picture from the longitudinal data bank,

the longitudinal name, <longitudinal name>, must
be specified. The name can be specified with a wild card
(*) at the end. Max length of name is 63 characters.
/SIDE3=<side
pres>]
If the longitudinal is generated so that both starboard and

portside exist, it is possible to choose side. SB, PS and
BOTH are the valid values.
The TRANS Statement
TRANS ,
<transversal name>
/SIDE4=<side pres>;

3:36
12 Series

Utilities
<transversal name>
To create a model picture from the transversal data

bank, the transversal name, <transversal
name>, must be specified. The name can be
specified with a wild card (*) at the end. Max length of
name is 63 characters.
/SIDE4=<side pres>]
If the transversal is generated so that both starboard

and portside exist, it is possible to choose side. SB,
The SURF Statement
SURF ,
<surface name>
/SIDE5=<side pres>;
<surface name>
To create a model picture from the surface data

bank, the surface name, <surface name>, must
be specified. The name can be specified with a wild
card (*) at the end. Max length of name is 63
characters.
/SIDE5=<side pres>]
If the surface is generated so that both starboard

and portside exist, it is possible to choose side. SB,
The ASSEMBLY Statement

The assembly key attributes must be defined with the first assembly statement and
are then valid for all consecutive assemblies modelled in the same view.
ASSEMBLY ,
<assembly name>
[/KEY_PLANE_PANEL
/KEY_CURVED_PANEL
/KEY_PIPE
/KEY_EQUIPMENT
/KEY_CABLEWAY
/KEY_STRUCTURE
/KEY_VENTILATION
/BASE_PAN = <panel name>];

3:37
12 Series

Utilities
<assembly name>
To create a model picture from the assembly

data bank, the assembly name, <assembly
name>, must be specified. Max length of name
is 63 characters.
/KEY_PLANE_PANEL
The plane panels in given assembly will be

presented.
/KEY_CURVED_PANEL
The curved panels in given assembly will be

presented.
/KEY_PIPE
The pipes in given assembly will be presented.
/KEY_EQUIPMENT
The equipment items in given assembly will be

presented.
/KEY_CABLEWAY
The cableway in given assembly will be

presented.
/KEY_STRUCTURE
the structure in given assembly will be

presented.
/BAS_PAN =<panel name>
Orientation of the assembly is based on the

given panel (only plane panel) in such a way
that the panel surface is inclined and the
structure is on this side. The statement
Keyword /PROJ must be set to 7.
The /BAS_PAN Keyword is used for
automatically generated assembly drawings.
3.9.4
Creation of a Model Picture in Batch - Example

The syntax file below illustrates how a model picture is created in batch. The picture will be
presented in standard projection 4, fetched from the default file and hidden lines will be
removed.
CREATE_VIEW ,TEST_123/PROJ=4/HIDD=YES;
PANEL,CR191-122
/PAN=MTRL
/BRA=MTRL
/STI=MTRL;
PANEL,CR815-31*/PAN=MTRL/CUTOUT=YES;
CREATE_VIEW,PVOLUME/PROJ=2
/BOX=(XMIN= -10000,YMIN= 0.0, ZMIN=0.0,
XMAX=100000,YMAX=20000, ZMAX=20000);
PANEL,ES123-*;

3:38
12 Series

Utilities
3.10
SY010 - Drawing Recovery

Drawings produced by Marine Drafting contain a lot of structured graphic information.
Because of the complexity of the object and the software operating on it, there is always a
risk that the object becomes inconsistent (corrupted) in some sense. Normally, the software
can deal with this but in some cases it is not possible to interpret such an object in a
controlled way. Of course, the underlying piece of software that causes a specific corruption
in the object should be identified and corrected.
However, it is possible for the user to repair an already damaged drawing in a way that the
main part of it can be recovered. For this purpose, the program sy010 is used to check and
optionally repair such objects. It should be stressed here that sy010 is not capable of
miracles; there might be corruptions that are impossible to recover from. However,
inconsistency of moderate severity is normally fully recoverable.
The inconsistencies are divided in four severities:
Fatal
A serious corruption that the system normally cannot handle.
Often possible to recover, but risk for loss of vital data. In some cases, not possible to
recover at all.
Error
A major corruption that the system might fail to handle.
Good chances to recover without loss of data.
Warning
A minor corruption that the system can deal with in a controlled way.
The object can normally be recovered without any loss of data.
Informational
No corruption, but just an indication that the consistency might cause somewhat slower
performance.
The object can be recovered without any loss of data.
It should be stressed here that the word corruption should not be interpreted as if the
drawing is damaged and cannot be used. Apart from fatal severities, the system can
normally read such a drawing anyway.
Operation:
The program will check all (or selected) drawings in the Drawing data bank, connected to
SB_PDB.
The user is prompted to key in the name of the drawing(s) to check. Wildcards are accepted
in the drawing name. Please note that drawings of versions less than 8 will be not treated.
For each drawing matching the given name, the program will check its consistency and
optionally repair and store it back on the data bank.
To exit the program, click <CR>.
For each corrupted object found, the program produces a log file containing diagnoses and
suggested recovery actions for that object.. According to user's choice, the object will then
be repaired and stored back on the data bank.
The program is invoked by the following call:
sy010 [-name <object name>]

3:39
12 Series

Utilities
[-sourcedb <DB name>]

[ -report | -repair]
[-logdir <directory name>]
[-targetdb <DB name>]
[-suppress fatal | error | warning | informational]
The program options control the behaviour of the program:
-name <object name>
States the name(s) of the objects to check. Wild cards are accepted in the
name.
If missing, the program will ask the user for name.
-sourcedb <DB name>
Gives the name of the source databank. If missing, the source data bank
SB_PDB will be used.
[ -report | -repair]
To only perform a check, -report is given. A log file, named <object name>.log,
of each inconsistent object is produced, containing diagnoses and suggested
recovery actions for that object
To perform a check and repair if necessary, -repair is given. A log file, named
<object name>_fix.log of each repaired object is produced, containing
diagnoses and the taken recovery actions for that object.
If none of [-report | -repair] is given, the program will for each inconsistent
object let the user decide the recovery action. Accepted answers to the prompt
Recover ? (Y, YA, N, NA, Q), will then be
Y, meaning Yes to this one
YA, meaning Yes to this and remaining ones
N, meaning No to this one
NA, meaning No to this and remaining ones
Q, meaning quit the program
-logdir <directory name>

Gives the name of the directory under which the log files will be placed.
If missing, the TEMP directory will be used.
-targetdb <DB name>
Gives the name of the target databank. i.e. in which data bank the repaired
objects should be stored.
If missing, the source data bank will be used.
Note: that in case the recovered objects are stored back in the source data
bank, the original ones will be overwritten.

3:40
12 Series

Utilities
[-suppress fatal | error | warning | informational]

It is possible to suppress the reporting of certain severities in the log files
(although the repair option will always be carried out if ordered). For example,
use the argument informational if You do not want to see the inconsistencies of
severity informational.
Note: that multiple severities may be suppressed simultaneously.

3:41
12 Series

Utilities

3:42
12 Series

Appendices
Appendices
A.1
Internal Drawing Data Structure

A drawing consists of a number of elements grouped in a tree-like hierarchy structure.
Examples of such elements are subpictures on the first four levels (grouping subordinate
elements), geometry elements on the 5:th level (containing the graphic information) and
attribute elements (containing additional information). There is currently a limitation of the
amount of information that can be contained in the drawing. This limitation is measured as
the total number of elements in the drawing and is at present 1073741824. If this limit is
reached, the system will signal the error 301 and the currently invoked function will be
aborted.
A.2
A.3
Set-up Files used by Drafting

File
Environment variable
Contents
Layer alias file
SB_LAYER_ALIAS
User-defined layer names
Layer class file
SBD_LAYER_CLASS
User-defined layer classes
Default file
SBD_DEF1
System default information
Softness alias file
SB_MTRL_ALIAS
Translation
aliases
of
softness
Compatibility with other Versions

Marine Drafting is backwards compatible in such a way that drawings created in previous
versions can be read and further processed. If such a drawing is later is stored it will
however not be usable in older versions.
Note: The first version used in Marine Drafting is 8, which is the same as last version used
in Tribon Drafting (a predecessor to Marine Drafting). Conversion of versions less
than 8 (coming from Tribon Drafting) is not supported.

A:1
12 Series

Appendices
A.4
Drafting Default File Keywords
A.4.1
Texts
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
TEXT_FONT
TBSystem
Font0
Name of font for general texts (e.g. Arial).
TEXT_STD_HEIGHT
3.5
Standard text height
TEXT_STD_ROT
0.0
Standard text rotation angle
TEXT_ASPECT
1.0
Text aspect ratio
TEXT_SLANT
90
Text slanting angle (degrees)
TEXT_ILSP_FAC
1.5
Factor for interline space (interline space =

factor * text height)
TEXT_AUT_LINE
Automatic positioning of text at standard

distance from line
AVEVA Marine system fonts are named

TBSystemFont<no>, where no is the font
number (e.g. TBSystemFont1).
1 = Yes
0 = No
TEXT_STD_DIST
1.5
Standard distance, text to line
TEXT_AUT_DIST
3.0
Maximum distance from line to text, if

automatic positioning to line shall be applied
TEXT_AUT_ANG
45
Maximum difference in rotation angle

between line and text, if automatic
positioning to line shall be applied.
TEXT_AUT_SYMB
Code for automatic positioning of text in

symbols
1 = Yes,
0= No
TEXT_SYM_DIST
10
Maximum distance from text to symbol, if

automatic positioning in symbol shall be
applied.
TEXT_MIRROR_MODE
Controls how text strings should be handled

in the MIRROR function.
0 = Text strings will be mirrored
1 = Text strings will not be mirrored

A:2
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.2
Symbols
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
SYMB_FONT
21
Symbol font
SYMB_STD_HEIGHT
12.0
Standard symbol space height
SYMB_STD_ROT
0.0
Standard rotation angle for symbols
SYMB_AUT_LINE
Code for automatic positioning of symbols to

line:
1 = Yes
0 = No
SYMB_STD_DIST
2.5
Standard distance, symbols to line
SYMB_AUT_DIST
10
Maximum distance from symbol to line if

automatic positioning to line shall be
applied.
SYMB_SEARCH_MODE
-1
Symbol search mode when indicating in

drawing:
-1 = True distance comparison,
1 = Fast and less accurate distance comparison
A.4.3
Scales
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
MOD_DEF_SCL
0.02
Default scale for model information.
PICT_DEF_SCL
0.02
Default scale for drawings

A:3
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.4
Print Scale
Keyword
System
default
value
By setting the keyword PRINT_SCALE, the

scale of the printed page will be visible in the
upper right corner of the printouts. This
applies when printing pages in Current
Window or Capture Area settings.
PRINT_SCALE
A.4.5
Explanation
Projection Information
The keywords PROJ_VEC_U1 to PROJ_VEC_U6, contain the vector along the u-axis for
each projection plane. The keywords PROJ_VEC_W1 to PROJ_VEC_W6, contain the
vector perpendicular to each projection plane.
Note: When giving the projection vectors, the u-vector is primary and the given w-vector
adapts to this. If you expect the w-vector to be primary, make sure the v-vector is in
the view plane defined by w-vector!
Keyword
System default value
PROJ_VEC_U1
0.0 , 1.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_W1
1.0 , 0.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_U2
1.0 , 0.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_W2
0.0 ,-1.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_U3
0.0 , 1.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_W3
0.0 , 0.0 , 1.0
PROJ_VEC_U4
0.7071068 , -0.7071068 ,
0.0
PROJ_VEC_W4
-0.5773503,-0.5773503
0.5773503
PROJ_VEC_U5
0.0 ,-1.0 , 0.0
PROJ_VEC_W5
-1.0 , 0.0, 0.0
PROJ_VEC_U6
-1.0 , 0.0, 0.0
PROJ_VEC_W6
0.0 , 1.0 , 0.0

A:4
Explanation
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.6
Keyword
System default value
Explanation
PROJ_VEC_U7
1.0, 0.0, 0.0
Projection data (vector along u-axis),

used in "Create Model Pictures in
batch" (sz004) program
PROJ_VEC_W7
0.0, 0.0, -1.0
Projection
data
(vector
perpendicular), used in "Create
Model Pictures in batch" (sz004)
program
Dimensioning
Keywords prefixed by 'LIN' are used in Linear Dimensions, by 'ANG' in Angle Dimensions,
by 'DIA' and 'RAD' in Diameter and Radius Dimensions respectively. Keywords prefixed by
'DTP' are used in the Distance to Plane dimensions. Concerning coordinates, curve length
and area dimensions, relevant dimensioning characteristics will at present be fetched from
the linear status.
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_TEXT_FONT
TBSystemFont0
Name of font
dimensions
DIM_TEXT_ASPECT
1.0
Aspect ratio for texts in dimensions
DIM_TEXT_SLANT
90.0
Slanting angle (degrees) for texts

in dimensions
DIM_LIN_DEC
Number of decimals to present in

calculated measures
DIM_ANG_DEC
See above
DIM_RAD_DEC
See above
DIM_DIA_DEC
See above
DIM_LIN_TEXTH
3.5
Height of measure text
DIM_ANG_TEXTH
3.5
See above
DIM_RAD_TEXTH
3.5
See above
DIM_DIA_TEXTH
3.5
See above
DIM_LIN_TEXT_DEFINIT
ION
"#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_ANG_TEXT_DEFINIT
ION
"#DIM()~0"
intelligent text
DIM_RAD_TEXT_DEFINIT
ION
"R#DIM()"
Intelligent text

A:5
for
texts
in
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_DIA_TEXT_DEFINIT
ION
"~D#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_COORDX_TEXT_DEFI
NITION
"X=#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_COORDY_TEXT_DEFI
NITION
"Y=#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_COORDZ_TEXT_DEFI
NITION
"Z=#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_DTP_BOX_TEXT_DEF
INITION
"H=#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_DTP_LEAD_TEXT_DE
FINITION
"#DIM()"
Intelligent text
DIM_DTP_BASELINE_REF
_TEXT
from BL
Plane Reference Text for principal

plane Base Line in Distance To
Plane dimensioning
DIM_DTP_CENTRELINE_R
EF_TEXT
off CL

plane Centre Line in Distance To
Plane dimensioning
DIM_DTP_AFTPERPENDIC
ULAR_REF_TEXT
from AP

plane Aft Perpendicular in Distance
To Plane dimensioning
DIM_LIN_SYMBH
16.0
Arrow size (symbol height)
DIM_ANG_SYMBH
16.0
See above
DIM_RAD_SYMBH
16.0
See above
DIM_DIA_SYMBH
16.0
See above
DIM_LIN_ARROW
Type of arrow head:

1 = Small arrow
2 = Medium arrow
3 = Wide arrow
4 = Slash
5 = Dot
DIM_ANG_ARROW
See above
DIM_RAD_ARROW
See above
DIM_DIA_ARROW
See above
DIM_LIN_DLT
1.5
Distance between the projection

line and the measure text

A:6
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_RAD_DLT
1.5
Distance between the reference

DIM_DIA_DLT
1.5
Distance between the reference

DIM_LIN_GAP
3.0
Reference line gap, i.e. the gap

between a measure point and start
of reference line.
DIM_ANG_GAP
3.0
Reference line gap. The gap

between a leg of the angle and
start of the reference line
DIM_LIN_EXC
2.0
Reference line excess, i.e. the

excess at the end of the reference
line
DIM_ANG_EXC
2.0
Reference line excess. The excess

at he end of the reference line
DIM_LIN_FIT
Controls if the text height should be

decreased when space for the
measure text is insufficient.
(See
DIM_TEXT_ASPECT_FIT)
also
= 1 Decrease text height to make the

text fit. (note that the minimum
height DIM_TXT_MIINH allowed
cannot be passed)
= 2 Rotate the text to be parallel to the
witness line.
= 3 Do not change height.
DIM_TEXT_ASPECT_FIT
Controls if the text aspect should

be decreased when space for the
measure text is insufficient.
(See also DIM_LIN_FIT)
= 1 Decrease text aspect in 0.1 steps
until the text fits. (note that the
minimum aspect
DIM_TXT_MIN_ASPECT allowed
cannot be passed)
= 2 Do not change aspect.
DIM_TXT_MIN_ASPECT
0.6
Minimum text aspect allowed when

trying to make the text fit (see
DIM_TEXT_ASPECT_FIT)
DIM_TXT_MINH
1.0
Minimum height allowed when

shrinking the measure text, see
DIM_LIN_FIT.

A:7
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_LIN_NORM_PLT
Way of placing texts in normal

measurements:
1 = Parallel to projection line, above
2 = Parallel to projection line,"splitting"
this line into two equal halves
3 = Perpendicular to projection line,
above
DIM_LIN_PRES
Way
of
presenting
measurements
single
1 = Text inside, both arrows inside

2 = Text inside, both arrows outside
3 = Text outside, one arrow inside and
the other outside
4 = Text outside, both arrows outside
DIM_RAD_PRES
Way of presenting a cross radius

measure:
the other outside
DIM_DIA_PRES
Way of presenting
diameter measure:
cross

the other outside
DIM_LIN_CLEAR
3.0
Chain gap. The gap can, however,

not be greater than half the length
of the projection line.
DIM_LIN_STEP
3.0
Staircase factor. This factor

multiplied with the text height gives
the
distance
between
the
projection lines in a staircase
measurement.
DIM_LIN_CHAIN_PLT
Way of placing texts in chained

measurements:
1 = Along projection line, centred
2 = Along projection line, at the arrow.
3 = Perpendicular to the projection
line, at the arrow.
4 = Perpendicular to the projection
line, in front of the reference line.

A:8
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF_S
IDE
"Non_mould"
Side of the shell profile web to

calculate the angle (used in the
Shell Profile Mounting Angle
function). Possible values:
"Non_mould"
"Mould"
DIM_ANG_SHELL_PROF_L
EG
300
Length of the "seam" leg, i.e. the

leg simulating the seam side of an
angle measurement device (used
in the Shell Profile Mounting Angle
function).
DIM_FAC1
1.0
This factor multiplied with the arrow

length gives the distance between
the measure text and:
the arrow in a single

measurement when the text is
placed
outside
(see
LIN_PRES) - the arrow in a
straight radius measurement.
- the knuckle in a knuckled
radius measurement. - the
arrow in a straight diameter
measurement.
the knuckle in a knuckled

diameter measurement - the
arrow in a cross diameter
measurement when the text is
placed
outside
(see
DIA_PRES).
DIM_FAC2
1.0
This factor multiplied with the

height of the measure text gives
the gap between the measure text
and the split projection line in a
normal measurement.
DIM_FAC3
1.0

the distance between the rotated
text and the end of the reference
line in a chained measurement
(see LIN_CHAIN_PLT).

A:9
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_FAC4
0.3

length gives the minimum distance
between the arrow and the
measure text
in linear measurements when

the text is placed inside.
in
cross
diameter
measurements when the text
is placed inside
DIM_FAC5
1.5

the distance between the start of
the diameter symbol and the text in
diameter
and
linear
(see
LIN_PRESYM) measurements
DIM_FAC6
0.3

the space between the measure
text and the tolerance text in a
symmetric tolerance
DIM_FAC7
0.3

the space between the measure
text and the tolerance text in an
unsymmetric tolerance
DIM_FAC8
2.0

length gives the excess of
DIM_FAC9

0.35
the projection line in a single

measurement with the arrow
placed outside (flipped) and
the measure text placed either
inside or at the opposite end
(see LIN_PRES).
the reference line in a cross

diameter measurement with
the arrow placed outside
(flipped) and the measure text
placed either inside or at the
opposite end (see DIA_PRES)

height of the tolerance text gives
the interline space between the
upper and lower tolerance limits in
an unsymmetric tolerance.
A:10
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
DIM_AUTO_BLANKING
YES
Holds the modal blanking flag

during dimensioning creation.
Legal values:
YES = Blank-out model geometry
obscured by the dimensioning
NO = Do not blank-out obscured
entities
DIM_BLANKING_MARGIN
0.0
Holds the model blanking margin

during dimensioning creation.
Legal values:
non-negative
A.4.7
Hatching
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
HATCH_ANG_PAT1
60.0
Angle of predefined hatch pattern no 1
HATCH_ANG_PAT2
-60.0
Angle of predefined hatch pattern no 2
HATCH_ANG_CROSS
60.0
Angle of predefined hatch pattern no 3, i.e.

+-60 (cross pattern)
HATCH_DIST_PAT1
5.0
The distance between hatch

predefined hatch pattern #1.
lines
in
HATCH_DIST_PAT2
5.0

lines
in
HATCH_DIST_CROSS
5.0

lines
in
HATCH_PAT_TYPE
Current type of pattern:

1 = predefined no 1
2 = predefined no 2
3 = predefined no 3
4 = key in
5 = user-defined
HATCH_SCL_MODE
Hatch pattern scale mode:

0 = The pattern will not be scaled. The hatch
pattern will be added to the drawing as it is
created.
1 = The hatch pattern will be scaled. The scale
will be fetched from the surrounding contour

A:11
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.8
Notes, Position Numbers and Labels
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
NOTE_SYMB_EXTENDED_RANGE
No
Controls the use of the alternative

symbol font for Note symbols.
Legal values:
"No": Use the standard font #21
"Yes":Use the alternative font

#41
NOT_SYM_CUR
31
Current note symbol
NOTE_START_SYM_CUR
81
Current start symbol for notes with

start and end symbol
NOTE_END_SYM_CUR
91
Current end symbol for notes with

start and end symbol
NOT_FAC_HEIGHT
1.5
Height tolerance factor (>1) for

notes, expressed in text height units.
A factor of 1.5 means that the space
below and above the text is equal to
0.25*(text height).
NOT_FAC_WIDTH
0.5
Width tolerance factor for notes,

expressed in text height units. A
factor of 0.5 means that the space
before and after the text is 0.5 * (text
height)
NOTE_MULTILEADER
"No"
Controls if it should be possible to

define multiple leaders when creating
General Notes
Legal values:
"No"
"Yes"
REF_SYM_CUR
21
Current reference symbol for notes

and position numbers
POSNO_SYMB_EXTENDED_RANGE
No
Controls the use of the alternative

symbol font for Position Number
symbols.
Legal values:

A:12
"No":Use the standard font #21
"Yes":Use the alternative font

#41
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
POS_SYM_CUR
61
Current position number symbol
POS_SYM_HEIGHT
12
Height of position number symbol
POS_TXT_MINH
1.5
Minimum height of the text to be put

in the position number symbol
LABEL_AUTO_BLANKING
YES
Holds the modal blanking flag during

label creation.
Legal values:
YES = Blank-out model geometry
obscured by the label
NO = Do not blank-out obscured entities
LABEL_BLANKING_MARGIN
0.0
Holds the modal blanking margin

during label creation.
Legal values:
non-negative
LABEL_LEADER_TYPE
1
(straight
)
Holds the modal shape of the leader

line during label creation.
Legal values:
1 = Straight
2 = Free bend point
3 = Free angle / Horizontal
4 = Free angle / Vertical
5 = Horizontal / Free angle
6 = Vertical / Free angle
7 = Disabled
LABEL_LEADER_BENT_ANGLE
45
Holds the modal slope (degrees) of

the Free angle part of leader line
during label creation.
Valid when using leader line shape
with Free angle option.
LABEL_LEADER_TERMINATOR
Disable
d
Holds the modal leader

terminator during label creation
line
Legal values:
- Open Arrow
- Narrow Dart
- Wide Dart
- Slash
- Open Dot
- Arrow
- Dot
- Disabled

A:13
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
LABEL_LEADER_TERMINATOR_S
IZE
3.0
Holds the size of the modal leader

line terminator during label creation
Legal values:
Positive
LABEL_BOX_TYPE
Rectan
gle
Holds the modal frame type during

label creation
Legal values:
Rectangle =Frame drawn as a rectangle
Disabled =Frame disabled
A.4.9
LABEL_BOX_GAB
1.0
Holds the modal fram margin during

label creation.
LABEL_TEXT_DEFINITION
"#FLNM
()"
Holds the modal intelligent text

during label creation
LABEL_SYMBOL_TEMPLATE
<empty>
Holds the name of the modal

symbolic template during label
creation
Drawing Codes
Keyword
System
default
value
HULL_CODE_PAN
1 = Thin panels
2 = Interior thickness
3 = Thin part plates
4 = Part plates with thickness
HULL_CODE_PROF
1 = No profiles
2 = Profiles as lines
3 = Thin profiles
4 = Material thickness
HULL_CODE_BRAC
1 = No brackets
2 = Thin brackets
3 = Material thickness
HULL_CODE_CUTO
1 = No cutouts
2 = Cutouts
3 = Cutouts and clips
HULL_CODE_ENDC
1 = No endcuts
2 = Endcuts

A:14
Explanation
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.10
Unit Codes
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
UNIT_AREA_FAC
Unit of the presented area:

0 = mm2
1 = cm2
2 = dm2
3 = m2
6 = km2
UNIT_VOLUME_FAC
Unit of the presented volume:

0 = mm3
1 = cm3
2 = dm3
3 = m3
6 = km3
UNIT_WEIGHT_FAC
Unit of the presented weight:

0 = kg
3 = ton
-3 = g
-1 = = hg
A.4.11
Default Colours
The value of a colour can be abbreviated as long as it stays unique. For a list of colour
values that can be used, see Colour Tables.
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
MEAS_COL
Red
Colour of measures
POSNO_COL
Red
Colour of position numbers
NOTE_COL
Red
Colour of notes
CLOUD_COLOUR
Green
Colour of Clouds
MARKUP_COLOUR
Green
Colour of Markups.

A:15
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
HATCH_SYS_COLOUR
Border
Colour of system-defined hatch patterns

and fill style evaluations. Border means
that the same colour as the indicated
border contour should be used.
Note1: The colour of userdefined hatch
patterns is defined by the pattern itself.
Note2: The colour of solid fill will always
evaluate as Border
A.4.12
CROSS_COLOUR
Green
Colour of cross components.
RULER_COLOUR
Green
Colour of 2D ruler components.
CONSTRUCTION_LINE_COLO
UR
White
Colour of construction lines.
Default Line Types
Keyword
System
default
value
MARKUP_LINTYPE
Solid
CLOUD_LINETYPE
Solid
Line type for clouds
HATCH_SYS_LINETYPE
Solid
Line type for system-defined

hatch patterns. (The line type
for user-defined hatch patterns
is defined by the pattern itself.)
CROSS_LINETYPE
Shortdash
ed
Line
Type
components.
RULER_LINETYPE
Solid
Line type for

components.
CONSTRUCTION_LINE_LINETYPE
ShortDash
ed
Line type for construction

A:16
Explanation
Line type for Markups.
for
2D
cross
ruler
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.13
A.4.14
Horizontal/Vertical Code
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
LINE_HV_CODE
LINE_HV_ANGLE
5,0
Smallest allowed deviation from

Relevant when LINE_HV_CODE=1
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
GAP_CONF
Confirm dialog in GAP function:
0 = Do not adjust
1 = Adjust
line.
Verify & Confirm
0 = Off,
1 = On
REGROUP_CONF
Confirm dialog in REGROUP function:

0 = Off
1 = On
SPLIT_CONF
Confirm in SPLIT function

0 = Off
1 = On
A.4.15
Form
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
FORM_NAME
'NONE'
Name of the drawing form that shall be

fetched automatically when creating a new
drawing.
'NONE' = No form shall be inserted.

A:17
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.16
Auto Point Definition Mode
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
AUTO_MODE1
Definition mode
AUTO_MODE2
13
Definition mode
AUTO_MODE3
Definition mode
AUTO_MODE4
Definition mode
AUTO_MODE5
Definition mode
AUTO_MODE6
Definition mode
AUTO_DIST
15
Distance in mm
DEF_POINT_MODE
2
(Cursor
position)
Controls the initial 2D point mode when invoking

geometry definition functions.
Legal values:
The wanted 2D point definition mode is given as an
integer:
= 1 Key in
= 2 Cursor position
= 3 End or node point
= 4 Existing point
= 5 Symbol connection
= 6 Auto point
= 7 Point on arc at angle
= 8 Arc centre
= 9 Point at distance along
= 10 Mid point
= 13 Intersecting point
= 21 Closest segment point
= 22 Centre of gravity
= 23 Event point
The resulting AUTO point in the point definition mode is derived as follows:
The system asks the user to give a cursor position
Using this cursor indication, the system tries to calculate six (different) points according
to the six point definition codes, MODE1-MODE6. Recognized point mode codes are:
(node point)
(symbol connection)
(arc centre)
10
(midpoint)

A:18
12 Series

Appendices
13
(intersection)
23
(event point)
Other codes (e.g. 0) are ignored.
A.4.17
A.4.18
The minimum distance between the cursor indication and the points derived in step (2)
is calculated. If this distance is less than AUTO_DIST, this "minimum-distance" point is
selected, otherwise the cursor position is selected.
Coordinate Translation
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
DIM_COORDX_TRA
NSLATION
DIM_COORDY_TRA
NSLATION
DIM_COORDZ_TRA
NSLATION
This keyword controls the translation action from

coordinates to hull references. It is at present
used in 3D Coordinate-Dimensioning and InsertModel. Translation code:
0 = No translation
1 = No translation
2 = No translation
3 = Translate using GENTAB values (frames and
longitudinal positions)
4 = Translate using GENTAB values (frames and
longitudinal positions)
Grid
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
GRID_ORIGIN
0.0, 0.0
The origin of the grid: <x, y>
GRID_SIZE
1.0, 1.0
The distance between grid points in x- and

y-direction respectively <dx, dy>
GRID_DISPL_INTERVAL
<n> Every n:th grid point will be displayed

A:19
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.19
Print
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
PRINT_ENVELOPE
PRINT_WHITE_AS
White
The colour that should replace white when

printing to a colour printer.
PRINT_BLACK
No
Controls if all colours will be printed as black

on a colour printer. Legal values:
= 0 Envelopes will not be opened when printed

= 1 Envelopes will be opened when printed
No = Print all colours as defined

Yes = Print all colours as black
A.4.20
Plate Part
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
DIST_MARK_CONT
Distance in mm between the marking line and

the plate part contour
MARK_TYPE
PLATE_PART_MODE
1 = Marking line represented by a line

2 = Marking line represented by hooks.
Controlling the questions to be asked in the

plate part function.
0 = All questions will be asked.
1 = The following questions will be asked
A.4.21
Unit System
AVEVA Marine offers the possibility to present real quantities either in SI unit system or
Imperial unit system. The keywords below control the unit system in which different
quantities should be presented. The three possible keyword values are 'Default', 'SI' and
'Imperial'. 'Default' means that the unit system is not specified here but rather controlled by a
corresponding environment variable.
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
LINEAR_MEASURE_UNIT_SYSTEM
Def
Linear measurements
WEIGHT_UNIT_SYSTEM
Def
Weight measurements
DENSITY_UNIT_SYSTEM
Def
Density measurements

A:20
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.22
A.4.23
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
AREA_UNIT_SYSTEM
Def
Area measurements
VOLUME_UNIT_SYSTEM
Def
Volume measurements
COORDINATE_UNIT_SYSTEM
Det
Co-ordinate measurements
Coordinate Axis
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
COORD_AXIS_X_TXT
'X'
Text to be displayed at the X-axis vector
COORD_AXIS_Y_TXT
'Y
'Text to be displayed at the Y-axis vector
COORD_AXIS_Z_TXT
'Z
'Text to be displayed at the Z-axis vector
COORD_AXIS_LENGTH
15
Length of the coordinate axis
COORD_AXIS_COLOUR
Green
Colour of the coordinate axis
MarkUp
Keyword
System default
value
Explanation
MARKUP_REF_SYMB_N
O
21
Markup Reference symbol in the system

symbol font (21).'
MARKUP_REF_SYMB_H
EIGHT
12.0
Height of Markup reference symbol.

A:21
12 Series

Appendices
A.4.24
Miscellaneous
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
HIDDEN_MODE
Controls the behavior in sz004

(Create model pictures in
batch) when hidden line is
ordered.
0 = Hidden lines will be removed
from resulting object
1 = Hidden lines will be kept with
hidden line specific linetype
and layer in the resulting
object.
POST_PROCESS_HIDDEN_LINE_VIE
W
NO
Controls the behavior in sz004

(Create model pictures in
batch) when hidden line is
ordered.
When invoking the hidden line
function, there is an options
(HIDDEN_MODE = 1 = to
keep hidden lines in the
drawing with a specific layer
and line type (dashed). The
resulting hidden lines may
(especially in plane views)
overlap each other in a way
that these overlapping parts
visually appears as solid on
the display. This keyword
controls if duplicate parts of
such hidden lines that
overlap each other should be
removed automatically.
Legal values:
YES = Yes, post-process the
view
NO = No, do not post-process
SUPPRESS_INIT_WARN
To control if warnings of
uninitiated hull should be
given or not.
0 = Warnings given if necessary.
1 = Warnings are suppressed.
UPDATE_DRAW_INFO_FORM

A:22
AVEVA Marine form used in

the Update Drawing Info
function. Valid values are 1, 2
and 3.
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
TWIST_PROFILE_ANGLE
0.0
The angle tolerance that is

allowed before a shell profile
is divided into another twisted
profile.
VALIDATE_MODELS_WHEN_OPEN_DW
G
NO
Controls the behaviour when

reading a drawing from the
data bank.
Should each model in the
drawing be validated (i.e.
compare the date of each
modeL subview against the
corresponding object in the
data bank) and exchanged
automatically if it is out-ofdate?
Legal values:
No: Do not validate models.
Confirm: Validate models but let
user confirm before
exchange
Yes: Do validate models and
exchange without
confirmation
KEEP_DRAWING_COMP_WHEN_EXCHA
NGE
YES
Controls the behaviour when

exchanging subpictures on
level 1 or 2.
Should drawing components
in the subpicture be copied
automatically to the resulting
subpicture after the exchange
operation?
Legal values:
No: Discard drawing
components
Confirm: Let user confirm when
necessary
Yes: Copy drawing components

A:23
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
ALLOW_MODIFICATION_IN_FORM_V
IEW
'NO*
User modify protection flag for

contents in the drawing form
view.
Values:
NO = Whole form view is
protected from modification.
OnlyRuleBasedText = Texts
defined by rules are possible
to modify.
YES = Contents of whole form
view can be modified.
NO
INITIAL_AUTO_STRUCTURE
Code for initial setting of the

Subpicture - Current selection
for new drawings to automatic.
YES = Set
NO = Do not set
CLOUD_BULGE_MAX
PROTECT_FORMS
NO
OPEN_FILE_AS_READONLY
Never
The number of bulges along

the longest side of the cloud
control polygon
NO = Drawing forms can be
saved
YES = Drawing forms can not be
saved
This keyword controls the

initial status of the Read-Only
check button when invoking
the File/Open dialog. Legal
values are:
Never = Not checked
Modal = Same as last time
Always = Checked
RESET_LAYER_STATUS_WHEN_NEW_
DWG
NO
This keyword controls the

reset of the layer display
status when creating a new
drawing (File/New). Legal
values are:
NO = Keep settings as is
YES = Reset the display settings
(show all layers)

A:24
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
ALLOW_OVERWRITE_WHEN_SAVE_AS
NO
Controls if it is allowed to
overwrite an existing drawing
during the File/Save As.
operation.
Legal values:
YES = Allow overwriting, after
user confirmation
NO = Do not allow overwriting
RULER_TICK_LABEL_DIV
When creating a 2D ruler or a

Position ruler, the tick
numbers divisible by this
integer will be labelled.
Note: that the label divider
must be positive.
RULER_FRAME_PREF
Prefix to frame positioning

ruler numbering.
KEEP_HIDDEN_LINE_REM_ON_SHAD
ING
NO
Used in order not to destroy

Hidden Line Presentations on
views when using the Shading
function.
If set to YES, the system will
check every time shading is
done on a view if that view is
currently presented in Hidden
Line Mode. If that is the case,
a copy of that view will be
created and the shading view
will be based on this copy
preserving the original Hidden
Line View.
Important: If the shaded view
is based on the
copy,
then
changes in the
original view will
NOT be reflected
on the shaded
view.

A:25
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
GENERAL_RESTR_AVERAGE_SEGMEN
T_LENGTH
10.0
General Restriction Symbol:
GENERAL_RESTR_DEVIATION_MAX
1.0
The average distance

between adjacent nodes,
along the centre line
General Restriction Symbol
The max deviation from centre
line for each node,
perpendicular to centre line
REPORT_PPOINT_INFO
YES
YES 0 log coordinates in

message window (Dimension
/ 3D / Coordinates)
NO = Do not log the coordinates
INCLUDE_TRACE_CURVES
NO
Controls if shell profile trace

curves should be considered
by Insert Model and selection
tools in Curved Hull.
SEARCH_ALL_DEPTS
YES
Controls the status of the

Search
all
drawings
checkbox
in
the
Open
Drawing dialog.
Yes = Checked. System
searches for the drawings of
drawing type specified in the
Open Drawing form in all
departments available in the
current MDB.
No = Not checked System
searches for the drawings of
specified type in the
department and registry
specified in the Open
Drawing form available in the
current MDB.

A:26
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
IGNORE_MARPTYPE_FOR_USERDEF
NO
This keyword affects the

method used by the system
when searching for user
defined drawing types in the
draft database (when listing
drawings
in
the
Open
Drawing dialog for instance).
By default, the system is
listing the drawings according
to the attribute automatically
set when creating a drawing of
a specific type. The attribute is
MARPTYPE on the SHEET
element holding the marine
drawing type.
If the user is to list drawings
from an external database set
up as a user defined drawing
type it could happen that no
drawings are listed in the
Open Drawing dialog. This
happens if the MARPTYPE
does not match the drawing
type set up in the current
project for user defined type.
As a solution you can ask the
system to ignore MARPTYPE
when searching for drawings
by setting this keyword to
YES.
Possible values:
No = Only accept drawings
where MARPTYPE attribute
matches the drawing type.
Yes = Ignore MARPTYPE
attribute when searching for
drawings.
Please note that this keyword

affects the search result in
several contexts:

A:27
Open Drawing dialog
Sy013
Data extraction
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
HSV_IGNORE_OUTFITTING
NO
If you set the keyword to YES

the system will ignore the
handling of Outfitting and
section planes when creating/
recreating hull symbolic views.
By default the system will add/
remove contents of the ID list
of the view (for outfitting
models) and also add/remove
section planes representing
the limits and depth of the
view.
The keyword can be used by
customers that have created
their own handling of outfitting
models in the hull symbolic
view and want to avoid
interference with the built in
solution.
NO
DWG_NAME_UPPERCASE
Controls default behaviour of

the drawing name input field in
New and Open Drawing
dialog.
Yes = automatically convert input
characters to uppercase
No = allow lowercase characters
to be inserted
115
DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN
With this default you can

control the maximum number
of characters that the user can
give in the drawing name. The
default value is the maximum
value which is 115. The
minimum value is 10.
This restriction is valid when
creating a new drawing with
the New Drawing function or
when using Vitesse/MARAPI.
It does not restrict the name
on a SHEET element if you
create in command window or
via the ADP programs.

A:28
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
TEXT_FONT_SMOOTHING
System
Determines whether the font

smoothing feature is enabled.
This
feature
uses
font
antialiasing to make font
curves appear smoother by
painting pixels at different gray
levels. Setting this to Off can
improve
performance
on
some systems.
System = use the Smooth edges
of screen fonts setting
defined in Windows.
On = Always use antialiasing for
true type texts.
Off = Dont use antialiasing for
true type texts.

A:29
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
AUTO_CHAIN
NO
When creating new contours,

these will optionally be
chained to existing contours in
the drawing. This option is
controlled by this keyword.
The system will compare the
start and ending points of the
new contour with the ones of
existing contours structurally
belonging to the same
component as the created
one. If any of them coincides
with the start/ending points of
the new contour this one will
be chained to the new
contour. Note that at most two
contours can be chained to
the new geometry, one in the
beginning and one in the end.
Yes = Autochain enabled
No = Autochain disabled
The criteria for an existing

contour to be chained to the
created one is thus:
AUTO_CHAIN is set to
Yes
The existing contour

belongs to the same
component
as
the
created one
The existing contour is

not closed
The start or ending points

of the existing contour
coincides
(zero
tolerance) with the start/
ending points of the
created contour
The Automatic Chain concept

is
implemented
in
the
following functions:

A:30
Insert/Polyline
Insert/Staircase
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
VIEW_TYPE
Wireline
hidden
line
The default type for a new

view.
See
Outfitting
documentation
for
more
information. Possible values
are:
Wireline
Wireline hidden line
Modelled wireline
Local hidden line
Global hidden line
Universal hidden line
VIEW_STYLE
""
The default representation

style for new views. See the
Outfitting documentation for
more information.
VIEW_ARC_TOLERANCE
The default arc tolerance for a

view. See the Outfitting
documentation
for
more
information.
INITIAL_DRAWING
NONE
Defines the default action at

start-up of Marine Drafting and
Hull Design.
Possible values are:
NONE = Do nothing.
NEW = Open a drawing named
UNTITLED<n> where <n> is
selected so that
UNTITLED<n> is nonexisting.
LAST = Open the most recently
used drawing.
ASK_NEW = Show the New
Drawing dialog.
ASK_OPEN = Show the Open
drawing dialog.
ALLOW_RESTRICT_INVISIBLE_GEO
M
NO
Controls if invisible elements

should be treated in the
Delete-By-Area function or
not.
Legal values:
NO = Do not treat invisible
elements in the DeleteByArea function
YES =Treat invisible elements in
the Delete-By-Area function

A:31
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
MODEL_COMPONENT_AS_CURRENT_A
LLOW
YES
Controls the protection of

model components in the
function Sub-picture Current.
Legal values:
NO = Deny model component to
be set as current
YES = Allow model component
to be set as current
Confirm = Let user confirm each
time
MODEL_SUBPICTURE_2DREGROUP_A
LLOW
YES
Controls the behaviour in the

functions Regroup Subpicture, Split Sub-picture
and Copy Sub-picture.
Legal values:
YES = Allow model evaluation to
be part of operation
NO = Deny model evaluation to
be part of operation
Confirm = Let user confirm each
time
YES
FILL_STYLE_SEND_TO_BACK
Controls if contours with fill

style should be drawn first
Legal values:
NO = The rendering order is
determined by the system
(depends primarily on colour
and secondarily on traversal
order)
YES = Contours with fill style will
be drawn first, thus making
sure nothing else is obscured
by the fill style evaluation.
Note 1: using this feature might
slow down performance
slightly (about 15%) during
repaint operations.
Note 2: solid-filled contours in
system components (e.g.
leader line terminator arrows
in label components) will not
be drawn first.

A:32
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
RULER_LONGITUDINAL_PREF
Controls prefix for

longitudinales in the Annotate/
Position Ruler function.
Legal values:
Any String
YES
RENDER_AUTO_BLANKING
Controls globally whether

auto-blanking should be
applied during repaint.
Legal values:
YES = Blanking enabled
NO = Blanking disabled
A.4.25
PADD Database
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
KEEP_SESSION_FILES
NO
Every time you perform a

Save Drawing a new
version of the .SDB file will be
saved. By default previous
versions will be deleted. If you
want to keep old versions you
should set this keyword to
Yes. Keeping all session files
will make it possible to do
DABACON operations like, for
example roll back, but can on
the other hand bloat your file
system.

A:33
12 Series

Appendices
Keyword
System
default
value
Explanation
MAX_DWGS_IN_REGI
1000
This is the maximum number

of drawings that will be stored
in one REGI element. When
the REGI is full a new version
is created. The default value is
1000. This check is performed
when you create the new
drawing with Marine Drafting
functionality, interactively or
via Vitesse/MARAPI. If you
create a drawing in the
Command Window no such
check is performed.
DENY_UPDATE_OF_NON_PERSISTED
_GEOM
NO
Controls the behavior of

updating a geometry element
belonging
to
a
system
component.
When updating a geometry
element belonging to a system
component that is persisted,
the system can react in two
ways:
allowing
the
update,
keeping in mind that the
modification will be lost at
the time the component
is re-evaluated
deny the modification on

geometry
level
and
instead
allowing
the
modification
on
component level, if this is
possible
The
system
will
deny
modification on geometry level
if and only if
the geometry belongs to

a
persisted
system
component
the modification makes

sense on component
level
this keyword is set to

YES
NO = Allow modification on
geometry level
YES = Deny modification on
geometry level

A:34
12 Series

Appendices
A.5
Example of a Default File

To generate an example of a default file, please do the following steps:
1. Temporary un-assign the environment variable SBD_DEF1
2. Start Drafting (or any Drafting-based) application
3. Invoke Format/Defaults/Options/Save to get an example of a default file, with system
initial values
A.6
Colour Tables
A.6.1
General
Geometric entities in the drawings can be displayed in a total of 256 different colours. The
colours are named according to the fixed RGB mix. There are 61 colours with descriptive
names, the rest are named Colour_<running number>. Below is a list of the system code,
the name and the RGB mix.
.
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Green
129
Black
Wheat
255
212
170
MediumAquamarine
126
189
173
NavyBlue
129
DarkOrchid
141
189
Cyan
255
255
Firebrick
189
46
Orange
255
191
ForestGreen
31
129
DimGrey
10
105
105
105
Tan
11
189
189
126
Blue
12
255
Aquamarine
13
170
255
212
SlateBlue
14
126
126
189
Violet
15
238
170
255
IndianRed
16
189
126
126
Gold
17
189
141

A:35
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Magenta
18
255
255
LimeGreen
19
46
189
Grey
20
128
128
128
Sienna
21
129
86
86
Turquoise
22
255
191
LightBlue
23
170
212
255
Red
24
189
BlueViolet
25
127
255
Pink
26
255
170
212
Coral
27
189
126
141
SpringGreen
28
255
127
LightGrey
29
190
190
190
Yellow
30
255
255
Maroon
31
129
OrangeRed
32
255
63
CoralRed
33
189
141
126
GreyT50
34
80
80
80
White
35
255
255
255
Tomato
36
255
127
Chocolate
37
189
94
SandyBrown
38
189
157
126
DarkBrown
39
129
64
LightGold
40
255
234
170
Beige
41
189
173
126
BrightOrange
42
255
255
LightYellow
43
255
255
170
Kahki
44
234
255
170
YellowGreen
45
141
189
DarkGreen
46
104
WhiteSmoke
47
170
255
255
DarkSlateGrey
48
53
79
79

A:36
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
PowderBlue
49
170
234
255
SteelBlue
50
86
118
129
RoyalBlue
51
127
255
MidnightBlue
52
25
104
Plum
53
212
170
255
Indigo
54
64
129
Mauve
55
96
129
DeepPink
56
255
127
Salmon
57
255
191
170
Brown
58
189
46
DarkGrey
59
130
130
130
Ivory
60
255
255
255
BrightRed
61
255
Colour_63
62
255
Colour_64
63
65
65
65
Colour_65
64
255
Colour_66
65
255
170
170
Colour_67
66
104
Colour_68
67
104
69
69
Colour_69
68
79
Colour_70
69
79
53
53
Colour_71
70
129
31
Colour_72
71
129
96
86
Colour_73
72
104
25
Colour_74
73
104
78
69
Colour_75
74
79
19
Colour_76
75
79
59
53
Colour_77
76
129
107
86
Colour_78
77
104
52
Colour_79
78
104
86
69
Colour_80
79
79
39

A:37
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_81
80
79
66
53
Colour_82
81
129
96
Colour_83
82
129
118
86
Colour_84
83
104
78
Colour_85
84
104
95
69
Colour_86
85
79
59
Colour_87
86
79
73
53
Colour_88
87
189
189
Colour_89
88
129
129
Colour_90
89
129
129
86
Colour_91
90
104
104
Colour_92
91
104
104
69
Colour_93
92
79
79
Colour_94
93
79
79
53
Colour_95
94
191
255
Colour_96
95
173
189
126
Colour_97
96
96
129
Colour_98
97
118
129
86
Colour_99
98
78
104
Colour_100
99
95
104
69
Colour_101
100
59
79
Colour_102
101
73
79
53
Colour_103
102
127
255
Colour_104
103
212
255
170
Colour_105
104
94
189
Colour_106
105
157
189
126
Colour_107
106
64
129
Colour_108
107
107
129
86
Colour_109
108
52
104
Colour_110
109
86
104
69
Colour_111
110
39
79

A:38
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_112
111
66
79
53
Colour_113
112
63
255
Colour_114
113
191
255
170
Colour_115
114
141
189
126
Colour_116
115
96
129
86
Colour_117
116
25
104
Colour_118
117
78
104
69
Colour_119
118
19
79
Colour_120
119
59
79
53
Colour_121
120
255
Colour_122
121
170
255
170
Colour_123
122
189
Colour_124
123
126
189
126
Colour_125
124
86
129
86
Colour_126
125
69
104
69
Colour_127
126
79
Colour_128
127
53
79
53
Colour_129
128
255
63
Colour_130
129
170
255
191
Colour_131
130
189
46
Colour_132
131
126
189
141
Colour_133
132
129
31
Colour_134
133
86
129
96
Colour_135
134
104
25
Colour_136
135
69
104
78
Colour_137
136
79
19
Colour_138
137
53
79
59
Colour_139
138
189
94
Colour_140
139
126
189
157
Colour_141
140
129
64
Colour_142
141
86
129
107

A:39
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_143
142
104
52
Colour_144
143
69
104
86
Colour_145
144
79
39
Colour_146
145
53
79
66
Colour_147
146
170
255
234
Colour_148
147
189
141
Colour_149
148
129
96
Colour_150
149
86
129
118
Colour_151
150
104
78
Colour_152
151
69
104
95
Colour_153
152
79
59
Colour_154
153
53
79
73
Colour_155
154
255
255
Colour_156
155
189
189
Colour_157
156
126
189
189
Colour_158
157
129
129
Colour_159
158
86
129
129
Colour_160
159
104
104
Colour_161
160
69
104
104
Colour_162
161
79
79
Colour_163
162
191
255
Colour_164
163
141
189
Colour_165
164
126
173
189
Colour_166
165
96
129
Colour_167
166
78
104
Colour_168
167
69
95
104
Colour_169
168
59
79
Colour_170
169
53
73
79
Colour_171
170
94
189
Colour_172
171
126
157
189
Colour_173
172
64
129

A:40
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_174
173
86
107
129
Colour_175
174
52
104
Colour_176
175
69
86
104
Colour_177
176
39
79
Colour_178
177
53
66
79
Colour_179
178
63
255
Colour_180
179
170
191
255
Colour_181
180
46
189
Colour_182
181
126
141
189
Colour_183
182
31
129
Colour_184
183
86
96
129
Colour_185
184
69
78
104
Colour_186
185
19
79
Colour_187
186
53
59
79
Colour_188
187
255
Colour_189
188
170
170
255
Colour_190
189
189
Colour_191
190
86
86
129
Colour_192
191
104
Colour_193
192
69
69
104
Colour_194
193
79
Colour_195
194
53
53
79
Colour_196
195
63
255
Colour_197
196
191
170
255
Colour_198
197
46
189
Colour_199
198
141
126
189
Colour_200
199
31
129
Colour_201
200
96
86
129
Colour_202
201
25
104
Colour_203
202
78
69
104
Colour_204
203
19
79

A:41
12 Series

Appendices
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_205
204
59
53
79
Colour_206
205
94
189
Colour_207
206
157
126
189
Colour_208
207
107
86
129
Colour_209
208
52
104
Colour_210
209
86
69
104
Colour_211
210
39
79
Colour_212
211
66
53
79
Colour_213
212
191
255
Colour_214
213
173
126
189
Colour_215
214
118
86
129
Colour_216
215
78
104
Colour_217
216
95
69
104
Colour_218
217
59
79
Colour_219
218
73
53
79
Colour_220
219
255
255
Colour_221
220
255
170
255
Colour_222
221
189
189
Colour_223
222
189
126
189
Colour_224
223
129
129
Colour_225
224
129
86
129
Colour_226
225
104
104
Colour_227
226
104
69
104
Colour_228
227
79
79
Colour_229
228
79
53
79
Colour_230
229
255
191
Colour_231
230
255
170
234
Colour_232
231
189
141
Colour_233
232
189
126
173
Colour_234
233
129
96
Colour_235
234
129
86
118

A:42
12 Series

Appendices
A.7
Colour Name
Colour Code
Red
Green
Blue
Colour_236
235
104
78
Colour_237
236
104
69
95
Colour_238
237
79
59
Colour_239
238
79
53
73
Colour_240
239
189
94
Colour_241
240
189
126
157
Colour_242
241
129
64
Colour_243
242
129
86
107
Colour_244
243
104
52
Colour_245
244
104
69
86
Colour_246
245
79
39
Colour_247
246
79
53
66
Colour_248
247
255
63
Colour_249
248
255
170
191
Colour_250
249
129
31
Colour_251
250
129
86
96
Colour_252
251
104
25
Colour_253
252
104
69
78
Colour_254
253
79
19
Colour_255
254
79
53
59
Colour_256
255
51
51
51
Example of a Layer Alias File

Layer number
Layer name
1001
'VIEW1'
1002
'VIEW2'
1101
'PANEL'
1201
'CURVE'
1109
'STIFF'

A:43
12 Series

Appendices
A.8
Layer number
Layer name
1113
'F L A NGE '
'DIM'
'POSNO'
'NOTE'
25
'CABIN'
Example of a Layer Class File

CLASS,1/PIPE;
MEASURE,11;
POSNO,21;
HATCHING,31;
CLASS,2;
NOTE,22;
POSNO,32;
HATCHING,42;
GEOMETRY,52;
TEXT,62;
CLASS,15/DRAW;
MEASURE,115;
NOTE,215;
HATCHING,415;
GEOMETRY,515;
TEXT,615;
SYMBOL,715;
A.9
Example of a Material Alias File

Hard area = 0
Service area = 1
Isolation area = 2
A.10 Example of an Intelligent Texts file for Labels

The customer specification of intelligent texts is set up in a text file in a simple format,
described in detail below. The intelligent texts are used from dynamic text forms.
The intelligent texts file is divided into sections. Each section starts with header, consisting
of section name enclosed into brackets. In next lines after section header text definitions are
given. The text definition consists of friendly name and intelligent text code word. It is also
possible to add comments in the file, enclosed in block starting and ending from "minus"
character.

A:44
12 Series

Appendices
For detailed description of code words see also User Guide Draft / Outfitting Draft /
Intelligent Text / Intelligent Text Syntax - Summary.
An example of the file is given below:
Example:
{General}
--------------------General
--------------------Name
#FNAME
Owner
#OWNE
Branch
#BRAN(C2:)
Pipe
#PIPE(C2:)
Posn
#POS
{Drawing}
--------------------Drawing
--------------------Title
#DTITL
Author #AUTH<FR DRWG>
App
#APPR<FR DRWG>
Date
#DATE<FR DRWG>
Rev
#RVSN<FR DRWG>
A.11
System Layers
A.11.1
General Drafting Layers
Layer number
Type of information
-1
Measures
-2
Position numbers
-3
Notes
-4
Construction geometry
-6
Obscured (hidden) lines
-9
Markups
-11
Labels
-202
Hatching

A:45
12 Series

Appendices
A.11.2
Layer number
Type of information
-203
Projection vectors
-204
(Frame) ruler
-205
Pipe restriction symbol
-206
Restriction symbol
-207
Cross
-208
Hatching, user-defined pattern (component level)
-209
Created by geometry macro (component level)
-212
Cloud
-298
Node Tangent geometry
-299
Node Point geometry
-300
Drawing form
-301
Drawing form frame
-302
Drawing form table
-303
Drawing form, added information
-304
Drawing form frame (component level)
-306
Drawing form table (component level)
-308
Drawing form added auxiliary lines (component level)
-309
Drawing form added text (component level)
-316
Drawing form rules (subview level)
-330
Drawing form added drawing name (component level)
-1210
Curved panels
-1220
Hull surface
-1221
Hull subsurface
-1222
Lines Fairing definition curve
-1223
Lines Fairing definition point
Projection Layers
Layer number
Type of information
-1001
Standard projection 1 (Section)
-1002
Standard projection 2 (Elevation)

A:46
12 Series

Appendices
Layer number
Type of information
-1003
Standard projection 3 (Plan)
-1004
Standard projection 4 (Isometric)
-1005
Standard projection 5
-1006
Standard projection 6 (User defined)
-1101
Hull panel
-1102
Outer contour (panel or bracket)
-1103
Cutout
-1104
Seam
-1105
Bevel along outer contour
-1106
Seam line
-1107
Bevel symbol
-1108
Relief chamfer symbol
-1109
Stiffener
-1110
Stiffener line
-1111
Stiffener material symbol
-1112
Stiffener endcut symbol
-1113
Flange
-1114
Bracket
-1115
Bracket mould line
-1116
Bracket material symbol
-1117
Profile section
-1118
Profile section contour
-1119
Profile section text
-1120
Clips
-1121
Notch
-1122
Pillar
-1123
Hole
-1201
Shell section
-1202
Shell section curve
-1203
Shell section profile

A:47
12 Series

Appendices
A.11.3
Hull Modelling Layers

In Hull Modelling some layers are hidden in the drawing by default. They are:
A.11.4
A.11.5
Layer
Explanation
-131
Stiffener and pillar text (POSNO)
-133
Flange text (POSNO)
-136
Plate and bracket text (POSNO and dimensions)
-219
Clips text
Outfitting Layers
Layer number
Type of Information
-2701
Pipe
-2801
Equipment
-2901
Cable way
-3001
Room
-3101
Structure
-3201
Ventilation
General 3D Picture Layers
Layer number
Type of information
-1901
Backdrop
A.12 Symbol Fonts Reserved by the System

The symbols fonts reserved by the system are all located in the range 1-99, but there are
also user fonts located in this area. In the range 100-999 only user fonts are allowed.
Font
Description
User font: Arbrit
System and user font: Nesting
System font: Facit printer text font 0
System font: Facit printer symbol font

A:48
12 Series

Appendices
Font
Description
User font: SDS
System font:
System font: Diagram
System and user font: SDS
User font: PSE
10
System font: PSE
11
User font: Diagram
12
User font: Diagram
13
User font: Diagram
14
User font: Diagram
15
User font: Diagram
16
User font: Diagram
17
User font: Diagram
18
User font: Diagram
19
User font: Diagram
20
User font: Diagram
21
System font: SBD
22
System font: SBD
23
System font: SBD, system menu font
24
System font: Not in use
25
26
27
28
29
System font: Cable diagram
30
System and user font: Cable diagram
31
System font: Tablet menu symbols
32
User font: General diagram
33
34
35

A:49
12 Series

Appendices
Font
Description
36
37
38
39
40
41
System font: Alternative font for Note and Position Number symbols
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
System font: Hull modelling
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66

A:50
12 Series

Appendices
Font
Description
67
68
69
70
71
User font: SBD
72
User font: SBD
73
User font: SBD
74
User font: SBD
75
User font: SBD
76
User font: SBD
77
User font: SBD
78
User font: SBD
79
User font: SBD
80
System font: SBD, IGES font 1 symbols
81
82
83
System font: SBA, Accommodation menu symbols
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
System font: HULL, Bevel symbols
91
System font: HULL, Interactive bracket symbols
92
System font: HULL, Excess symbols
93
System font: HULL, End cut symbols
94
95
96
97

A:51
12 Series

Appendices
Font
Description
98
99
A.13 System-defined Text Fonts

The table below describes the included vector fonts:
Number
Font Code standard
AVEVA Marine standard
US ASCII
Swedish 1 national ASCII
Swedish 1 / Finnish national ASCII
Danish / Norwegian national ASCII
German national ASCII
British national ASCII
Russian AVEVA Marine standard
A.14 Example of a DXF Layer Control File

A layer control file could look like the example below. Note that in this example there are 4
different entries for stiffener, allowing separate layers for stiffeners with different
combinations of colour line type and thickness. Up to 20 entries for each model type are
allowed.
PROFILES
PROF4
24
SHORTDASH
THIN
PLATES
PLAT1
SOLID
THIN
STIFFENERS
STIF1
SOLID
THIN
STIFFENERS
STIF2
24
DASHDOT
XWIDE
STIFFENERS
STIF3
24
SOLID
WIDE
STIFFENERS
STIF4
24
DASHED
THIN
MEASURES
MEAS1
24
ALL
THIN
MEASURES
MEAS3
SOLID
THIN
FLANGES
FLANG
ALL
ALL
ALL
BRACKETS
BRA
SOLID
THIN
NOTCHES
NOTCH
SOLID
THIN

A:52
12 Series

Appendices
CUTOUTS
CUT1
ALL
SOLID
THIN
NOTES
NOTE
SOLID
THIN
TEXT
TEXT1
SOLID
THIN
HOLE
HOLE1
ALL
SOLID
ALL
PILLARS
PILLAR1
24
SOLID
XWIDE
SYMBOLS
SYMBOL1
35
SOLID
ALL
NOTCH
NOTCH1
ALL
SOLID
THIN
DEFAULT
DEFA
SOLID
WIDE
PROFILES
PROF1
SOLID
THIN
PROFILES
PROF2
SOLID
THIN
PROFILES
PROF3
24
DASHDOT
XWIDE
PROFILES
PROF5
24
DASHED
THIN
SEAM
SEAM1
24
SOLID
WIDE
SEAM
SEAM2
35
TRACK
THIN
SEAM
SEAM3
SOLID
THIN
This example is also available as a file for copy and further use: Drafting_dxf_layer_ctrl.txt
The valid colour codes and corresponding colour are as below:
ALL
Any colour
GREEN
BLACK
CYAN
12
BLUE
18
MAGENTA
24
RED
30
YELLOW
35
WHITE
WHEAT
MEDIUMAQUAMARINE
NAVYBLUE
DARKORCHID
FIREBRICK

A:53
12 Series

Appendices
ORANGE
FORESTGREEN
10
DIMGREY
The key word of valid line types as below, corresponding to basic linetypes
ALL
Any line type
SOLID
Solid line
DASHED
Dashed line
DASHDOT
Dashed and dotted line
DASHDOT2
Dashed and double dotted line
SHORTDASH
Short dashed line
DASHSOLID
Dashed and solid in parallel
TRACK
Track line
The valid thickness codes as below:

ALL
Any thickness
THIN
Thin line
WIDE
Wide line
XWIDE
Extra wide line
The syntax rules for the file are as follows:

Each line should consist of two strings separated by one or more blank spaces. The first
string is a keyword string for the model or annotation element. The first 4 letters are
significant. The second string is the user defined layer name, which should have
alphanumerical characters. The layer names must be unique.
A.15 Backup and Restore Facilities for Drawings

Outfitting Draft and Marine Drafting applications provide enhancements to the Datal
functionality, supporting the backup and restoring of the Marine Drawing files, Picture files
and Final Designer files (if used) related to SHEE and OVER elements being archived.
By default, this functionality is turned off. In order to request the OUTPUT command to take
copies of the related files, the following command should be used first:
OUTPUTDRAWINGS "foldername"
or
OUTPUTDRAWINGS /foldername (only if folder does not include any spaces)

This establishes the named folder as the location to which copies of all the related files will
be saved. As a result, any subsequently created Datal listing would contain additional

A:54
12 Series

Appendices
LOADDRAWINGS commands, requesting the loading of the saved related files on restore.
This functionality can be turned off again using the command:
OUTPUTDRAWINGS OFF
The Datal listing may be created as usual either using the user interface, or in the
Command Window using the OUTPUT command.
The file backup facilities are supported only for the OUTPUT command doing the full listing,
and not just the listing of changes.
Important: It is crucial, that the SAMEREF option is always used during OUTPUT executed
for backup purposes.
In order to restore the SHEE or OVER from the backup, the following actions are needed:
1. Close any current drawing.
2. Make sure, that the element being restored does not exist in the database. Delete it if
necessary, and issue the SAVEWORK command.
3. Navigate to the intended owner of the restored element.
4. Make sure, that the related files to be restored are still in the location as given in the
LOADDRAWINGS FROM folder command in the DB listing macro. If it has changed,
modify the folder name in the macro accordingly.
5. Run the DB listing macro
6. If everything went fine, issue the SAVEWORK command.
Note: It is not enough to use the REPLACE option of the OUTPUT command to get rid of
an existing element being replaced. This element has to be removed manually in
step 1 above.
It is important, that the value of the PVNO attribute of the restored SHEE or OVER is higher
than any of the values used in the past history of this element. For performance reasons the
scan of the history is limited by default to the 100 database sessions. The user might want
to scan more sessions, e.g. if there are many users working on the same database, or if the
element being restored was deleted from the database a long time ago. This can be done by
defining an environment variable AVEVA_RESTORE_MAXSESSIONS before starting the
application.
Example:
The command
set AVEVA_RESTORE_MAXSESSIONS=1000
would request scanning of the past 1000 sessions instead of the default 100. Of course, the
scan continues only until the element is found in a past session with the value of the PVNO
attribute greater or equal to the one being restored, so in most cases there will not be 1000
sessions scanned.

A:55
12 Series

Appendices
Note: The restored drawing may not be consistent with the current state of the Design
database, and needs to be validated before use. To guarantee consistency between
Draft and Design databases, the existing functionality of backtracking databases in
an MDB to a given stamp is recommended.
A.16 Remove Obsolete .SDB Files

When sessions are merged in a PADD database, it is possible to specify if .SDB if should be
considered for deletion too via a file purge option (see Administration - Reference Manual Command Details - MERGE CHANGES). If file purging is not utilized as part of the merge
session operation, obsolete files can be deleted as a separate action via a PML form as
described below.
To show the form In Marine Drafting or Hull Design, type in the following in the Command
Window:
show !!RemoveObsoleteSDB
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
User access right must be FREE.
No other user is connected to the project.
It is also highly recommended that changes in PADD databases are merged first. The fewer
sessions there are, the faster the macro will finish.
Click the Find obsolete SDB files button. All 32 directories below %<proj>DRG% are
scanned and each .SDB file is checked. Please note that this might take a long time if there
are many sessions in the database. All obsolete SDB files are listed. The list shows the
name of the obsolete file together with the reason why it is obsolete.
Missing element - the SHEE no longer exists.
Replaced - the SHEE element uses another SDB file (new version).
Not SHEE - the element exists but it is not SHEE.
Right-click in the list to:
Sort the list.
Delete individual obsolete .SDB file.
There are three buttons that perform an action for all .SDB files in the list:
Delete all .SDB files in the list.
Move all .SDB files in the list to the given directory.
Export the list to a CSV file.
It is possible to customize the path that is used by the application when moving .SDB files.
Set the environment variable SBB_OBSOLETE_SDB_BACKUP to the path of an existing
directory. If the variable is not set then Windows variable TEMP is used.

A:56
12 Series

Appendices
A.17 Drawing Types

Drawing
Type
Number
Drawing Type
Environment value for

Drawing Type
The value of the variable
should be set to the name
of the variable
Environment variable
defining Destination
DEPT and REGI for
drawing in PADD
database
Should
be
set
<DEPT>;<REGI>
to:
From
12.1SP4
this
<DEPT> is the fallback
destination, which is used
only in case there is no
PADDXP matching this
drawing type.
1
General Drawing
SB_PDB
SB_PDB_PADD
General Subpicture
SBD_PICT
SBD_PICT_PADD
Assembly Drawing
SB_ASSPDB
SB_ASSPDB_PADD
Pipe Sketch
SBP_SKETCH_DB
SBP_SKETCH_DB_PADD
Hull wcog drawing
SBH_WCOG_DWG
SBH_WCOG_DWG_PAD
D
Hull Partlist Drawing
SBH_PARTLIST_DWG
SBH_PARTLIST_DWG_P
ADD
10
Hull Profile Sketch
SBH_PSKETCH_DWG
SBH_PSKETCH_DWG_P
ADD
11
Hull
Nested
Sketch
SBH_NSKETCH_DWG
SBH_NSKETCH_DWG_P
ADD
12
Hull Plate Jig Drawing
SBH_PLJIG_DWG
SBH_PLJIG_DWG_PADD
13
Hull Pin Jig Drawing
SBH_PINJIG_DWG
SBH_PINJIG_DWG_PAD
D
14
Hull Bending Template

Drawing
SBH_BENDTEMPL_DWG
SBH_BENDTEMPL_DWG
_PADD
15
Hull Planar Part Drawing
SBH_PPART_DWG
SBH_PPART_DWG_PAD
D
16
Hull Curved Part Drawing
SBH_CPART_DWG
SBH_CPART_DWG_PAD
D
17, 18, 26
Hull Nesting / Panel Line

Sketch
SB_NPL_DWG
SB_NPL_DWG_PADD
19
Hull
3-axis
sketch
SBH_3AX_SKETCHDB
SBH_3AX_SKETCHDB_P
ADD

Profile
nesting
A:57
12 Series

Appendices
20
Hull Receipt Drawing
SBH_RECEIPT
SBH_RECEIPT_PADD
21
Settings Drawing
SB_SETTINGS_DB
SB_SETTINGS_DB_PAD
D
22
Drawing Form
SBD_FORM
SBD_FORM_PADD
23
Standard subpicture
SBD_STD
SBD_STD_PADD
27
Hull Mark Texts
SBH_MARK_PICT
SBH_MARK_PICT_PADD
28
Assembly ADP Drawing
SB_ASSADP_PDB
SB_ASSADP_PDB_PADD
29
HVAC sketch
SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB
SB_HVAC_SKETCH_PDB
_PADD
30
Isometric ADP drawing
SB_ISOADP_PDB
SB_ISOADP_PDB_PADD
31
Steelwork Detailing ADP

drawing
SB_STEELWORK_DETAI
L_PDB
SB_STEELWORK_DETAI
L_PDB_PADD
32
Area-Based
drawing
ADP
SB_ABAADP_PDB
SB_ABAADP_PDB_PADD
33
Multi-Discipline
ADP drawing
Support
SB_MDSADP_PDB
SB_MDSADP_PDB_PAD
D
1001 - 1999
User Defined Drawing

Type <nnn> (1 - 999)
SB_PDB<nnn>
SB_PDB<nnn>_PADD

A:58
12 Series

Marine Drafting

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Marine Drafting

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Marine

AVEVA Solutions Limited

Marine Drafting User Guide

September 2011 12.1

September 2011 12.1

New Chapter in 3. Utilities: 3.4 SY013 - Store Drawings in the

September 2011 12.1

New function in Operators Instructions; Design Area Docs.

Copyright added to all pages.

Operators Instructions update to 2D Restrictions. Update to

Changes to chapter 3, Utilities.

Chapter A3 Preview Images in Appendices removed.

New Multi-row dimension texts added in Operators Instructions

Chapter utilities, information about drawing forms required by

Operators Instructions change to Modify/Dimension multiple

Model Viewing and General Drafting; new 2.7 Change

New Chapter in A12 System Layers; A.12.4 Outfitting Layers

New function Autotagging added to Operators Instructions.

Distance to RSO added to Operators Instructions.

New functions added to Operators Instructions: Save to SDB

Update to chapter Automatic Drawing Production (ADP).

Update to Operators Instructions / Dimension / 3D / Distance to

New chapter in Appendices; Remove Obsolete .SDB Files.

New chapter in Operators Instruction/Tools/Model View - Split

New default keyword - DWG_NAME_MAX_LEN

Two new default keywords MODEL_SUBPICTURE_2DREGROUP_ALLOW and

New functionality in Open Drawing - Read-only mode.

Marine Drafting User Guide

Improved functionality for editing evaluation of dimension text.

A number of Drafting keywords controlling the blanking concept

New functionality; Distribute Drawings of a certain type across

New chapter in Operatorss Instructions Drafting / ANNOTATE/

Marine Drafting User Guide

Marine Drafting User Guide

SAVE AND UNCLAIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

DATA BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

NEW VIEWPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:46

PERSPECTIVE CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52

LOG VIEWER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

REFERENCE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55

COMMAND WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:55

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

LOCAL ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:81

MODEL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:104

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

DRAWING FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:136

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

HULL NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:198

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

Copyright 1974 to current year.

Marine Drafting User Guide

Marine Drafting User Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Drawing Production (ADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

Command Accelerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2